cns9601 Om-C

Operator’s Manual
Central Monitor
CNS-9601K
If you have any comments or suggestions

on this manual, please contact us at:
www.nihonkohden.com 0614-901915C
Copyright Notice
The entire contents of this manual are copyrighted by Nihon Kohden. All rights are reserved. No part of this
document may be reproduced, stored, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical,
photocopied, recorded, or otherwise) without the prior written permission of Nihon Kohden.
Contents 1
3
GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. i
WARRANTY POLICY.......................................................................................................... ii 4
EMC RELATED CAUTION...................................................................................................iii
Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument.............................................................. vi 5
Warnings, Cautions and Notes................................................................................. vi
Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument....................................vii
6
Related Documentation...................................................................................................... ix 7
8
Section 1 General.................................................................................... 1.1
8-1
Introduction....................................................................................................................... 1.3
Central Monitor Composition............................................................................................ 1.5 8-2
Network Composition........................................................................................................ 1.6
Operation Restriction by Monitored Bed Type........................................................ 1.7 9
Alarm Function............................................................................................. 1.7
10
Parameter Setup/Personal Setup/Setup....................................................... 1.7
Operation Restriction Depending on Whether Data Is Stored in the Central 10-1
Monitor.................................................................................................................... 1.8
Monitored Bed and Overview Bed.......................................................................... 1.8 10-2
Monitored Bed.............................................................................................. 1.8
10-3
Overview Bed............................................................................................... 1.8
Types of Screens and Windows........................................................................................ 1.9 10-4
All Beds Screens.................................................................................................... 1.9
Overview Bed Menu Window................................................................................ 1.10 10-5
Menu Window....................................................................................................... 1.10
Individual Bed Windows........................................................................................ 1.10 10-6
Review Windows................................................................................................... 1.11

10-7
Multi Patient Alarms Windows.............................................................................. 1.12
System Setup Screen........................................................................................... 1.12 10-8
Setup Window....................................................................................................... 1.12
Personal Setup Window........................................................................................ 1.13 10-9
Parameter Setup Window..................................................................................... 1.13
10-10
Basic Operation.............................................................................................................. 1.14
Control and Input.................................................................................................. 1.14 11
Touchkeys Input.......................................................................................... 1.14
Keyboard Input........................................................................................... 1.14 12
Mouse Input................................................................................................ 1.14
13
Key Operation at the Bottom of the Screen.......................................................... 1.15
Switching Windows............................................................................................... 1.15 14
Opening Other Windows from the Menu Window....................................... 1.15
Returning to the All Beds Screen............................................................... 1.15 15
Returning to the Previous Screen/Window................................................. 1.15
Opening the Individual Bed Window from the All Beds Screen.................. 1.16
16
Changing the Bed to Display or Change Settings...................................... 1.16
17
Opening Other Windows with Tabs............................................................. 1.16
18
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 C.
CONTENTS
Opening Other Windows with Function Keys............................................. 1.17

Changing Settings................................................................................................ 1.18
Scrolling Data and List.......................................................................................... 1.18
Entering Letters and Numbers.............................................................................. 1.19
Basic Keyboard Operation.................................................................................... 1.19
Backup Battery............................................................................................................... 1.20
Caution Mark.................................................................................................................. 1.21
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit.................................................................... 1.21
Important Safety Information.......................................................................................... 1.22
General................................................................................................................. 1.22
Installation............................................................................................................ 1.23
Network................................................................................................................ 1.24
Turning the Power On/Off..................................................................................... 1.25
Transmitter............................................................................................................ 1.25
Admission, Discharge and Changing the Receiving Channel.............................. 1.25
Pause Monitoring.................................................................................................. 1.26
Changing Monitor................................................................................................. 1.26
Patient Transfer..................................................................................................... 1.27
Alarm.................................................................................................................... 1.27
ECG Monitoring.................................................................................................... 1.29
Respiration Measurement.................................................................................... 1.30
Temperature Measurement................................................................................... 1.30
SpO2 Monitoring................................................................................................... 1.31
CO2 Monitoring..................................................................................................... 1.31
NIBP Measurement.............................................................................................. 1.31
Extended Units..................................................................................................... 1.32
Maintenance......................................................................................................... 1.32
Section 2 Panel Description................................................................... 2.1

Central Monitor Composition............................................................................................ 2.2
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit................................................................................. 2.3
Front Panel............................................................................................................. 2.3
Rear Panel.............................................................................................................. 2.3
LCD Display (Locally Purchased Display)........................................................................ 2.4
YL-960P Alarm Indicator................................................................................................... 2.5
Overview................................................................................................................. 2.5
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver................................................................................... 2.6
Front Panel............................................................................................................. 2.6
Rear Panel.............................................................................................................. 2.6
WS-960P Recorder Unit................................................................................................... 2.7
Front Panel............................................................................................................. 2.7
Rear Panel.............................................................................................................. 2.7
Laser Printer (Network Printer)......................................................................................... 2.8
Section 3 Preparation............................................................................. 3.1

Installation Conditions....................................................................................................... 3.2
C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

CONTENTS
Connecting the Components of the Central Monitor and Other Instruments and 1
Systems............................................................................................................................ 3.3
Connecting the Components of the Monitor and Other Instruments...................... 3.3 2
Standard Instruments................................................................................... 3.3
3
Optional Instruments.................................................................................... 3.3
Connecting to a Network System........................................................................... 3.3 4
Operation Flowchart......................................................................................................... 3.4
Loading the Recording Paper........................................................................................... 3.5 5
Handling the Recording Paper................................................................................ 3.5
Loading the Recording Paper in the WS-960P Recorder Unit................................ 3.5
6
Loading Paper in the Laser Printer......................................................................... 3.6
7
Turning Power On/Off....................................................................................................... 3.7
Preparation Before Power On................................................................................. 3.7 8
Turning the Central Monitor Main Unit Power On................................................... 3.7
8-1
Turning the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver Power On..................................... 3.8
Checking Items After Power On................................................................... 3.8
8-2
Turning the Power Off............................................................................................. 3.9
Preparation After Turning the Power On......................................................................... 3.10 9
Changing Settings on the System Setup Screen................................................. 3.10
Before Starting Monitoring.................................................................................... 3.11 10
Check Before Use........................................................................................................... 3.12
10-1
Check Before Turning On the Monitor................................................................... 3.12
Check After Turning On the Monitor and During Monitoring................................. 3.12 10-2
10-3
Section 4 System Setup Screen............................................................ 4.1
10-4
Overview of the System Setup Screen............................................................................. 4.2
Displaying the System Setup Screen..................................................................... 4.3 10-5
Sound Control................................................................................................................... 4.4
Setting Alarm Sound Volume.................................................................................. 4.4 10-6
Setting Sync Sound................................................................................................ 4.5

10-7
Turning the Sync Sound ON/OFF................................................................. 4.5
Changing the Sync Sound Pitch................................................................... 4.5 10-8
Setting the Sync Sound Bed........................................................................ 4.5
Setting Sync Sound Volume................................................................................... 4.5 10-9
Recording......................................................................................................................... 4.6
10-10
Touchkeys Setting............................................................................................................. 4.6
11
Section 5 Admitting/Discharging Patients............................................ 5.1 12

Admitting a Patient............................................................................................................ 5.2
13
Patient Information List........................................................................................... 5.3
Entering the Patient Information Using a Bar Code Reader................................... 5.4 14
Entering the Patient Information................................................................... 5.4
Changing the Patient Information................................................................. 5.5 15
Discharging a Patient........................................................................................................ 5.7
16
Selecting Discharge Mode or Delete Data Mode................................................... 5.8
Pause Monitoring a Patient............................................................................................... 5.9 17
Pause Timer.......................................................................................................... 5.11
18
CONTENTS
Resume Monitoring.............................................................................................. 5.13

Transferring a Patient to a Different Bedside Monitor..................................................... 5.14
Transferring a Patient............................................................................................ 5.16
Changing a Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on This Central Monitor............... 5.19
Changing the Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on Another Central Monitor...... 5.21
Automatically Changing the Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on
Another Central Monitor............................................................................. 5.22
Setting the Bed Color...................................................................................................... 5.23
Changing the Receiving Channel Number..................................................................... 5.25
Section 6 Alarm Function....................................................................... 6.1

Overview of Alarms........................................................................................................... 6.3
Alarm Types...................................................................................................................... 6.4
Alarm Level and Indication................................................................................................ 6.5
Alarm Level............................................................................................................. 6.5
Alarm Indication...................................................................................................... 6.5
Alarms on Each Screen.................................................................................................... 6.7
Alarms for Monitored Beds..................................................................................... 6.7
Vital Signs Alarm/ST Alarm.......................................................................... 6.7
Arrhythmia Alarm.......................................................................................... 6.7
Technical Alarm............................................................................................ 6.8
Alarms for Overview Bed........................................................................................ 6.9
Alarms for the Central Monitor and WS-960P Recorder Unit................................. 6.9
Temporarily Silencing or Suspending Alarms................................................................. 6.10
Temporarily Silencing Currently Occurring Alarms............................................... 6.10
Alarm Silence Time.................................................................................... 6.10
When the Alarm Notice is Activated........................................................... 6.10
Temporarily Suspending All Alarms...................................................................... 6.11
Alarm Suspend Time.................................................................................. 6.11
When the Alarm Notice is Activated........................................................... 6.11
Suspending All Alarms at the Transmitter............................................................. 6.11
Alarm Control Marks....................................................................................................... 6.12
Mark Description................................................................................................... 6.12
Vital Sign Alarm Off Mark/Alarm Off Mark.................................................. 6.12
Alarm Suspend Mark.................................................................................. 6.12
Alarm Suspend Mark (From the Transmitter).............................................. 6.12
Alarm Silence Mark.................................................................................... 6.12
Priority of Alarm Control Marks............................................................................ 6.12
Turning the Alarm Limits Off Mark Display On/Off................................................ 6.13
Alarm Recording............................................................................................................. 6.14
Alarm Recording Modes....................................................................................... 6.14
Overview of Alarm Recording............................................................................... 6.14
Recording Device....................................................................................... 6.14
Recording Waveforms................................................................................ 6.14
Recording Time.......................................................................................... 6.14
Recording Speed........................................................................................ 6.14
Recording Sensitivity.................................................................................. 6.14
Necessary Settings for Alarm Recording.............................................................. 6.14

CONTENTS
Alarm Limits Recording.............................................................................. 6.15 1

Arrhythmia Alarm Recording...................................................................... 6.15
ST Alarm Recording................................................................................... 6.15 2
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording.................................................................... 6.15
3
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording.......................................................... 6.15
Stopping Automatic Alarm Recording........................................................ 6.15 4
Setting Alarms................................................................................................................ 6.16
Setting Alarm Limits.............................................................................................. 6.16 5
Alarm Limits Range.................................................................................... 6.18
Setting Alarm Limits Automatically (Auto Alarm Setting)............................ 6.20
6
Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm................................................................................ 6.22
7
Initialization of Arrhythmia Recording......................................................... 6.23
Alarm Limits Range.................................................................................... 6.24 8
Setting the ST Alarm............................................................................................ 6.25
8-1
Alarm Limits Range.................................................................................... 6.26
Setting ST Alarms with Auto Alarm Setting Functions............................... 6.26
8-2
Setting All Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)......................................... 6.27
Setting the LEAD OFF and NOISE Alarm............................................................ 6.28 9
Setting the COMMUNICATION LOSS Alarm........................................................ 6.28
Setting Alarm on Multi Patient Limits Window...................................................... 6.28 10
Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume................................................................................ 6.29
10-1
Alarm Notice and Arrhythmia Notice............................................................................... 6.30
Alarm Notice......................................................................................................... 6.30 10-2
Arrhythmia Notice................................................................................................. 6.31
Technical Icon................................................................................................................. 6.34 10-3
10-4
Section 7 All Beds Screen...................................................................... 7.1 10-5

Overview........................................................................................................................... 7.2
Displaying the All Beds Screen............................................................................... 7.2 10-6
Screen Description................................................................................................. 7.3

10-7
16 beds (One waveform).............................................................................. 7.3
12 beds (Up to two waveforms).................................................................... 7.4 10-8
8 beds (One waveform)................................................................................ 7.4
8 beds (Up to three waveforms)................................................................... 7.5 10-9
6 beds (Up to two waveforms)...................................................................... 7.5
10-10
6 beds (Up to four waveforms)..................................................................... 7.6
4 beds (Up to three waveforms)................................................................... 7.6 11
4 beds (Up to six waveforms)....................................................................... 7.7
Freezing Waveforms............................................................................................... 7.7 12
Temporarily Silencing/Suspending Alarms............................................................. 7.7
13
Changing the All Beds Screen Display Setting................................................................. 7.8
Setting Individually for Each Bed............................................................................ 7.8 14
Setting the Sensitivity and Scale of the Displayed Waveform....................... 7.8
Selecting the Displayed Waveform on the All Beds Screen.......................... 7.9 15
Selecting the Parameters of the Displayed Measurement Data................. 7.11
Setting the Bed Color................................................................................. 7.12 16
Selecting the Heart Rate Display............................................................... 7.13
17
Selecting the Pulse Rate Display............................................................... 7.14
18
CONTENTS
Selecting the Source Pulse Rate................................................................ 7.15

Setting for All Beds on the System Configuration Window of the System
Setup Screen........................................................................................................ 7.15
Setting for All Beds on the Monitor Setting Window of the System Setup
Screen.................................................................................................................. 7.15
Setting Parameter Priority............................................................................................... 7.16
Recordings on the All Beds Screen................................................................................ 7.17
All Beds Manual Recording.................................................................................. 7.17
Necessary Settings for All Beds Recording................................................ 7.17
Section 8 Multi Patient Alarms Windows........................................... 8.0.1

Overview........................................................................................................................ 8.0.2
Displaying a Multi Patient Alarms Window........................................................... 8.0.2
Setting a Bed Group...................................................................................................... 8.0.2
Assigning Beds to a Group.................................................................................. 8.0.2
Editing Group Names.......................................................................................... 8.0.4
Section 8-1 Multi Patient Alarm Events Window................................................... 8.1.1

Overview........................................................................................................................ 8.1.2
Displaying the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window.............................................. 8.1.2
From the Multi Patient Limits Window........................................................ 8.1.2
Window Description............................................................................................. 8.1.3
Display Type: Alarm Limit..................................................................................... 8.1.3
Display Type: Arrhythmia..................................................................................... 8.1.4
Display Type: Technical........................................................................................ 8.1.5
Viewing the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window............................................................ 8.1.6
Changing the Displayed Alarm Type.................................................................... 8.1.6
Zooming In and Out on Alarm Events................................................................. 8.1.6
Displaying the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window for a Group of Beds............. 8.1.7
Displaying the Individual Alarm Events Window for One Bed.............................. 8.1.7
Editing Group Names.......................................................................................... 8.1.8
Recordings on the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window................................................. 8.1.8
Multi Patient Alarm Events Printing..................................................................... 8.1.8
Other Recordings................................................................................................ 8.1.8
Section 8-2 Multi Patient Limits Window............................................................... 8.2.1

Overview........................................................................................................................ 8.2.2
Displaying the Multi Patient Limits Window.......................................................... 8.2.2
From the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window............................................ 8.2.2
Window Description............................................................................................. 8.2.3
Viewing the Multi Patient Limits Window........................................................................ 8.2.4
Scrolling the Multi Patient Limits Window............................................................ 8.2.4
Displaying the Multi Patient Limits Window for a Group of Beds......................... 8.2.4
Setting Alarm Limits............................................................................................. 8.2.5

CONTENTS
Editing Group Names.......................................................................................... 8.2.5 1

Selecting the Displayed Parameter...................................................................... 8.2.5
Available Parameters........................................................................................... 8.2.7 2
Factory Default Settings............................................................................ 8.2.7
3
Recordings on the Multi Patient Limits Window............................................................. 8.2.8
Multi Patient Limits Printing................................................................................. 8.2.8 4
Other Recordings................................................................................................ 8.2.8
5
6
Section 9 Individual Bed Window.......................................................... 9.1
Overview........................................................................................................................... 9.2 7
Displaying the Individual Bed Window.................................................................... 9.2
From the All Beds Screen............................................................................. 9.2 8
From Any Window Other than the All Beds Screen...................................... 9.2
8-1
From the Menu Window................................................................................ 9.2
Window Description................................................................................................ 9.3 8-2
Wave Display Window............................................................................................ 9.3
ECG 12 Lead Display Window..................................................................... 9.4 9
All Vital Signs Window.................................................................................. 9.4
10
Changing Display Types......................................................................................... 9.5
Changing the Beds................................................................................................. 9.5 10-1
Freezing Waveforms............................................................................................... 9.5
Temporarily Silencing/Suspending Alarms............................................................. 9.5 10-2
Learning ECG......................................................................................................... 9.5
10-3
Starting NIBP Measurement................................................................................... 9.6
Changing the Individual Bed Window Display Settings..................................................... 9.7
10-4
Setting on the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup Window..................................................... 9.7
Selecting the Waveform Sensitivity and Scale on the Wave Display 10-5
Window......................................................................................................... 9.7
Selecting the Waveform Displayed on the Wave Display Window................ 9.8 10-6
Selecting the Measurement Data Displayed on the Wave Display

10-7
Window......................................................................................................... 9.9
Changing the Sweep Speed....................................................................... 9.11 10-8
Changing the Sweep Speed of the Respiration Waveform......................... 9.11
Changing the IBP Waveform Display Mode................................................ 9.11 10-9
Selecting the Pulse Rate Display............................................................... 9.12
10-10
Selecting the Source Pulse Rate................................................................ 9.12
Setting on the Wave Display Windows of the Indiv. Bed Window.......................... 9.13 11
Selecting the Waveform Sensitivity and Scale on the Wave Display
Window....................................................................................................... 9.13 12
Setting Vital Sign Alarms and Measurement Conditions for the
13
Parameters Displayed on the Individual Bed Window................................ 9.14
Changing the All Bed Screen Display Setting................................................................. 9.15 14
Setting Parameter Priority............................................................................................... 9.15
Recording on the Individual Bed Window....................................................................... 9.16 15
Dual Waveform Recording.................................................................................... 9.16
Necessary Settings.................................................................................... 9.16 16
Multi-Wave Printing............................................................................................... 9.17
17
Necessary Setting...................................................................................... 9.17
18
CONTENTS
ECG 12 Lead Printing........................................................................................... 9.17

Necessary Setting...................................................................................... 9.17
Section 10 Review Windows............................................................... 10.0.1

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.0.2
Displaying the Review Window.......................................................................... 10.0.3
Common Description of Review Windows................................................................... 10.0.4
Section 10-1 Trend Window..................................................................................... 10.1.1

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.1.2
Displaying the Trend Window............................................................................. 10.1.2
Window Description........................................................................................... 10.1.3
Parameters and Display.......................................................................... 10.1.4
Viewing Trend Window................................................................................................. 10.1.8
Scrolling the Trendgraph.................................................................................... 10.1.8
Viewing Numerical Data (Cursor Moving).......................................................... 10.1.8
Changing the Display Width of the Trendgraph.................................................. 10.1.8
Changing the Trend Window Display Setting............................................................... 10.1.9
Setting the Displayed Parameters..................................................................... 10.1.9
Changing the Scale........................................................................................... 10.1.9
Selecting Displayed Events............................................................................. 10.1.10
Printing Trendgraphs.................................................................................................. 10.1.11
Section 10-2 Tabular Trend Window....................................................................... 10.2.1

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.2.2
Displaying the Tabular Trend Window................................................................ 10.2.2
Viewing the Tabular Trend Window.............................................................................. 10.2.4
Scrolling the Tabular Trend................................................................................. 10.2.4
Displaying a Different Tabular Trend.................................................................. 10.2.4
Changing the Tabular Trend Window Display Setting................................................... 10.2.5
Changing the Display Interval............................................................................ 10.2.5
Setting the Patterns of Tabular Trend................................................................. 10.2.5
Selecting Parameters for Each Tabular Trend.......................................... 10.2.5
Registering Names for Each Tabular Trend............................................. 10.2.7
Printing Tabular Trend.................................................................................................. 10.2.8
Section 10-3 Hemodynamics Window.................................................................... 10.3.1

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.3.2
Displaying the Hemodynamics List Window...................................................... 10.3.2
Viewing the Hemodynamics List Window.................................................................... 10.3.3
Scrolling the Hemodynamics List...................................................................... 10.3.3
Abbreviations............................................................................................................... 10.3.4
Printing the Hemodynamics List.................................................................................. 10.3.5
Section 10-4 Arrhythmia Recall Window................................................................ 10.4.1

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.4.2

CONTENTS
Displaying the Arrhythmia Recall Window......................................................... 10.4.2 1

Arrhythmia Notice.............................................................................................. 10.4.2
Window Description........................................................................................... 10.4.3 2
File List Window...................................................................................... 10.4.3
3
Expanded Waveform Window.................................................................. 10.4.4
Viewing the Arrhythmia Recall Window....................................................................... 10.4.5 4
Scrolling the List of Arrhythmia Recall Files...................................................... 10.4.5
Sorting the List.................................................................................................. 10.4.5 5
Displaying Expanded Arrhythmia Recall Waveform........................................... 10.4.5
Changing Display Zoom and Sweep Speed............................................ 10.4.6
6
Displaying Another File............................................................................ 10.4.6
7
Changing the Number of Waveforms....................................................... 10.4.6
Scrolling Multiple Waveforms................................................................... 10.4.7 8
Annotation List on the Expanded Waveform Window.............................. 10.4.8
8-1
Measuring Arrhythmia Recall Waveform with Caliper........................................ 10.4.8
Selecting the Measured Waveform (Multiple Waveform Display
8-2
Only)...................................................................................................... 10.4.10
Deleting All Measurement Results........................................................ 10.4.10 9
Ending Caliper Measurement................................................................ 10.4.10
Deleting Arrhythmia Recall Files................................................................................ 10.4.11 10
Automatic Deletion........................................................................................... 10.4.11
10-1
Deleting Unnecessary Arrhythmia Recall Files............................................... 10.4.11
Deleting Files with Deletion Marks........................................................ 10.4.11 10-2
Deleting the File Displayed on the Expanded Waveform Window......... 10.4.12
Setting Arrhythmia Recall File Creation..................................................................... 10.4.13 10-3
Priority of Creating Arrhythmia Recall Files..................................................... 10.4.14
10-4
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types Displayed on the File List......................................... 10.4.15
Recording on the Arrhythmia Recall Window............................................................. 10.4.16 10-5
Arrhythmia Recall Recording........................................................................... 10.4.16
Recording/Printing Displayed Files........................................................ 10.4.16 10-6
Printing Files with Printing Marks.......................................................... 10.4.16
10-7
Printing Caliper Measurement Data................................................................ 10.4.17
Other Recordings............................................................................................ 10.4.17 10-8
Section 10-5 ST Recall Window.............................................................................. 10.5.1 10-9

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.5.2
10-10
Displaying the ST Recall Window...................................................................... 10.5.2
Window Description........................................................................................... 10.5.3 11
Viewing the ST Recall Window.................................................................................... 10.5.4
Scrolling the ST Recall Files.............................................................................. 10.5.4 12
Scrolling the ST Waveform................................................................................ 10.5.4
Changing ST Recall Window Display Settings............................................................. 10.5.5 13
Setting the Display Position of the ST Waveform............................................... 10.5.5
14
Changing Sensitivity.......................................................................................... 10.5.6
Setting ST Analysis Method.............................................................................. 10.5.6 15
Changing the Interval........................................................................................ 10.5.6
Recording on the ST Recall Window........................................................................... 10.5.7 16
ST Recall Recording.......................................................................................... 10.5.7
17
Recording a Selected File....................................................................... 10.5.7
18
CONTENTS
Printing Files............................................................................................ 10.5.7

Other Recordings.............................................................................................. 10.5.7
Section 10-6 Full Disclosure Window..................................................................... 10.6.1

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.6.2
Displaying the Full Disclosure Screen............................................................... 10.6.2
Zoom Display........................................................................................... 10.6.3
Expanded Waveform Display (Actual Size Display)................................. 10.6.4
Stored Waveforms and Displayed Waveforms......................................... 10.6.5
Display Color........................................................................................... 10.6.5
Triangle Waveform................................................................................... 10.6.6
Viewing the Full Disclosure Window............................................................................ 10.6.6
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform............................................................. 10.6.6
Automatic Scroll....................................................................................... 10.6.6
Changing the Sensitivity and Scale................................................................... 10.6.7
Changing the Number of Displayed Waveforms................................................ 10.6.7
Changing the Scaling of the Full Disclosure Waveform..................................... 10.6.7
Zooming In and Out the Full Disclosure Waveform................................. 10.6.7
Expanding the Full Disclosure Waveform into Actual Size.................... 10.6.10
Changing Display Zoom and Sweep Speed.......................................... 10.6.10
Measuring a Full Disclosure Waveform with the Calipers................................ 10.6.11
Selecting the Measured Waveform........................................................ 10.6.12
Deleting All Measurement Results........................................................ 10.6.12
Ending Caliper Measurement................................................................ 10.6.13
Changing the Stored Waveforms............................................................................... 10.6.14
Using the Stored Wave Master........................................................................ 10.6.15
Changing the Stored Wave Master........................................................ 10.6.15
Changing the Full Disclosure Window Display........................................................... 10.6.16
Changing the Displayed Waveforms................................................................ 10.6.16
Recording on the Full Disclosure Window................................................................. 10.6.17
Full Disclosure Waveform Printing................................................................... 10.6.17
Recording/Printing Expanded Waveform......................................................... 10.6.17
Other Recordings............................................................................................ 10.6.18
Section 10-7 ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window........................................................ 10.7.1

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.7.2
Displaying the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window................................................. 10.7.2
Tabular Trend Display.............................................................................. 10.7.3
Zoom In (Expanded Waveform) Display.................................................. 10.7.4
Comparison Display................................................................................ 10.7.4
Analysis Report Display.......................................................................... 10.7.5
Viewing the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window................................................................ 10.7.6
Changing the Display Types.............................................................................. 10.7.6
Tabular Trend Display.............................................................................. 10.7.6
Zoom In (Expanded Waveform) Display.................................................. 10.7.6
Comparison Display................................................................................ 10.7.7
Analysis Report Display.......................................................................... 10.7.7
C.10 Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

CONTENTS
Scrolling the Files in the Measurement Value Table.......................................... 10.7.7 1

Selecting the Displayed File.............................................................................. 10.7.7
Selecting the Reference File.............................................................................. 10.7.8 2
Switching Displayed Waveform Types................................................................ 10.7.8
3
Deleting ECG 12 Lead Analysis Files.......................................................................... 10.7.9
Automatic Deletion............................................................................................. 10.7.9 4
Deleting Unnecessary ECG 12 Lead Analysis Files.......................................... 10.7.9
Recording on the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window..................................................... 10.7.10 5
Other Recordings............................................................................................ 10.7.10
6
Section 10-8 Alarm History Window....................................................................... 10.8.1 7
Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.8.2
Displaying the Alarm History Window................................................................ 10.8.2 8
Alarm Notice...................................................................................................... 10.8.2
8-1
Viewing the Alarm History Window.............................................................................. 10.8.4 8-2
Scrolling the Alarm History Files....................................................................... 10.8.4
Sorting the List.................................................................................................. 10.8.4 9
Selecting the Alarm Levels and Types Displayed on the File List................................ 10.8.5
Printing the Alarm History............................................................................................ 10.8.6
10
Alarm History Printing........................................................................................ 10.8.6 10-1
Printing a Selected File........................................................................... 10.8.6
Other Recordings.............................................................................................. 10.8.6 10-2
Section 10-9 Alarm Events Window....................................................................... 10.9.1 10-3
Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.9.2 10-4

Displaying the Alarm Events Window................................................................ 10.9.2
From the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window.......................................... 10.9.2 10-5
From the Menu Window........................................................................... 10.9.2
10-6
Technical Icon.................................................................................................... 10.9.3
Action Message................................................................................................. 10.9.3
10-7
Window Description..................................................................................................... 10.9.4
Display Type: Limit + Technical................................................................ 10.9.4 10-8
Display Type: Arrhythmia + Technical...................................................... 10.9.4
Viewing the Alarm Events Window.............................................................................. 10.9.5 10-9
Scrolling the Alarm Events................................................................................ 10.9.5

10-10
Moving the Cursor............................................................................................. 10.9.5
Viewing Other Review Windows of the Selected Time...................................... 10.9.5 11
Changing the Displayed Alarm Type.................................................................. 10.9.5
Zooming In and Out on Alarm Events............................................................... 10.9.6 12
Displaying a Multi Patient Alarms Window......................................................... 10.9.6
13
Changing the Alarm Events Window Display Settings................................................. 10.9.7
Setting Items...................................................................................................... 10.9.8 14
Alarm Limit/Technical.............................................................................. 10.9.8
Arrhythmia/Technical............................................................................... 10.9.8 15
Printing the Alarm Events............................................................................................ 10.9.9
16
Alarm Events Printing........................................................................................ 10.9.9
Other Recordings.............................................................................................. 10.9.9 17
18
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 C.11
CONTENTS
Section 10-10 Report Window................................................................................. 10.10.1

Overview.................................................................................................................... 10.10.2
Displaying the Report Window......................................................................... 10.10.2
Window Description......................................................................................... 10.10.2
Report Mode.................................................................................................... 10.10.3
Manual Printing..................................................................................... 10.10.3
Automatic Printing................................................................................. 10.10.3
Printing Items................................................................................................... 10.10.3
Report Creating Flowchart.............................................................................. 10.10.3
Changing Report Settings......................................................................................... 10.10.4
Setting Printing Format.................................................................................... 10.10.4
Setting the Report Mode....................................................................... 10.10.4
Selecting Printing Items......................................................................... 10.10.4
Setting Report Range............................................................................ 10.10.4
Setting Trend Data Printing.............................................................................. 10.10.6
Changing Trend Interval........................................................................ 10.10.6
Changing Printing Parameters.............................................................. 10.10.6
Entering Comments................................................................................................... 10.10.7
Using Template to Enter a Comment..................................................... 10.10.8
Printing the Report..................................................................................................... 10.10.8
Manual Printing..................................................................................... 10.10.8
Automatic Printing................................................................................. 10.10.8
Section 11 Recording............................................................................. 11.1

Overview......................................................................................................................... 11.2
Description of Recording Modes.......................................................................... 11.3
Manual Recording...................................................................................... 11.3
Automatic Recording.................................................................................. 11.5
Remote Recording..................................................................................... 11.5
Recording Priority................................................................................................. 11.6
Recorder Unit (WS-960P).......................................................................... 11.6
Laser Printer............................................................................................... 11.6
Recording Sensitivity............................................................................................ 11.7
Recorded/Printed Data......................................................................................... 11.7
Manual Recording........................................................................................................... 11.8
Single Bed Recording........................................................................................... 11.8
Necessary Settings for Single Bed Recording........................................... 11.8
Starting Single Bed Recording................................................................... 11.9
Automatic Recording....................................................................................................... 11.9
Periodic Recording............................................................................................... 11.9
Necessary Settings for Periodic Recording................................................ 11.9
Alarm Recording................................................................................................. 11.10
Remote Recording........................................................................................................ 11.10
Necessary Settings for Remote Recording........................................................ 11.10
Call Recording.......................................................................................... 11.10
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording.................................................... 11.10
Starting Remote Recording................................................................................ 11.10
Call Recording.......................................................................................... 11.10

CONTENTS
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording.................................................... 11.10 1

Changing Recording Settings....................................................................................... 11.11
Changing Settings on the Recording Window of the Setup................................ 11.11 2
Changing Alarm Recording Settings........................................................ 11.12
3
Setting Recording Waveforms for Dual Waveform Recording.................. 11.12
Changing Recording Interval of Periodic Recording................................. 11.13 4
Setting the Record Sweep Speed............................................................ 11.14
Changing Settings on the Recording Window of the System Setup Screen...... 11.15 5
Displaying the Recording Window of the System Setup Screen.............. 11.15
Changing the Recording Time.................................................................. 11.16
6
Selecting the Real Time Recording or Delayed Recording...................... 11.16
7
Changing the Recording Start Position.................................................... 11.16
Changing Settings on the Arrhythmia Alarm Window of the Personal Setup..... 11.16 8
8-1
Section 12 Overview Bed Window......................................................... 12.1 8-2

Overview......................................................................................................................... 12.2
Displaying the Overview Bed Menu Window........................................................ 12.2 9
Alarm Function for an Overview Bed.................................................................... 12.3
10
Window Description.............................................................................................. 12.4
Selecting Another Bedside Monitor as an Overview Bed............................................... 12.5 10-1
Switching to Other Windows of the Overview Bed Window............................................ 12.5
Recordings on the Overview Bed Window...................................................................... 12.6 10-2
10-3
Section 13 Parameter Setup................................................................... 13.1 10-4

Overview of Parameter Setup......................................................................................... 13.3
Displaying Each Parameter Setup Window.......................................................... 13.4 10-5
ECG Settings.................................................................................................................. 13.5
10-6
Setting Vital Sign Alarms...................................................................................... 13.5
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms.................................................................................... 13.6 10-7
Turning ECG Measurement ON/OFF................................................................... 13.6
Setting the Analysis Lead..................................................................................... 13.7 10-8
Setting QRS Detection......................................................................................... 13.8
10-9
Setting QRS Detection Type....................................................................... 13.8
Setting QRS Detection Sensitivity.............................................................. 13.9 10-10
Setting ECG Lead Name.................................................................................... 13.10
ST Settings......................................................................................................... 13.11 11
Setting the ST Analysis Point................................................................... 13.11
Setting the ST Interval.............................................................................. 13.11 12
Learning ECG..................................................................................................... 13.12
13
Setting Other Settings........................................................................................ 13.13
Turning Arrhythmia Analysis ON/OFF...................................................... 13.13 14
Turning Pacing Detection ON/OFF........................................................... 13.13
Turning Hum Filter ON/OFF..................................................................... 13.14 15
Turning Pacing Mark ON/OFF.................................................................. 13.14
16
Turning Auto Lead Change ON/OFF........................................................ 13.14
RESP Settings.............................................................................................................. 13.16 17
Setting the Vital Sign Alarm................................................................................ 13.16
18
CONTENTS
Turning the Impedance Respiration Measurement ON/OFF.............................. 13.16

Changing the Respiration Detection Sensitivity.................................................. 13.17
SpO2 Settings............................................................................................................... 13.18
NIBP Settings............................................................................................................... 13.19
Setting NIBP Measurement Mode and Interval.................................................. 13.19
Starting/Stopping NIBP Measurement............................................................... 13.20
PRESS Settings............................................................................................................ 13.21
Changing the Display Pattern and the Blood Pressure Label............................. 13.22
Changing the Arterial Pressure Detection Sensitivity......................................... 13.23
TEMP Settings.............................................................................................................. 13.24
Setting the Label for Temperature Measurement and Equation for ΔT............... 13.24
CO2 Settings................................................................................................................. 13.26
O2 Settings.................................................................................................................... 13.27
Anesthesia Gas Settings.............................................................................................. 13.28
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Waveforms and Numerical Data............... 13.29
Ventilator Settings......................................................................................................... 13.30
CCO Settings................................................................................................................ 13.31
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Numeric Data........................................... 13.32
PiCCO Settings............................................................................................................. 13.33
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Numeric Data........................................... 13.33
Section 14 Personal Setup and Setup................................................... 14.1

Overview of Personal Setup and Setup.......................................................................... 14.2
Displaying Each Setting Window.......................................................................... 14.2
Section 15 RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver..................................... 15.1

General........................................................................................................................... 15.2
Transmitters and Available Parameters................................................................ 15.3
Preparation..................................................................................................................... 15.6
Installing the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver................................................. 15.6
Selecting the Receiver Type................................................................................. 15.6
Installing the ZR-920P Receiver........................................................................... 15.6
Installing the Band Pass Filter.............................................................................. 15.6
Attaching Antennas.............................................................................................. 15.6
Turning On the Power........................................................................................... 15.6
Display on the Central Monitor when Not Receiving Data from the Transmitter... 15.6
Changing Settings................................................................................................ 15.7
ECG Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 15.7
Respiration Monitoring.................................................................................................... 15.7

CONTENTS
SpO2 Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 15.8 1

NIBP Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 15.8
IBP Monitoring................................................................................................................ 15.8 2
Temperature Monitoring.................................................................................................. 15.8
3
CO2 Monitoring................................................................................................................ 15.9
Initializing the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.......................................................... 15.9 4
5
Section 16 Error Messages and Troubleshooting................................ 16.1
6
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 16.2
System.................................................................................................................. 16.2 7
Network................................................................................................................ 16.3
Measurement Value.............................................................................................. 16.3 8
Alarm.................................................................................................................... 16.3
8-1
Admitting/Discharging........................................................................................... 16.4
All Beds Screen/Individual Bed Window............................................................... 16.5 8-2
Trend Window....................................................................................................... 16.6
Tabular Trend Window........................................................................................... 16.6 9
Hemodynamics List Window................................................................................. 16.6
10
Arrhythmia Recall Window.................................................................................... 16.7
ST Recall Window................................................................................................ 16.7 10-1
Full Disclosure Window........................................................................................ 16.8
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window............................................................................ 16.8 10-2
Report Window..................................................................................................... 16.8
10-3
Recording............................................................................................................. 16.9
Overview Bed Window........................................................................................ 16.10
10-4
Parameter Setup................................................................................................. 16.10
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.................................................................... 16.11 10-5
General..................................................................................................... 16.11
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................ 16.11 10-6
Respiration Monitoring............................................................................. 16.12

10-7
SpO2 Monitoring....................................................................................... 16.12
NIBP Monitoring....................................................................................... 16.13 10-8
IBP Monitoring.......................................................................................... 16.14
Temperature Monitoring........................................................................... 16.14 10-9
CO2 Monitoring......................................................................................... 16.14
10-10
Error Messages............................................................................................................ 16.16
Messages From Bedside Monitors/Multiple Patient Receiver............................. 16.16 11
Messages about Measurement Conditions of Each Parameter............... 16.16
Other........................................................................................................ 16.20 12
Messages From Central Monitor........................................................................ 16.21
13
WS-960P Recorder Unit........................................................................... 16.21
Laser Printer............................................................................................. 16.21 14
Other........................................................................................................ 16.22
Messages From RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.......................................... 16.23 15
General..................................................................................................... 16.23
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................ 16.24 16
SpO2 Monitoring....................................................................................... 16.25
17
NIBP Monitoring....................................................................................... 16.26
CO2 Monitoring......................................................................................... 16.26 18
CONTENTS
Section 17 Maintenance......................................................................... 17.1

Daily Check..................................................................................................................... 17.2
Checking Sound Generation from the Speaker.................................................... 17.2
Calibrating the Touchkeys..................................................................................... 17.2
Adjusting the LCD Display.................................................................................... 17.4
Printing a Screen Hard Copy.......................................................................................... 17.5
Inspection After Use....................................................................................................... 17.5
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilization.......................................................................... 17.6
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit and RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver..... 17.6
Cleaning..................................................................................................... 17.6
Disinfecting................................................................................................. 17.6
LCD Display.......................................................................................................... 17.7
WS-960P Recorder Unit....................................................................................... 17.7
Panel.......................................................................................................... 17.7
Thermal Head............................................................................................. 17.7
Sensor........................................................................................................ 17.8
Network Printer..................................................................................................... 17.8
Disposal.......................................................................................................................... 17.9
Regular Inspection........................................................................................................ 17.10
Periodical Replacement Schedule................................................................................ 17.12
Repair Parts Availability Policy...................................................................................... 17.12
Section 18 Reference.............................................................................. 18.1

Factory Default Settings.................................................................................................. 18.3
All Beds Screen.................................................................................................... 18.3
Multi Patient Alarms Windows.............................................................................. 18.4
Individual Bed Window......................................................................................... 18.5
Review Window.................................................................................................... 18.5
Parameter Setup................................................................................................... 18.8
Personal Setup................................................................................................... 18.10
Setup.................................................................................................................. 18.10
System Setup..................................................................................................... 18.11
Parameter Priority......................................................................................................... 18.12
Specifications................................................................................................................ 18.13
Display...................................................................................................... 18.13
Waveform Display Items........................................................................... 18.13
Alphanumeric Display Items..................................................................... 18.13
Sound....................................................................................................... 18.13
Alarm Function......................................................................................... 18.13
Trend........................................................................................................ 18.14
Waveform Sensitivity................................................................................ 18.14
Overview.................................................................................................. 18.14
Remote Setting......................................................................................... 18.14
Hemodynamics List.................................................................................. 18.14
Arrhythmia Recall..................................................................................... 18.14
ST Recall.................................................................................................. 18.14
Full Disclosure.......................................................................................... 18.14
ECG 12 Lead Analysis............................................................................. 18.14

CONTENTS
Alarm History............................................................................................ 18.15 1

Alarm Events............................................................................................ 18.15
Report...................................................................................................... 18.15 2
File Saving................................................................................................ 18.15
3
2-ch Recorder, WS-960P (option)............................................................ 18.15
Laser Printer (local purchase).................................................................. 18.15 4
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.......................................................... 18.15
Power Requirements................................................................................ 18.17 5
Environment............................................................................................. 18.17
Dimensions and Weight............................................................................ 18.17
6
Safety Standard........................................................................................ 18.17
7
Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................. 18.18
Electromagnetic Emissions...................................................................... 18.19 8
Electromagnetic Immunity........................................................................ 18.19
8-1
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile
RF Communications Equipment............................................................... 18.21
8-2
System Composition for EMC Test........................................................... 18.21
Restriction of Radio Equipment (European Union countries only)........... 18.22 9
European Community CE Notice............................................................. 18.22
Arrhythmia Specifications on RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient 10
Receiver................................................................................................... 18.22
10-1
Standard Accessories................................................................................................... 18.24
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit.................................................................. 18.24 10-2
Options and Consumables........................................................................................... 18.24
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit.................................................................. 18.24 10-3
LCD Display........................................................................................................ 18.25
10-4
WS-960P Recorder Unit..................................................................................... 18.25
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.................................................................... 18.25 10-5
DM-960P J Frame.............................................................................................. 18.25
YS-093P0 J Frame Cable Set............................................................................. 18.26 10-6
YS-093P1 J Frame Cable Set 2.......................................................................... 18.26
10-7
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems.............................. 18.27
10-8
10-9
10-10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Differences Between the CNS-9601 Central Monitor and
Previous Models
The CNS-9601 Central Monitor and previous models; CNS-9701 and CNS-9300
series have following differences. Pay careful attention when you use this central
monitor and previous models together.
When you use this central monitor and previous models side by side or in the
same room, we recommend to uniform the settings to avoid possible confusion.
Previous Models Remarks when Using

Specifications CNS-9601 Central Monitor
Item CNS-9601 Specifications
(CNS-9701 and CNS-9300 and Previous Models
series) Together
Pay careful attention to the
The frame for monitored bed The frame for monitored bed alarm indication of CNS-9601
Alarm indication
blinks. does not blink. Central Monitor and previous
models are different.
Remove the alarm indicator
The alarm indicator can be
The alarm indicator is not from the CNS-9601 Central
Alarm indicator used. It lights or blinks when
available. Monitor to uniform the
an alarm occurs.
specifications.
Set the CRISIS alarm volume
The CRISIS alarm volume is
There is no difference in alarm of previous models to the
CRISIS alarm volume louder than any other alarm
level volumes. same setting as the CNS-9601
level.
Central Monitor.
Only the administrator can set
Minimum alarm You can set the minimum alarm The minimum alarm volume
the alarm volume for previous
volume volume. setting is not available.
models.
Select the alarm sound from
Set the alarm sound type to
the sound specified by Nihon Only the alarm sound specified
Alarm sound type Nihon Kohden on the CNS-
Kohden or the sound stipulated by Nihon Kohden is available.
9601 Central Monitor.
by the IEC standard.
Alarm notice The default setting is “Alarm”. The default setting is “OFF”. Select the either of the settings.
The default setting is “OFF”. The default setting is “ON”. Select the either of the settings.
The alarm recording off Pay attention to the differences
Alarm recording*1 There is no indication that
mark is displayed on the between CNS-9601 Central
alarm recording is set to off.
screen. Monitor and previous models.
Pulse rate alarm when Pay attention to the alarm
Pulse rate alarm is Pulse rate alarm is not affected
ECG measurement is setting when you set the ECG
automatically set to on.*2 by ECG measurement setting.
set to off. measurement alarm to off.
Set the advisory alarm color
The default color is blue.
Advisory alarm color The color is fixed to yellow.*3 to yellow on the CNS-9601
Yellow can be selected.
Central Monitor.
*1 Vital sign alarm recording, ST alarm recording, arrhythmia recording

*2 Specifications for the RU-960P and ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receivers
*3 Specifications for the previous ORG models; ORG-9700 Multiple Patient Receiver (Version 01-22 or earlier) and ORG-
9200 Multiple Patient Receiver (Version 02-11 or earlier)
GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.

Use only Nihon Kohden approved products with this device. Use of non-approved products
or in a non-approved manner may affect the performance specifications of the device. This
includes, but is not limited to, batteries, recording paper, pens, extension cables, electrode
leads, input boxes and AC power.
Please read these precautions thoroughly before attempting to operate the instrument.
1. To safely and effectively use the instrument, its operation must be fully understood.
2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

(1) Avoid moisture or contact with water, extreme atmospheric pressure, excessive humidity and temperatures,
poorly ventilated areas, and dust, saline or sulphuric air.
(2) Place the instrument on an even, level floor. Avoid vibration and mechanical shock, even during transport.
(3) Avoid placing in an area where chemicals are stored or where there is danger of gas leakage.
(4) The power line source to be applied to the instrument must correspond in frequency and voltage to product
specifications, and have sufficient current capacity.
(5) Choose a room where a proper grounding facility is available.
3. Before Operation
(1) Check that the instrument is in perfect operating order.
(2) Check that the instrument is grounded properly.
(3) Check that all cords are connected properly.
(4) Pay extra attention when the instrument is combined with other instruments to avoid misdiagnosis or other
problems.
(5) All circuitry used for direct patient connection must be doubly checked.
(6) Check that battery level is acceptable and battery condition is good when using battery-operated models.
4. During Operation
(1) Both the instrument and the patient must receive continual, careful attention.
(2) Turn power off or remove electrodes and/or transducers when necessary to assure the patient’s safety.
(3) Avoid direct contact between the instrument housing and the patient.
5. To Shutdown After Use

(1) Turn power off with all controls returned to their original positions.
(2) Remove the cords gently; do not use force to remove them.
(3) Clean the instrument together with all accessories for their next use.
6. The instrument must receive expert, professional attention for maintenance and repairs. When the instrument is
not functioning properly, it should be clearly marked to avoid operation while it is out of order.
7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.
8. Maintenance and Inspection

(1) The instrument and parts must undergo regular maintenance inspection at least every 6 months.
(2) If stored for extended periods without being used, make sure prior to operation that the instrument is in perfect
operating condition.
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

(3) Technical information such as parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions or other information is available for
qualified user technical personnel upon request from your Nihon Kohden representative.
9. When the instrument is used with an electrosurgical instrument, pay careful attention to the application and/or
location of electrodes and/or transducers to avoid possible burn to the patient.
10. When the instrument is used with a defibrillator, make sure that the instrument is protected against defibrillator
discharge. If not, remove patient cables and/or transducers from the instrument to avoid possible damage.
WARRANTY POLICY
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall warrant its products against all defects in materials and workmanship for one year
from the date of delivery. However, consumable materials such as recording paper, ink, stylus and battery are excluded
from the warranty.
NKC or its authorized agents will repair or replace any products which prove to be defective during the warranty period,
provided these products are used as prescribed by the operating instructions given in the operator’s and service manuals.
No other party is authorized to make any warranty or assume liability for NKC’s products. NKC will not recognize any
other warranty, either implied or in writing. In addition, service, technical modification or any other product change
performed by someone other than NKC or its authorized agents without prior consent of NKC may be cause for voiding
this warranty.
Defective products or parts must be returned to NKC or its authorized agents, along with an explanation of the failure.
Shipping costs must be pre-paid.
This warranty does not apply to products that have been modified, disassembled, reinstalled or repaired without Nihon
Kohden approval or which have been subjected to neglect or accident, damage due to accident, fire, lightning, vandalism,
water or other casualty, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been
removed.
In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.
ii Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

EMC RELATED CAUTION
This equipment and/or system complies with IEC 60601-1-2 International Standard for electromagnetic
compatibility for medical electrical equipment and/or system. However, an electromagnetic environment
that exceeds the limits or levels stipulated in IEC 60601-1-2, can cause harmful interference to the
equipment and/or system or cause the equipment and/or system to fail to perform its intended function or
degrade its intended performance. Therefore, during the operation of the equipment and/or system, if there
is any undesired deviation from its intended operational performance, you must avoid, identify and resolve
the adverse electromagnetic effect before continuing to use the equipment and/or system.
The following describes some common interference sources and remedial actions:
1. Strong electromagnetic interference from a nearby emitter source such as an authorized radio station
or cellular phone:
Install the equipment and/or system at another location. Keep the emitter source such as cellular phone
away from the equipment and/or system, or turn off the cellular phone.
2. Radio-frequency interference from other equipment through the AC power supply of the equipment
and/or system:
Identify the cause of this interference and if possible remove this interference source. If this is not
possible, use a different power supply.
3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

Make sure all users and patients in contact with the equipment and/or system are free from direct or
indirect electrostatic energy before using it. A humid room can help lessen this problem.
4. Electromagnetic interference with any radio wave receiver such as radio or television:
If the equipment and/or system interferes with any radio wave receiver, locate the equipment and/or
system as far as possible from the radio wave receiver.
5. Interference of lightning:
When lightning occurs near the location where the equipment and/or system is installed, it may induce
an excessive voltage in the equipment and/or system. In such a case, disconnect the AC power cord
from the equipment and/or system and operate the equipment and/or system by battery power, or use
an uninterruptible power supply.
6. Use with other equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is adjacent to or stacked with other equipment, the equipment
and/or system may affect the other equipment. Before use, check that the equipment and/or system
operates normally with the other equipment.
7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

When an unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable is connected to this equipment and/or system,
it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity. The specified
configuration of this equipment and/or system complies with the electromagnetic requirements with the
specified configuration. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 iii

Caution - continued
8. Use of unspecified configuration:
When the equipment and/or system is used with the unspecified system configuration different than
the configuration of EMC testing, it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased
electromagnetic immunity. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

The equipment and/or system is designed to measure bioelectrical signals with a specified sensitivity. If
the equipment and/or system is used with excessive sensitivity, artifact may appear by electromagnetic
interference and this may cause mis-diagnosis. When unexpected artifact appears, inspect the
surrounding electromagnetic conditions and remove this artifact source.
If the above suggested remedial actions do not solve the problem, consult your Nihon Kohden
representative for additional suggestions.
In IEC 60601-1-2 Medical Electronic Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety, 2. Collateral
Standard: Electromagnetic compatibility-Requirements and test. Section 36. 202. 2 Radiated radio-
frequency electromagnetic fields, PATIENT COUPLED EQUIPMENT and/or SYSTEMS applicable
IMMUNITY test methods are under consideration at SC62A/WG13. The 3 V/m IMMUNITY level may be
inappropriate especially when measuring SpO2 because physiological signals can be much smaller than
those induced by a 3 V/m electromagnetic field.
When measuring SpO2, various interference may produce false waveforms which look like pulse
waveforms. SpO2 value and pulse rate may be measured from these false waveforms, causing the alarm to
function improperly.
When installing the monitor, avoid locations where the monitor may receive strong electromagnetic
interference such as radio or TV stations, cellular phone or mobile two-way radios.
The CE mark is a protected conformity mark of the European Community. Products with the CE mark
comply with the requirements of the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
This equipment complies with EUROPEAN STANDARD EN-60601-1-2: 1993 which requires EN-55011,
class A. Class A EQUIPMENT is allowed in domestic establishments when used under the jurisdiction of
a health care professional.
NOTE about Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EEC
For the member states of the European Union only:
The purpose of WEEE directive 2002/96/EEC is, as a first priority, the prevention of waste electrical and
electronic equipment (WEEE), and in addition, the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such
wastes so as to reduce the disposal of waste.
Contact your Nihon Kohden representative for disposal.
iv Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

MEMBER STATES THIS EQUIPMENT WITH ZB/ZS/ZM-XXXPG SERIES TRANSMITTER IS INTENDED FOR
USE IN
As of August 2004, Nihon Kohden Corporation has notified the intended use of this equipment with
ZB/ZS/ZM-XXXPG series transmitter to the authority of the following member states based on R&TTE
directives (1999/5/EC).
• Austria
• Belgium
• Cyprus
• Czech Republic
• Denmark
• Estonia
• Finland
• France
• Germany
• Greece
• Hungary
• Iceland
• Ireland
• Italy
• Latvia
• Liechtenstein
• Lithuania
• Luxembourg
• Malta
• The Netherlands
• Norway
• Poland
• Portugal
• Slovakia
• Slovenia
• Spain
• Sweden
• Switzerland
• The U.K.
Notice:
• Refer to “Restriction of Radio Equipment (European Union countries only)” in the “Specifications”
section for more details.
• This device is also authorized for use in Norway in accordance with regulation no.1399 of 20
December 2000.
As this equipment complies with Class 1.7 (Receive-only radio equipment), “Alert Sign” is not displayed.
This equipment complies with International Standard IEC 60601-1-2: 2001, Amendment 1: 2004 which
requires CISPR11, Group 1, Class B. Class B EQUIPMENT is equipment suitable for use in domestic
establishments and in establishments directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument
Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, cautions and notes are used in this manual to alert or signal the reader to specific information.
WARNING
A warning alerts the user to possible injury or death associated with the use or misuse of the instrument.
CAUTION
A caution alerts the user to possible injury or problems with the instrument associated with its use or
misuse such as instrument malfunction, instrument failure, damage to the instrument, or damage to other
property.
NOTE
A note provides specific information, in the form of recommendations, prerequirements, alternative methods or
supplemental information.
vi Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument
The following symbols found in this manual/instrument bear the respective descriptions as given.
On Screen
Symbol Description Symbol Description
Overview Alarm silence
Print mark/print Alarm suspended
Stopped print All alarm off
Delayed recording start QRS sync mark
Menu Arrhythmia notice
Previous Change transmitter battery
All beds
Deletion mark Transmitter battery status*1
Close a window
Adjust setting/scroll data Non-paced*2
Alarm/alarm notice Replace the ECG electrodes
Speaker Check the SpO2 probe attachment
Electrocardiogram
*1 Only available for the ZS-530PG/PK transmitter with type C protocol.

*2 Appears only when receiving a pacemaker pulse detection off information from the bedside monitor.
On MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit
“On” only for a part of the instrument USB terminal
“Off ” only for a part of the instrument Network terminal
Standby (AC drive) Input terminal (PS/2 terminal)
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 vii

Protective earth Input output terminal
Serial port Direct current
Connector for alarm indicator cable Alternating current
Recorder terminal Equipotential grounding
Sound output terminal Date of manufacture
The CE mark is a protected conformity

Touch panel terminal
mark of the European Community.
Products marked with this symbol
comply with the requirements of the
Nihon Kohden network terminal
Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
RGB terminal Products marked with this symbol

comply with the European WEEE
directive 2002/96/EEC and require
High voltage separate waste collection. For Nihon
Kohden products marked with this
symbol, contact your Nihon Kohden
Serial number representative for disposal.
Attention, consult operator’s manual
On WS-960P Recorder Unit

The CE mark is a protected conformity
Recorder terminal (Start/Stop key)
mark of the European Community.
Products marked with this symbol
comply with the requirements of the Attention, consult operator’s manual
Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
On RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver
Symbol Description
Antenna
For the symbol marks on the laser printer and bar code reader, refer to each manual.
viii Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Related Documentation
The CNS-9601K Central Monitor comes with the following manuals in addition
to the Operator’s Manual.
Administrator’s Guide
Describes how to install the central monitor. It also explains about the password
protected settings on the System Setup screen and System Configuration window
which only an administrator can change.
Service Manual
Describes information on servicing the central monitor. Only qualified service
personnel can service the central monitor.
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 ix

Section 1 General 1
Introduction........................................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Central Monitor Composition................................................................................................................................ 1.5
Network Composition........................................................................................................................................... 1.6
Operation Restriction by Monitored Bed Type............................................................................................ 1.7
Alarm Function................................................................................................................................. 1.7
Parameter Setup/Personal Setup/Setup.......................................................................................... 1.7
Operation Restriction Depending on Whether Data Is Stored in the Central Monitor................................ 1.8
Monitored Bed and Overview Bed.............................................................................................................. 1.8
Monitored Bed.................................................................................................................................. 1.8
Overview Bed................................................................................................................................... 1.8
Types of Screens and Windows............................................................................................................................ 1.9
All Beds Screens........................................................................................................................................ 1.9
Overview Bed Menu Window................................................................................................................... 1.10
Menu Window........................................................................................................................................... 1.10
Individual Bed Windows........................................................................................................................... 1.10
Review Windows...................................................................................................................................... 1.11
Multi Patient Alarms Windows.................................................................................................................. 1.12
System Setup Screen............................................................................................................................... 1.12
Setup Window.......................................................................................................................................... 1.12
Personal Setup Window........................................................................................................................... 1.13
Parameter Setup Window......................................................................................................................... 1.13
Basic Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 1.14
Control and Input...................................................................................................................................... 1.14
Touchkeys Input............................................................................................................................. 1.14
Keyboard Input............................................................................................................................... 1.14
Mouse Input................................................................................................................................... 1.14
Key Operation at the Bottom of the Screen.............................................................................................. 1.15
Switching Windows................................................................................................................................... 1.15
Opening Other Windows from the Menu Window.......................................................................... 1.15
Returning to the All Beds Screen................................................................................................... 1.15
Returning to the Previous Screen/Window.................................................................................... 1.15
Opening the Individual Bed Window from the All Beds Screen...................................................... 1.16
Changing the Bed to Display or Change Settings.......................................................................... 1.16
Opening Other Windows with Tabs................................................................................................ 1.16
Opening Other Windows with Function Keys................................................................................. 1.17
Changing Settings.................................................................................................................................... 1.18
Scrolling Data and List............................................................................................................................. 1.18
Entering Letters and Numbers................................................................................................................. 1.19
Basic Keyboard Operation........................................................................................................................ 1.19
Backup Battery................................................................................................................................................... 1.20
Caution Mark...................................................................................................................................................... 1.21
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit........................................................................................................ 1.21
Important Safety Information.............................................................................................................................. 1.22
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 1.1

General..................................................................................................................................................... 1.22
Installation................................................................................................................................................ 1.23
Network.................................................................................................................................................... 1.24
Turning the Power On/Off......................................................................................................................... 1.25
Transmitter................................................................................................................................................ 1.25
Admission, Discharge and Changing the Receiving Channel.................................................................. 1.25
Pause Monitoring..................................................................................................................................... 1.26
Changing Monitor..................................................................................................................................... 1.26
Patient Transfer......................................................................................................................................... 1.27
Alarm........................................................................................................................................................ 1.27
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................................................................ 1.29
Respiration Measurement........................................................................................................................ 1.30
Temperature Measurement...................................................................................................................... 1.30
SpO2 Monitoring....................................................................................................................................... 1.31
CO2 Monitoring......................................................................................................................................... 1.31
NIBP Measurement.................................................................................................................................. 1.31
Extended Units......................................................................................................................................... 1.32
Maintenance............................................................................................................................................. 1.32
1.2 Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

1. GENERAL
1
Introduction
The CNS-9601K Central Monitor is designed for use in various hospital

environments, including the ICU, CCU, recovery room, and general ward.
The central monitor allows hospital staff to monitor patient’s vital signs and
waveforms, along with other patient information.* The central monitor is
designed so the operator can directly touch the screen from the operator position.
* Essential performance in EMC standard
WARNING
Do not diagnose a patient based only on data acquired by the central
monitor. Overall judgement must be performed by a physician who
understands the features, limitations and characteristics of the
central monitor and by reading the biomedical signals acquired by
other instruments.
You can compose a patient monitoring network with central monitors, bedside
monitors, multiple patient receivers and transmitters. One network can include
up to 300 beds. A patient’s data can be accessed simultaneously at up to four
central monitors. The system offers monitoring flexibility to best meet your
patient’s clinical needs. A single central monitor can continuously monitor up to
8 beds (16 beds when QP-962P 16 Patient Expansion Program Kit is installed).
The overview bed function allows you to temporarily monitor a bed that is on the
network but not continuously monitored by the central monitor. This provides
quick and easy access to any patient’s data similar to being monitored at the
central monitor.
The central monitor has various windows to monitor a patient’s status:

• Monitoring windows
- Wave Display window
- ECG 12 Lead Display window
- All Vital Signs window
• Review windows
- Trend window
- Tabular Trend window
- Hemodynamics window
- Arrhythmia Recall window
- ST Recall window
- Full Disclosure window
- ECG 12 Lead Analysis window
- Alarm History window
- Alarm Events window
• Multi Patient Alarms windows
- Multi Patient Alarm Events window
- Multi Patient Limits window

1. GENERAL
The central monitor provides various types of recordings. Both a thermal array
recorder and a laser printer can be used.
Alarm limits and other bedside monitor settings can be set or changed remotely
from a central monitor.
Please read this manual thoroughly before operation in order to obtain full use of
the central monitor. Also read the manuals for the bedside monitors, transmitters
and multiple patient receiver.
NOTE
• This central monitor must be used by qualified medical personnel with a
full knowledge of operating this monitor.
• Only use Nihon Kohden parts and accessories to assure maximum
performance from your central monitor.
• Upgrade the main unit and each optional unit to the Nihon Kohden
recommended software version. Only use the specified configuration of
units. If more than one CNS-9601K central monitor is used in the same
facility, make sure the central monitors have the same software version.
If CNS-9601K central monitors with different software versions are used
together, correct system operation cannot be guaranteed.
For simplicity, the suffix G/K will be omitted in this manual.

1. GENERAL
1
Central Monitor Composition
CNS-9601 Central Monitor

MU-960R Central Monitor LCD Display (local purchase)
Main Unit
RU-960P*
YL-960P Alarm Indicator WS-960P Recorder Unit
Multiple Pateint Receiver
ZR-920P Receiver
DM-960P J Frame Mouse Bar Code Reader
EK-960P Blank Module Keyboard Expansion Program Kits

QP-962P 16 Patient Expansion
Program Kit
QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing
Program Kit
QP-964P 12 Lead ECG
Interpretation Filing Program Kit
Printer Cable Sets * CE mark is not applied to the

RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.
Laser Printer (Network printer) YS-093P0 J Frame Cable Set If necessary, use the ORG-9100
YS-093P1 J Frame Cable Set 2 Multiple Patient Receiver.
Local Purchase Display

ET1928L-8CJN-1-BG-NKD-G LCD display

1. GENERAL
Network Composition
In a central monitor network, on a central monitor, you can see data of any bed
in the network. On a bedside monitor, you can see data of any bed in the network
using the interbed function.
The data that can be displayed on the bedside monitor or central monitor depends
on the type of bedside or central monitor used.
The number of central monitors and bedside monitors that can be connected to
a central monitor network and the method of network communication depend
on the type of monitor used. For details, refer to the Network and System
installation guide.
Network group
e.g. ICU
CNS-9701 Central monitor RU-960P Multiple
CNS-9601 patient receiver
Printer Central monitor Transmitter
Multiple patient receiver Bedside monitor Bedside monitor Interface

ORG-9100 BSS-9800 QI-910R
BSM-9101
BSM-6000 series 8000 series beds
Transmitter
BSM-5100 series BSM-3101
BSM-4100 series BSM-7000 series
BSM-2300 series BSM-8000 series
Network group
e.g. CCU
Central monitor Central monitor Central monitor
Multiple patient receiver Bedside monitor Bedside monitor Bedside monitor
The models for the monitor, transmitter and multiple patient receiver
are the same as those for the ICU group.
Transmitter Transmitter
WARNING WARNING
Install all network devices, including printer and Check the software version number of the central
hubs, outside the patient environment (IEC monitor before connecting it to the network.
60601-1-1). If they are installed inside the patient Different software versions have different
environment, the patient or operator may receive communication methods. More than one
electrical shock or injury. For installation, contact communication method in a network may cause
your Nihon Kohden representative. communication failure. For details, refer to the
Network and System Installation Guide.

1. GENERAL
Operation Restriction by Monitored Bed Type 1

What the central monitor can do depends on the monitored bed type.
Alarm Function
Alarm function
Monitored bed type Temporarily
silence/suspend Turning alarm On/Off Priority
alarms
Not available
When all alarms are set to OFF
BSS/BSM series bedside
on the bedside monitor, the alarm The alarm priority at the central
monitor Temporarily silence
function is OFF on the central monitor coincides with the alarm
any current alarms
monitor. priority at a bedside monitor.
Multiple patient receiver
Not available
with transmitter
Not available The alarm priority at the central
BSM series bedside Temporarily When all alarms are set to OFF monitor does not coincide with
monitor through QI- suspend all alarm on the bedside monitor, the alarm the alarm priority at the bedside
910R interface functions function is OFF on the central monitor. They are set independently
monitor. on each monitor.
Parameter Setup/Personal Setup/Setup
Personal setup
Monitored bed type
Alarm settings Other settings
BSS/BSM series
The settings at the bedside
bedside monitor
monitor and central monitor are Some of the setting at the bedside monitor
BSM series bedside
synchronized. Changing one changes and central monitor are synchronized.
monitor through QI-
the other.
910R interface
Multiple patient receiver
Set on the central monitor
with transmitter

1. GENERAL
Operation Restriction Depending on Whether Data Is Stored in the Central Monitor

When registering a patient as a monitored bed, you need to select whether or
not the patient’s data is saved in the central monitor. Some operations are not
available on beds whose data is not saved in the central monitor.
Operations only available when data is saved in the central monitor
Screen/Window Operations
All Beds screen Alarm notice
Basic information area Arrhythmia notice
• Admit*1
• Discharge/Data deletion
• Pause monitoring
Admit/Discharge window
• Patient transfer
• Change monitor/multiple patient
receiver*2
Channel window Setting a receiving channel
Arrythmia recall window Deleting a recall file
Full disclosure window Selecting saved waveforms
ECG 12 Lead Analysis window Deleting analysis result files
Alarm History window Displaying the list of all alarms
Alarm Events window Displaying alarm events
Report window Automatic report recording
Remote recording requested from
Recording
bedside monitors
*1 You can enter and edit patient data for an admitted bed whose data is not
saved in the central monitor.
*2 “Change Remote Filing Bed” is available for a bed whose data is not saved in
this central monitor.
Monitored Bed and Overview Bed

Monitored Bed
A monitored bed is a bed which is registered on the Monitor Setting window of
the System Setup screen and is continuously monitored at the central monitor.
You can select whether or not the patient’s data is saved in the central monitor.
Overview Bed
An overview bed is a bed which is in the same network as the central monitor but
not registered as a monitored bed. You can temporarily monitor an overview bed
on the central monitor whenever necessary.

1. GENERAL
1
Types of Screens and Windows
All Beds Screens
4 patients (3 waveforms) 6 patients (2 waveforms)
8 patients (1 waveform) 12 patients (2 waveforms)
16 patients (1 waveform)
1. GENERAL
Overview Bed Menu Window Menu Window
Individual Bed Windows
Wave Display window ECG 12 Lead Display window
All Vital Sign window

1. GENERAL
Review Windows 1
Report window Alarm Events window
Alarm History window ECG 12 Lead Analysis window
Full Disclosure window ST Recall window
Arrhythmia Recall window Hemodynamics window

1. GENERAL
Tabular Trend window Trend window
Multi Patient Alarms Windows
Multi Patient Alarm Events window Multi Patient Limits window
System Setup Screen Setup Window

1. GENERAL
Personal Setup Window Parameter Setup Window 1

1. GENERAL
Basic Operation
Control and Input

The operation of the central monitor is controlled through the touchkeys, mouse,
and keyboard.
Touchkeys Input
When using the Nihon Kohden specified LCD display, you can operate the
central monitor through the touchkeys.
To operate, directly touch an area of the screen with your finger. When the key is
touched, there is a pip sound.
In this manual, directly touching the XX key on the screen with your finger is
referred to as “Touch ‘XX’.”.
Example: Touch “REC”.
Keyboard Input
From the keyboard, you can input letters and numbers. You can also select an
item and scroll data with the arrow keys on the keyboard.
In this manual, pressing the XX key on the keyboard is referred to as “Press the
XX key”.
Mouse Input
Mouse input is also available throughout the screens. Click items and menus on
the screen to select them. This technique has basically the same effect on screen
operations as the touchkeys input.
NOTE
The right mouse button has no function.

1. GENERAL
Key Operation at the Bottom of the Screen 1

A set of required keys appears at the bottom of the screen depending on the
screen.
System Setup Function Keys Print Menu Back

Displays the System Displays the assigned Starts/stops printing Displays the Returns to the previous
Setup screen. screen/window. on the printer. Menu window. screen/window.
Overview Record Waveform Display All Beds

Displays the Overview Starts/stops recording Displays the Wave Displays the All
Bed window. on the WS-960P Display window of the Beds screen.
Recorder Unit. Individual Bed window.
Switching Windows
Opening Other Windows from the Menu Window
To display the Menu window, touch “Menu”. The Menu window has all keys to
open all windows.
Returning to the All Beds Screen

Touch “All Beds” on the bottom right of the screen.
Returning to the Previous Screen/Window

Touch “Back”. Every time you touch this key you can return to the previous
screen/window until you select another bed.

1. GENERAL
Opening the Individual Bed Window from the All Beds Screen
Touch the wave area of the patient you want to display the Individual Bed
window for.
Changing the Bed to Display or Change Settings

Touch the basic information area of the patient you want to choose.
Opening Other Windows with Tabs

On the Individual Bed window, windows of the Parameter Setup, Personal Setup
and Setup, you can switch the window types by touching the tab of the window
name you want to open.

1. GENERAL
Opening Other Windows with Function Keys 1

When the window is registered in the customized keys, you can also open the
window with the function keys.
Function keys

1. GENERAL
Changing Settings
Touch the setting on the screen. This can select and unselect and display the
setting window for the item.
Touch to change selection/non-selection.
Touch “NONE” to
The corresponding setting list appears according to the
unselect all items.
touched key in the Displayed Parameters box.
Scrolling Data and List

Touch arrow keys to scroll data up and down or left and right. You can also scroll
with the arrow keys on the keyboard.

1. GENERAL
Entering Letters and Numbers 1

Enter letters and numbers from the keyboard on the screen.
You can also increase or decrease a setting value by touching or on the

screen.
Basic Keyboard Operation

When the touch function keyboard is displayed on the screen, you can also input
letters and numbers from the keyboard. You can also scroll data with the arrow
keys on the keyboard.

1. GENERAL
Backup Battery
A battery is installed in this central monitor to prevent a data loss in case of

power failure or sudden power interruption. The central monitor automatically
switches to the battery power when the AC power is not supplied from the AC
power source. If a power interruption continue for more than 30 seconds, the
central monitor performs a normal shutdown.
CAUTION
Replace the backup battery once a year with a new one. Otherwise
the backup battery may deteriorate so that if there is a sudden power
failure, all data saved in the central monitor may be lost.
NOTE
• Connect the power cord immediately to central monitor when the power
cord is disconnected from the central monitor.
• The central monitor shut down after two seconds when the battery is
not charged.
• The “Battery Error” message appears if the battery is deteriorated or
there is a battery failure. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
• The “Battery Power Charging” message appears when the central
monitor restart the AC operation after the power failure. If the message
is displayed for more than one day, the battery may be deteriorated.
Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
• Do not remove the power cord while the “Battery Power charging”
message is displayed.
• When the central monitor stored for a long time with the power cord
disconnected, the battery is self-discharged. Connect the power cord
for more than two weeks for the maximum performance of the backup
function.
• The central monitor restarts automatically when the AC power supplied
after power supply is interrupted, switches to the battery operation and
shutdown.
• The central monitor restarts automatically when there is a short power
interruption and switches to the battery operation without shutdown.
Major cause for power interruption

• There was a decrease in power
When the power supply
voltage.
is interrupted, an alarm • The power cord was disconnected
message appears. from AC SOURCE socket or wall
Check the AC power supply AC outlet.
(CRISIS alarm)
Approximately
30 seconds
Shutdown

1. GENERAL
1
Caution Mark
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit
CAUTION
While the central monitor is on, do not touch unused sockets or cables
connected to the sockets. Failure to follow this instruction may damage
the central monitor by static electricity and cause malfunction.
Refer to Warnings and Cautions in “Installation Conditions” and “Connecting

the Components of the Central Monitor and Other Instruments and Systems” in
Section 3.

1. GENERAL
Important Safety Information
General
WARNING WARNING
Never use the central monitor in the presence of Never use the central monitor in a hyperbaric
any flammable anesthetic gas or high oxygen chamber. Failure to follow this warning
concentration oxygen atmosphere. Failure to may cause explosion or fire.
follow this warning may cause explosion or fire.
WARNING WARNING
Do not install or run any software not specified by Do not monitor the patients over the number of
Nihon Kohden in the central monitor. Nihon receivers in a multiple patient receiver (up to 8
Kohden does not warrant normal operation of the patients) by changing the channels. The patient’s
CNS-9601 system program if unspecified data will be mixed together. It can only monitor
software is installed or used. the patients who are set at the receiving channels
in the central monitor. You cannot know the
information if there is a sudden change in
condition of a patient who is not set in the central
monitor.
WARNING WARNING
While the central monitor is on, do not connect After attaching electrodes, probes and sensors
any external devices such as USB memory. on the patient and connecting cables to the
Nihon Kohden does not warrant the normal bedside monitor and/or transmitter, check that
operation of the central monitor if an application there is no error messages and the waveforms
or software installation starts automatically. and numeric data are appropriately displayed on
the screen. If there is an error message, or
waveform or numeric data is not appropriate,
check the electrodes, probes and sensor
attachment, patient condition and settings on the
bedside monitor and/or transmitter and remove
the cause.
WARNING WARNING
Do not diagnose a patient based only on data When the signal is unstable, keep the patient
acquired by the central monitor. Overall under close observation. When the signal is
judgement must be performed by a physician unstable, the monitoring and alarm are not
who understands the features, limitations and reliable and the central monitor cannot detect a
characteristics of the central monitor and by sudden change of the patient’s condition. This
reading the biomedical signals acquired by other may cause critical changes in the patient
instruments. condition to be overlooked. Install an appropriate
antenna system to ensure stable signal condition.

1. GENERAL
1
CAUTION CAUTION
While the central monitor is on, do not touch If fluids are accidentally spilled into the central
unused sockets or cables connected to the sockets. monitor, take the central monitor out of service
Failure to follow this instruction may damage the and contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
central monitor by static electricity and cause The central monitor must be disassembled,
malfunction. cleaned, dried and tested for safety and function.
CAUTION CAUTION
When receiving bedside monitor data through the When receiving data from a ZS-530P transmitter
ZB-800P, ZB-900P or ZS-900P transmitter, check or from a bedside monitor which has a ZB-800P,
the alarm, arrhythmia and monitoring settings on ZB-900P or ZS-900P transmitter, there may be a
the bedside monitor and central monitor. The delay or difference in the waveforms and data on
alarm, arrhythmia and monitoring setting the central monitor. Be careful when reading the
information of the bedside monitor is not data and waveforms.
transmitted.
Installation
WARNING
Install the central monitor outside the patient
environment (IEC 60601-1-1). If the central
monitor are installed inside the patient
environment, the patient or operator may receive
electrical shock or injury. For installation, contact
your Nihon Kohden representative.
CAUTION CAUTION
Connect only the specified instrument to the When installing, connecting and assembling the
central monitor and follow the specified central monitor, only use specified instruments
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may and parts and follow the specified procedure.
result in electrical shock or injury to the operator, Otherwise, the operator may receive electrical
and cause fire or instrument malfunction. shock or injury.
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use the provided power cord. Using other Keep the cable out of the way by running it along
power cords may result in electrical shock or the floor or wall. Otherwise people may trip over
injury to the operator. it, causing the instrument to fall and injure the
patient and operator.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION CAUTION
Before connecting or disconnecting instruments, Install the antennas indoors. When installed
make sure that each instrument is turned off and outdoors, they may be struck by lightning.
the power cord is disconnected from the AC
socket. Otherwise, the patient or operator may
CAUTION
receive electrical shock or injury.
Turn off the power of mobile phones, small
wireless devices and other devices which
produce strong electromagnetic interference
around a patient (except for devices allowed by
the hospital administrator). Radio waves from
devices such as mobile phones or small wireless
devices may be mistaken as pulse waves and the
displayed data may be incorrect.
Network
WARNING WARNING
Connect the central monitor to the network as Install all network devices, including printer and
specified in the Network and System Installation hubs, outside the patient environment (IEC
Guide. Otherwise the patient and operator may 60601-1-1). If they are installed inside the patient
receive electrical shock or injury. To connect the environment, the patient or operator may receive
network, contact your Nihon Kohden electrical shock or injury. For installation, contact
representative. your Nihon Kohden representative.
WARNING
Check the software version number of the central
monitor before connecting it to the network.
Different software versions have different
communication methods. More than one
communication method in a network may cause
communication failure. For details, refer to the
Network and System Installation Guide.
CAUTION CAUTION
The network and system must be managed by The network must be managed by the network
the network or system administrator. Incorrect administrator. Make sure that each instrument in
settings may cause instrument or network failure. the network has a different IP address.
Otherwise, data communication cannot be
performed properly. When adding an instrument
to an already operating network, set the IP
address on the instrument before connecting the
instrument to the network.

1. GENERAL
Turning the Power On/Off 1
CAUTION CAUTION
Follow the specified procedure to turn off the When the monitor is turned on, check that a
central monitor. Otherwise, patient data will be single beep sounds and the red, yellow, cyan and
deleted and the storage device and data in the green alarm indicator lamps blink once. This
storage device may be damaged. shows that the alarm is functioning properly.
Transmitter
WARNING
The following actions must be taken to properly
receive the transmitter signal of the correct
patient on the receiving instrument. Otherwise,
there may be signal loss or signals may mix
causing a serious accident, such as monitoring a
different patient.
• Assign a channel administrator in the hospital
and only he or she should manage channel
assignment.
• The channel administrator must manage the
channels in the facility so that there is no signal
interference.
• When the transmitter channel is changed,
the channel administrator must check that
the channel on the receiving monitor is also
changed and the signal is properly received.
• The channel administrator must replace the
channel number label on the transmitter with
the new one after changing the channel.
Admission, Discharge and Changing the Receiving Channel
WARNING WARNING
After admitting a patient at a bedside monitor, Check that the channel number of the transmitter
confirm that the patient is also admitted at the corresponds to the receiving channel (the
central monitor and that the central monitor starts channel displayed on the monitor screen).
monitoring the patient. Otherwise, the central monitor monitors a
different patient.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first discharge the When you change the receiving channel to
previous patient and delete all data of the monitor a new patient, first delete all data of the
previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the
previous patient and new patient will be mixed previous patient and new patient will be mixed
together. together and it will cause misunderstanding of the
patient history.
Pause Monitoring
WARNING
When you resume monitoring of the paused bed
at the bedside monitor or transmitter, check that
monitoring is also resumed at the central monitor.
Monitoring of the paused bed automatically
resumes at the central monitor when the Auto
Resume After Pause setting on the System Setup
screen are met. When Auto Resume After Pause
is set to Off, resume monitoring at the central
monitor by pressing the “Resume” key.
Changing Monitor
CAUTION
Keep the current bedside monitor and the new
bedside monitor power on and connected to the
network until the monitor is changed. Otherwise
the patient data is lost. After changing the
monitor, confirm that the data and settings before
changing the monitor are displayed in the new
monitor.

1. GENERAL
Patient Transfer 1
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the source bedside monitor and the On the central monitor, when the patient is
destination bedside monitor power on and transferred between different central monitors in
connected to the network until the patient transfer the network, the data for that patient is saved
is complete. Otherwise the patient transfer fails only on the new monitor and the previous
and the data is lost. After transferring the patient, monitor. If the patient is transferred from monitor
confirm that the data before the patient transfer A to monitor B, then transferred again to monitor
can be displayed at the destination bed. C, the data is saved on monitor B and C but
deleted from monitor A.
CAUTION CAUTION
When transferring a patient, confirm the After patient transfer, settings other than patient
destination bed you want to transfer by the information and alarm settings are returned to the
message on the screen. If you select the wrong default settings. Change the settings if necessary.
destination bed, the patient data of the source
bed overwrites the patient data of the destination
bed and the overwritten data cannot be
recovered.
Alarm
WARNING WARNING
A physician must be within the range where he/ Do not diagnose a patient based on only the
she can hear the alarm sound of the central alarm information of the central monitor. An alarm
monitor while monitoring a patient on the central may not be indicated due to alarm level or alarm
monitor. If the physician cannot hear the alarm on/off setting and critical changes on the patient
sound, critical changes on the patient may be may be overlooked.
overlooked.
WARNING WARNING
When an alarm occurs: If more than one medical equipment is used
• Check the patient first and take necessary together in the same facility, make sure all
measure to ensure patient’s safety. equipments have the same alarm default settings
• Remove the cause of the alarm. (alarm master). If the medical equipments have
• Check the alarm settings on the central monitor different alarm default settings and when
and change the alarm settings if necessary. initialized, the alarm settings differ with the other
equipments and alarm cannot be managed
appropriately in the facility. If using different alarm
default settings according to areas or wings in the
facility, manage the alarms appropriately.

1. GENERAL
WARNING WARNING
When admitting a new patient, confirm alarm When alarm is suspended by pressing the
settings. Also check the alarm settings during SUSPEND ALARM key on the transmitter, all
monitoring and change the settings according to alarms are turned off for that transmitter. Be
the patient condition. For a bed monitored via careful when you suspend the alarm.
multiple patient receiver, the alarm settings
become the Alarm Master 1 settings in the
WARNING
following cases:
When the communication loss alarm is set to
• When the bed is discharged
OFF, there will be no communication loss alarm.
• When you touch the “Delete Data” key on the
When it is set to OFF, always pay careful
Delete Data window of the Admit/Discharge
attention to the communication status.
window
• When you delete all data of the bed when the
receiving channel is changed
WARNING
If the communication between the central monitor
and an overview bed is lost, there will be no
communication loss alarm or overview bed alarm.
Do not rely solely on the overview bed function to
monitor the patient vital signs.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be When the communication loss alarm in the Single
no alarm for that limit. Be careful when you set Sound mode is silenced, an alarm for the same
the alarm limit to OFF. alarm condition does not occur again while
communication is still lost. In Single Sound mode,
always pay careful attention to the
communication status.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia, While the “SIGNAL LOSS” message is displayed,
there will be no alarm for that arrhythmia type. parameters are not monitored and the alarms do
There is no message or mark to indicate that a not function. Check the transmitter and
certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, communication status and remove the cause.
be careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
CAUTION
When the “CONNECTOR OFF” message
appears on the screen, check that the connection
cords are connected to the sockets properly. The
patient cannot be monitored and the alarm does
not function while this message is displayed.

1. GENERAL
ECG Monitoring 1
WARNING WARNING
Turn the pacing pulse detection* to ON when For arrhythmia monitoring, set Arrhythmia
monitoring a pacemaker patient. Otherwise the Analysis on the ECG window to ON. Otherwise,
pacemaker pulse is not rejected. However, even there is no sound or indication for arrhythmia
when the pacing pulse detection is set to ON, the alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
pacemaker pulse might not be rejected. When the
pacemaker pulse is not rejected, the pacemaker
WARNING
pulse is detected as QRS and false heart rate
Even when the pacing pulse detection is set to
may be indicated or critical arrhythmia such as
ON, the pacemaker pulse can be overlooked or
asystole may be overlooked. Keep pacemaker
detected as QRS. You cannot confirm the
patients under close observation.
pacemaker operation only from the detected
* For the pacemaker pulse rejection capability of RU- pacemaker pulse.
960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver, refer to
“Specifications - Arrhythmia Specifications on RU-960P/
ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver” in Section 18.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the ECG measurement is OFF, ECG The central monitor does not perform ECG
alarms do not occur even if each ECG alarm item analysis. Therefore, the QRS sync sound at the
is set to ON. central monitor might not synchronize with the
patient’s actual QRS during pacing or when
complicated arrhythmias occur.
CAUTION CAUTION
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia The sync sound at the central monitor has a time
analysis, make the monitor relearn the patient’s delay of several seconds because of network
ECG and check that the dominant QRS is connection.
appropriate. Otherwise, an important arrhythmia
may be overlooked.
CAUTION CAUTION
• Although the ST algorithm has been tested When the full disclosure waveform is expanded in
for accuracy of the ST analysis result, the actual size, the steep slant such as QRS may be
significance of the ST level changes need to be distorted because it has been compressed then
determined only by a physician. expanded. When reading the expanded ECG
• The ECG from the transmitter other than waveforms, be aware of this distortion.
ZM series is not processed by a 3.2 second
time constant filter. Therefore, the ST level
measurement is not designed to be accurate
enough for diagnosis. Do not rely on this ST
level measurement.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION CAUTION
When the “CHECK LEADS” message is At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the
displayed, ECG is not monitored properly and the correct patient type is set for QRS Detection Type
ECG alarm does not function. Check the on the following window.
electrode, electrode leads and connection cord, • When using a multiple patient receiver: QRS
and if necessary, replace with new ones. Detection window of the ECG window.
• When using a bedside monitor and transmitter:
Home screen or ECG window of the monitor.
If an inappropriate patient type is set, heart rate
cannot be counted accurately and noise or P
waves may be counted as QRS and cardiac
arrest may be overlooked.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the “NOISE” or “CANNOT ANALYZE” Use the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver only
message is displayed, ECG data and alarm are with the specified version of MU-960P Central
not reliable. Remove the cause by checking the Monitor Main Unit. If the multiple patient receiver
electrodes, electrode leads, patient’s body is used with the unspecified version of the central
movement, EMG and peripheral instruments monitor main unit, heart rate might be counted
grounding. Also check that no electric blanket is incorrectly or noise and P-waves might be
used. incorrectly counted as QRS because the QRS
detection type cannot be set on the multiple
patient receiver. This could cause failure to detect
asystole.
Respiration Measurement
CAUTION
When measuring respiration by impedance
method and Impedance Respiration
Measurement on the RESP window is set to OFF,
respiration alarms do not occur even if each
respiration alarm item is set to ON.
Temperature Measurement
CAUTION
When receiving temperature data through a ZB-
800P, ZB-900P or ZS-900P transmitter,
measurement values below 5°C (41°F) and
above 45°C (113°F) are not transmitted and the
value is not displayed on the central monitor.

1. GENERAL
SpO2 Monitoring 1
CAUTION CAUTION
When the probe is attached on an appropriate The sensitivity of the pulse waveform measured
site with sufficient circulation and an error by a ZM-930P transmitter is automatically
message about probe attachment repeatedly changed inside the transmitter. When the
appears, the probe may be deteriorated. Replace sensitivity is changed, the waveform becomes flat
it with a new one. for about one second.
CO2 Monitoring
CAUTION CAUTION
When the “CHECK SENSOR” message is When receiving CO2 data from a bedside monitor
displayed, check the CO2 sensor kit and replace it through a ZB-800P, ZB-900P or ZS-900P
if necessary. CO2 cannot be monitored while the transmitter, if a measured value is out of the
message is displayed. range of the central monitor, only the maximum
value of the central monitor is displayed. Be
careful when reading the value.
NIBP Measurement
WARNING
When performing long term measurement at
intervals less than 2.5 minutes, perform
measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure
adequate circulation. Congestion may occur at
the measurement site. When performing periodic
measurement for a long time, periodically check
the circulation condition.
CAUTION
Before you remotely start and stop NIBP
measurement from the central monitor, confirm
the state of the patient at the bedside monitor.
Carefully start and stop NIBP measurement from
the central monitor.

1. GENERAL
Extended Units
WARNING WARNING
When using the Extended Units setting, the When using the Extended Units, before you
following parameter unit settings only affect the perform the patient transfer, make sure that all
individual bedside monitor, not on all monitors unit settings on the source and destination beds
connected to the network. The unit settings must are set to the same units. If the unit settings differ
be the same on all bedside monitors and central between the beds, the alarm settings may
monitors in the network. Otherwise, different change and cause incorrect measurement on the
measurement values and alarms will be destination bed.
displayed on different monitors depending on the
unit settings on each monitor.
• CO2 Unit
• Respiration Unit
• tcPO2/tcPCO2 Unit
WARNING
When using the Extended Units, before you
change a monitor for a patient, make sure that all
unit settings on the source and destination
monitors are set to the same units. If the unit
settings differ between the monitors, the alarm
settings may change and cause incorrect
measurement on the destination monitor.
CAUTION CAUTION
When using the Extended Units, you cannot set When using the Extended Units setting, do not
the following vital sign alarm limits and alarm connect the monitor which does not have
master settings on the central monitor. Extended Units setting.
• ETCO2
• FiCO2
• tcPO2/tcPCO2
Maintenance
CAUTION CAUTION
Before maintenance, cleaning or disinfection, turn Restart the central monitor once every three
the central monitor power off and disconnect the months. Otherwise operation becomes unstable
power cord from the AC socket. Failure to follow and monitoring may stop. While restarting,
this instruction may result in electrical shock and patients monitored by the central monitor must be
central monitor malfunction. monitored by alternate instruments such as
bedside monitors.

1. GENERAL
1
CAUTION CAUTION
During maintenance and servicing, patients Never disassemble or repair the central monitor.
monitored by the central monitor must be If there is any problem with the central monitor,
monitored by alternate instruments such as contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
bedside monitors.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do the regular inspection twice a year. Otherwise, Replace the backup battery once a year with a
a decrease and loss in function will not be new one. Otherwise the backup battery may
noticed and this results in incorrect monitoring. deteriorate so that if there is a sudden power
failure, all data saved in the central monitor may
be lost.
CAUTION
Dispose of Nihon Kohden products according to
your local laws and your facility’s guidelines for
waste disposal. Otherwise, it may affect the
environment. If there is a possibility that the
product may have been contaminated with
infection, dispose of it as medical waste
according to your local laws and your facility’s
guidelines for medical waste. Otherwise, it may
cause infection.

Section 2 Panel Description 2
Central Monitor Composition................................................................................................................................ 2.2

MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit.................................................................................................................... 2.3
Front Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.3
Rear Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.3
LCD Display (Locally Purchased Display)............................................................................................................ 2.4
YL-960P Alarm Indicator...................................................................................................................................... 2.5
Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 2.5
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver...................................................................................................................... 2.6
Front Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.6
Rear Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.6
WS-960P Recorder Unit....................................................................................................................................... 2.7
Front Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.7
Rear Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.7
Laser Printer (Network Printer)............................................................................................................................. 2.8

2. PANEL DESCRIPTION
Central Monitor Composition
When Mounted on the J Frame YL-960P

Alarm Indicator
LCD Display
(Local purchase)
RU-960P
WS-960P
Multiple Patient Receiver MU-960R
Recorder Unit
Central Monitor Main Unit
CE mark is not applied to RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver. If necessary, use

the ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver which has the CE mark.
WARNING CAUTION
While the central monitor is on, do not connect While the central monitor is on, do not touch
any external devices such as USB memory. unused sockets or cables connected to the sockets.
Nihon Kohden does not warrant the normal Failure to follow this instruction may damage the
operation of the central monitor if an application central monitor by static electricity and cause
or software installation starts automatically. malfunction.


2
When Mounted on the J Frame
Rear
Panel
Front
Panel
Front Panel Rear Panel
5
18
6
17
16 7
15 8
1
14 9
2
13 10
3
12 11
4
1 AC power lamp 8 SOUND socket 13 PS/2 socket

Lights when the AC power is Not available. Connects to the keyboard.
supplied. 9 TOUCH socket 14 Relay unit socket
2 Power lamp Connects to the TOUCHSCREEN Not available.
Lights when the power is on. socket on the LCD display through 15 LCD display DC power socket
3 Power switch the touchscreen connection cable Connects to the power socket
Press to start the CNS-9601 system provided with the LCD display. on the LCD display through the
program. 10 NETWORK socket power cord provided with the LCD
4 USB socket Connects to network system display.
Connects to the mouse or bar code through a network cable. 16 USB socket
reader. 11 AC SOURCE socket For maintenance.
5 SERIAL socket Connects to a wall AC outlet using 17 RU-960P socket
Not available. the power cord to supply AC to the Connects to the RU-960P Multiple
main unit. Patient Receiver.
6 Alarm indicator socket
Connects to the YL-960P Alarm 12 Equipotential grounding 18 RGB socket
Indicator. terminal Connects to the RGB socket on
Connects to the equipotential the LCD display through the RGB
7 RECORDER socket grounding lead.
Connects to the WS-960P connection cable provided with the
Recorder Unit through the recorder LCD display.
cable provided with the central
monitor main unit.
LCD Display (Locally Purchased Display)
The specified model ET1928L-8CJN-1-BG-NKD-G LCD display may be

changed without notice. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative when you
purchase a display.
For details on the part descriptions of the display, refer to the manual provided
with the display.

YL-960P Alarm Indicator

2
Overview
1
1 Alarm indicator
Blinks or lights when an alarm is activated. Blinks with
sync sounds.
2 Alarm indicator cable
3 Alarm indicator connector
Connects to the alarm indicator socket on the MU-960R
3
Central Monitor Main Unit.
2

RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver

Rear
Panel
Front
Panel
Front Panel
1 2 3 4
6 5
Rear Panel
7 8
1 Receiver serial number label column 6 SERIAL socket (behind the cover)
For attaching the serial number label provided with the Connects to an equipment for checking the multiple
receiver. The column number corresponds to the slot patient receiver.
number in the multiple patient receiver.
2 POWER lamp NOTE
Lights when the power cord is connected and the AC • Do not connect any other equipment.
current is supplied.
• Do not remove the cover.
3 ERROR lamp
Lights for about 15 seconds after power on. 7 Antenna sockets
Continuously lights when an error is detected. Connects to the antenna cables. When using only one
antenna, use the ANT 1 socket.
4 LINK lamp
Lights when connected to the MU-960R Central 8 MU-960R socket
Monitor Main Unit. Connects to the MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit.
5 INITIALIZATION switch
Initializes the multiple patient receiver when the power
cord is connected while this switch is pressed.

WS-960P Recorder Unit

2
Rear Panel
Front Panel
Front Panel Rear Panel

1
4
2
3
1 Recorder release lever 4 Recorder unit socket

Move the lever in the direction of the arrow ( ) to Connects to the RECORDER socket on the MU-960R
release the lock. Central Monitor Main Unit through the recorder cable
2 Recorder provided with the central monitor main unit.
Contains the recording paper.
3 Error lamp
Blinks when out of paper. Lights when the recorder door
is open.

Laser Printer (Network Printer)
Use the laser printer that Nihon Kohden recommends. Connect to the network
when you use the network printer. Refer to the printer manual.
Recommended laser printer: Hewlett Packard, LaserJet 4100n

Hewlett Packard, LaserJet 4200n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet 4250n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet P4015n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet P4515n
The recommended model may be changed without notice. Contact your Nihon
Kohden representative when you locally purchase a laser printer.

Section 3 Preparation
3
Installation Conditions.......................................................................................................................................... 3.2

Connecting the Components of the Central Monitor and Other Instruments and Systems.................................. 3.3
Connecting the Components of the Monitor and Other Instruments.......................................................... 3.3
Standard Instruments....................................................................................................................... 3.3
Optional Instruments........................................................................................................................ 3.3
Connecting to a Network System............................................................................................................... 3.3
Operation Flowchart............................................................................................................................................. 3.4
Loading the Recording Paper............................................................................................................................... 3.5
Handling the Recording Paper................................................................................................................... 3.5
Loading the Recording Paper in the WS-960P Recorder Unit................................................................... 3.5
Loading Paper in the Laser Printer............................................................................................................. 3.6
Turning Power On/Off........................................................................................................................................... 3.7
Preparation Before Power On..................................................................................................................... 3.7
Turning the Central Monitor Main Unit Power On....................................................................................... 3.7
Turning the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver Power On......................................................................... 3.8
Checking Items After Power On....................................................................................................... 3.8
Turning the Power Off................................................................................................................................. 3.9
Preparation After Turning the Power On............................................................................................................. 3.10
Changing Settings on the System Setup Screen..................................................................................... 3.10
Before Starting Monitoring....................................................................................................................... 3.11
Check Before Use.............................................................................................................................................. 3.12
Check Before Turning On the Monitor...................................................................................................... 3.12
Check After Turning On the Monitor and During Monitoring..................................................................... 3.12

3. PREPARATION
Installation Conditions
Install the central monitor where the screen can be seen clearly and does not
reflect light.
WARNING
Install the central monitor outside the patient
environment (IEC 60601-1-1). If the central
monitor are installed inside the patient
environment, the patient or operator may receive
electrical shock or injury. For installation, contact
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not install the monitor where it will be exposed Avoid exposing the monitor to direct sunlight.
to water or chemical solutions. Avoid direct Otherwise, the temperature rises and it causes
sprinkling, spray or moist air from the nebulizer or malfunction and shortens the life of the monitor.
humidifier. These cause malfunction and shorten
the life of the monitor.
CAUTION CAUTION
Make sure that there is enough space between Do not place blankets or cloth over the monitor. It
the monitor and the wall for adequate ventilation. may affect monitoring.
Otherwise the internal temperature of the monitor
rises, which leads to inaccurate operation and
CAUTION
shortens the monitor life.
Do not install the monitor in a dusty area.
• Leave more than 5 cm of space between the
wall and vent holes on the sides and rear
panels of the monitor. CAUTION
• When the monitor is surrounded, leave more Connect the power cord to an AC outlet which
than 10 cm of space above the monitor can supply sufficient AC current to the monitor.
for ventilation. Do not let the surrounding The monitor cannot function properly with low
temperature exceed 35°C (95°F) during current. Also the breaker trips and it causes
operation. electric power failure.
CAUTION CAUTION
When there is any problem with the monitor, turn Do not place cables in the way or where people
off the power immediately and disconnect the walk.
power cord from the AC outlet. Take the monitor
out of service and check for damage.

3. PREPARATION
Connecting the Components of the Central Monitor and

Other Instruments and Systems
3
For the procedure, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
CAUTION CAUTION
Connect only the specified instrument to the Before connecting or disconnecting instruments,
central monitor and follow the specified make sure that each instrument is turned off and
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may the power cord is disconnected from the AC
result in electrical shock or injury to the operator, socket. Otherwise, the patient or operator may
and cause fire or instrument malfunction. receive electrical shock or injury.
Connecting the Components of the Monitor and Other Instruments

Standard Instruments
• MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit
• RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver
• LCD display (Nihon Kohden specified display)
• YL-960P Alarm Indicator
• WS-960P Recorder Unit
• Keyboard and mouse
• DM-960P J Frame
• EK-960P Blank Module
Optional Instruments
• Bar code reader
• Laser printer (Nihon Kohden specified printer)
• Bedside monitor
Connecting to a Network System

The connection method and grounding method depends on the location where
the central monitor is installed and the types and installation locations of other
instruments.
Refer to the reference “General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical

Systems” in Section 18. Follow IEC 60601-1-1.
WARNING
Connect the central monitor to the network as specified in the
Network and System Installation Guide. Otherwise the patient and
operator may receive electrical shock or injury. To connect the
network, contact your Nihon Kohden representative.

3. PREPARATION
Operation Flowchart
NOTE
Contact your Nihon Kohden representative for system connection. System
connection and system setup settings must be managed by a system
administrator in your hospital and qualified service personnel.
For system connection and procedure before turning the power on, refer to the
Administrator’s Guide.
This section explains turning the central monitor power on/off, preparation at the
central monitor after turning the power on and setting recording paper.
1. Mount the central monitor and other units on the J frame and connect the
YL-960P Alarm Indicator, LCD display, WS-960P Recorder Unit, RU-960P
Multiple Patient Receiver, keyboard and mouse to the MU-960R Central
Monitor Main Unit. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
2. Turn the central monitor power on and other instruments on the system.
3. Set the necessary system setup settings.
4. Admit patients/Enter patient information.
5. Set for each bed (Parameter Setup, Personal Setup, Setup).
6. Start monitoring.

3. PREPARATION
Loading the Recording Paper
Handling the Recording Paper 3
CAUTION
Avoid high humidity, high temperature, direct sunlight and direct
fluorescent light when storing recording paper. Otherwise the paper
may discolor. Store the recording paper in a dry, cool place.
Loading the Recording Paper in the WS-960P Recorder Unit
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not touch the recording head with any hard Clean the head surface with the provided head
material. When the head is tapped with hard cleaner pen before loading new paper. After a
material, the head may crack and the heater period of usage, paper dust may accumulate
element wire may short-circuit. between the paper and the head surface, and
good printing cannot be obtained.
NOTE
• Only use the specified recording paper, FQW50-2-100.
• Do not allow paper to contact pastes, adhesive agents, oil-based felt
pen tips or diazo process (ditto/spirit) copying paper. These discolor the
paper surface.
• Do not allow paper to contact any materials containing vinyl chloride,
plastic eraser, adhesive tape, fluorescent felt tip pen, or cinnabar seal
ink because these discolor the recorded waveforms and data.
• Do not apply strong pressure to the paper. Rubbing or scratching
discolors the paper surface.
When the WS-960P Recorder Unit (optional) is connected to the central

monitor main unit, load recording paper according to the following procedure.
1. Move the paper magazine release lever in the direction of the arrow (▲) to
release the lock.
Recorder release lever

3. PREPARATION
2. Open the recorder door.
3. Set the recording paper inside the recorder so that the detection mark
(small black square on corner) of the paper is on the right side. Draw out
one page of paper toward you.
NOTE
When “Recording Start Position” is set to “After Mark” on the
Recording window of the System Setup screen, feed the paper to
the mark position before starting the recording.
Detection mark
4. Close the recorder door.
Loading Paper in the Laser Printer

Refer to the printer manual.

3. PREPARATION
Turning Power On/Off
Preparation Before Power On 3
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide and confirm that the system connection is
properly done. Load the recording paper in the recorder and printer. Prepare
other instruments on the system.
Turning the Central Monitor Main Unit Power On

Press the power switch on the front panel of the central monitor main unit to turn
the power on. The alarm indicator lights and then the power lamp on the central
monitor main unit lights.
The central monitor starts and the All Beds screen is displayed.
Lamp lit
Lamp lit
CAUTION
When the monitor is turned on, check that a single beep sounds and
the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps blink once.
This shows that the alarm is functioning properly.
NOTE
• If the power lamp does not light, confirm the power cord connection.
The lamp does not light when the specified power is not supplied to the
instrument.
• It takes a few minutes for the LCD screen to reach full brightness.
• The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few minutes after
changing screens.
• There may be some dots on the LCD screen which are always on or
always off, but it does not affect monitoring. This is normal for all LCD
screens.

3. PREPARATION
Turning the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver Power On

The multiple patient receiver power is on when you turn the central monitor
main unit power on.
Lit Lit
CAUTION
Check that there is no smoke or smell from the multiple patient
receiver. If there is smoke or smell, remove the power cord from the
multiple patient receiver and contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
Checking Items After Power On

• The POWER lamp lights.
• The ERROR lamp lights for about 15 seconds after power on, then turns off.
• After turning on the power of all instruments in the network, the LINK lamp
lights.
If the find problems after checking the above items, confirm the connection.
When the LINK lamp does not light, confirm the connection and other
connecting instruments power is turned on.

3. PREPARATION
Turning the Power Off
CAUTION
Follow the specified procedure to turn off the central monitor. 3
Otherwise, patient data will be deleted and the storage device and
data in the storage device may be damaged.
NOTE
Data before the patient transfer is saved in the source central monitor. To
observe the data before the patient transfer, keep the power of the source
central monitor on.
1. Touch “System Setup”. The Revision window of the System Setup screen
opens.
2. Keep touching “POWER OFF” for five seconds to turn the central monitor
power off until the countdown ends.
NOTE
When the central monitor is operated on battery power and perform this
power off procedure, the central monitor restarts. Perform the central
monitor power off procedure again to turn the central monitor power off.
3. Turn the other instruments, such as printer (network printer) power off (as
needed).

3. PREPARATION
Preparation After Turning the Power On
Changing Settings on the System Setup Screen

Set necessary settings on the System Setup screen. Refer to Section 4 of this
manual. On the System Setup screen, you can set settings that affect the system.
Setting window Setting items

Sound Control Alarm sound volume, Sync sound settings (on/off,
tone, Sync bed, volume)
Recording Recording time (for manual recording, periodic
recording and alarm/call recording), recording start
position
Touchkeys Setting Calibrate touchkeys
System Configuration System Configuration settings (system, alarm, RS-
232C, bar code reader setup), editing and saving the
reason while monitoring is paused
Monitor Setting Display setting (Number of patients and size of
numeric data display on All Beds screen), Monitored
beds setting, Bed name setting
ORG Setting Settings for the RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient
Receiver
Mouse Setting Settings for the mouse when operating up to six
central monitors with one mouse
Parameters Select parameters which aren’t currently measured to
be displayed on setting keys
Name Registration Editing and selecting CNS group name
Parameter Colors Display color for each parameter
Master Editing alarm masters and stored wave masters
Function Keys Assigning functions to function keys
Date & Time Setting date and time displayed on the screen
NOTE
Changing this setting affects the entire network.
Maintenance Changing the administrator password. Other
Maintenance windows are protected by the
maintenance password.
NOTE
The shaded settings need an administrator password to access. These
settings must be entered or changed by authorized personnel in your
hospital.

3. PREPARATION
Before Starting Monitoring

Before starting monitoring of a patient, do the following preparation.
3
WARNING
When admitting a new patient, confirm alarm settings. Also check
the alarm settings during monitoring and change the settings
according to the patient condition. For a bed monitored via multiple
patient receiver, the alarm settings become the Alarm Master 1
settings in the following cases:
• When the bed is discharged
• When you touch the “Delete Data” key on the Delete Data window
of the Admit/Discharge window
• When you delete all data of the bed when the receiving channel is
changed
1. Admit a patient.
When you monitor a patient through a multiple patient receiver, set the
receiving channel.
2. Confirm alarm settings.
3. Set the recording setting for the bed (as needed).
4. Check the receiving condition of the multiple patient receiver.

Press the CALL button on the transmitter to confirm that the signal from the
transmitter is correctly received at the central monitor.
5. Prepare the patient for measurement (electrode attachment and connection).

Refer to the operator’s manual of bedside monitors.

3. PREPARATION
Check Before Use
Check the following items before turning on the monitor. If any problem is
detected, take the proper countermeasure according to the troubleshooting and
maintenance sections. If there is any damage or the instrument is suspected to be
faulty as a result of checking, attach an “Unusable” or “Repair request” label to
the instrument and contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
Check Before Turning On the Monitor

• Enough recording paper is in the recorder.
• Enough electrodes and electrode leads are ready.
• The system is connected properly.
• Recording paper is in the recorder.
• The channel setting at the central monitor matches the transmitter channel.
• The antenna is connected properly.
• The transmitter battery is not weak.
• No scratches, damage or dirt on the monitor.
• No damage to the keys, switch, lamps and panels.
• No damage to the power cord.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.
• The transmitter has the battery cover.
Do not use anything sharp to touch the LCD screen (touchkeys), power switches
and other keys. Sharp objects may damage the instrument.
Check After Turning On the Monitor and During Monitoring

• The power lamp lights.
• The lamps on the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver lights.
- The POWER lamp lights.
- The ERROR lamp lights for about 15 seconds after power on.
- The LINK lamp lights.
• There is no fire, smoke or smell.
• The red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps blink once and a beep
sounds.
• The monitor is not too hot. The monitor does not give an electric shock when
touched.
• No error message is displayed on the screen.
• The time on the screen is correct.
• The low battery mark for the transmitter does not appear on the
transmitter LCD display.
• The monitor does not affect surrounding equipment.
• The data and waveforms are displayed properly.
• The touchkeys function properly and the key clicking sound is generated.
(when using the display with touchkeys function)
• The keyboard and mouse operate properly.

3. PREPARATION
• Alarm functions properly.

• Alarm sound can be heard.
• Alarm sound volume setting is appropriate.
• When the CALL button on the transmitter is pressed within the specified range
3
of the central monitor, a message appears on the central monitor screen.
• There is no trouble in recording.
• No error display and malfunction during operation.
• Other instruments on the system operate normally.
CAUTION
When the monitor is turned on, check that a single beep sounds and
the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps blink once.
This shows that the alarm is functioning properly.
NOTE
After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the monitor,
make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of the screen is
correct. The clock may gain or lose time during operation.
When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and time of
all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and time on
the printout.

Section 4 System Setup Screen
4
Overview of the System Setup Screen................................................................................................................. 4.2
Displaying the System Setup Screen......................................................................................................... 4.3
Sound Control....................................................................................................................................................... 4.4
Setting Alarm Sound Volume..................................................................................................................... 4.4
Setting Sync Sound.................................................................................................................................... 4.5
Turning the Sync Sound ON/OFF.................................................................................................... 4.5
Changing the Sync Sound Pitch...................................................................................................... 4.5
Setting the Sync Sound Bed............................................................................................................ 4.5
Setting Sync Sound Volume....................................................................................................................... 4.5
Recording............................................................................................................................................................. 4.6
Touchkeys Setting................................................................................................................................................ 4.6

4. SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN
Overview of the System Setup Screen
On the System Setup screen, you can set settings that affect the system.
Setting window Setting items

Sound Control Alarm sound volume, Sync sound settings (on/off,
tone, Sync bed, volume)
Recording Recording time (for manual recording, periodic
recording and alarm/call recording), recording start
position
Touchkeys Setting Calibrate touchkeys
System Configuration System Configuration settings (system, alarm, RS-
232C, bar code reader setup), editing and saving the
reason while monitoring is paused
Monitor Setting Display setting (Number of patients and size of
numeric data display on All Beds screen), Monitored
beds setting, Bed name setting
ORG Setting Settings for the RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient
Receiver
Mouse Setting Settings for the mouse when operating up to six
central monitors with one mouse
Parameters Select parameters which aren’t currently measured to
be displayed on setting keys
Name Registration Editing and selecting CNS group name
Parameter Colors Display color for each parameter
Master Editing alarm masters and stored wave masters
Function Keys Assigning functions to function keys
Date & Time Setting date and time displayed on the screen
NOTE
Changing this setting affects the entire network.
Maintenance Changing the administrator password. Other
Maintenance windows are protected by the
maintenance password.
NOTE
The shaded settings need an administrator password to access. These
settings must be entered or changed by authorized personnel in your
hospital.

Displaying the System Setup Screen

Touch “System Setup” to display the System Setup screen.
4
Touch to open another window
Central monitor
information
Monitored bed
information
Enter the password
Touch to shut down

the system
Touch to exit the

system

Sound Control
Set alarm sound volume, sync sound on/off, sync sound pitch, sync sound bed
and sync sound volume.
1. Touch “System Setup” to display the System Setup screen.
2. Touch “Sound Control” to display the Sound Control screen.
Setting Alarm Sound Volume

NOTE
• Set the alarm volume depending on the monitoring environment.
• You cannot set the alarm sound volume to off.
• You cannot set the alarm sound volume to the value lower than the
volume set at “Alarm Volume Limit” on the Alarm window of the System
Configuration window.
The volume can be set in seven steps. Touch the or key to increase or
decrease the volume. To check, there is a sound of the selected level every time
you touch the or key. You can also change the volume by directly touching
the bar.
The setup value is shown in yellow, while

the minimum value for alarm volume is
shown in gray. You cannot set the a value
lower than the minimum value.

Setting Sync Sound
CAUTION CAUTION
The central monitor does not perform ECG The sync sound at the central monitor has a time
analysis. Therefore, the QRS sync sound at the delay of several seconds because of network
central monitor might not synchronize with the connection. 4
patient’s actual QRS during pacing or when
complicated arrhythmias occur.
Turning the Sync Sound ON/OFF

Set the sync sound on or off. Touch “ON” or “OFF” in “Sync Sound”. When ON
is selected, there is a beeping sound.
Changing the Sync Sound Pitch

Set the sync sound pitch. Touch “High” or “Low” in “Sync Sound Pitch”.
Setting the Sync Sound Bed

Select the bed of the sync sound source. For the bed selected as the sync bed, the
sync mark ( ) appears on the All Beds screen and basic information area.
Touch a desired key in “Sync Sound Bed”.

Current Bed: Sync sound source is a currently selected bed.
(Specific Bed Name): Sync sound source is always the specific bed.
Setting Sync Sound Volume

The setting procedure is the same as setting alarm sound volume.

Recording
Refer to Section 11.
Touchkeys Setting

Section 5 Admitting/Discharging
Patients
Admitting a Patient............................................................................................................................................... 5.2
5
Patient Information List............................................................................................................................... 5.3
Entering the Patient Information Using a Bar Code Reader....................................................................... 5.4
Entering the Patient Information....................................................................................................... 5.4
Changing the Patient Information..................................................................................................... 5.5
Discharging a Patient........................................................................................................................................... 5.7
Selecting Discharge Mode or Delete Data Mode....................................................................................... 5.8
Pause Monitoring a Patient................................................................................................................................... 5.9
Pause Timer............................................................................................................................................. 5.11
Resume Monitoring.................................................................................................................................. 5.13
Transferring a Patient to a Different Bedside Monitor......................................................................................... 5.14
Transferring a Patient............................................................................................................................... 5.16
Changing a Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on This Central Monitor................................................... 5.19
Changing the Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on Another Central Monitor.......................................... 5.21
Automatically Changing the Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on Another Central
Monitor........................................................................................................................................... 5.22
Setting the Bed Color......................................................................................................................................... 5.23
Changing the Receiving Channel Number......................................................................................................... 5.25

5. ADMITTING/DISCHARGING PATIENTS
Admitting a Patient
After turning on the central monitor, admit a patient on the Admit/Discharge

window. When admitting a patient, enter the patient information on this window.
The central monitor starts monitoring after signal connection and central monitor
start-up are complete.
WARNING
After admitting a patient at a bedside monitor, confirm that the
patient is also admitted at the central monitor and that the central
monitor starts monitoring the patient.
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first discharge the previous patient
and delete all data of the previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the
previous patient and new patient will be mixed together.
NOTE
This operation can only be performed for the monitored beds whose data
is saved in this central monitor.
1. Touch “Admit” on the All Beds screen or the basic information area of the
bed you are going to admit a patient in. The Admit/Discharge window opens.
2. Touch “Admit”.
3. A message asking for confirming patient admittance is displayed.

Touch “Yes”.

4. Enter the patient information. First touch the item you want to enter and then
enter information from the keyboard on the screen or the keyboard.
5. Touch “All Beds” to return to the All Beds screen.
Patient Information List
Item Description
Name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Patient ID Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Blood type A−, A+, B−, B+, AB−, AB+, O−, O+, unknown
Gender Male, Female, unknown
Date of birth YYYY-MM-DD
0 year 0 month to 127 years 11 months
Age Automatically calculated when the date of birth is
entered.
Height* 0.1 to 299.9 cm/0 to 9 ft, 0.0 to 11.9 inch
Weight* 0.1 to 449.9 kg/0.1 to 654.9 lb
Automatically calculated when the height and weight are
BSA
entered.
Physician Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Diagnosis Up to 40 alphanumeric characters, maximum 5 lines
Note Up to 80 alphanumeric characters
* For the height and weight, you can select units at the System Configuration
window of the System Setup screen.
NOTE
The BSS-9800 Bedside Station and BSM-9510 Bedside Monitor do
not include physician’s name and diagnosis in the patient information.
Therefore, for these monitors, if you enter “Physician” and “Diagnosis” at
the central monitor, these items are deleted.

Entering the Patient Information Using a Bar Code Reader

You can enter the patient information such as name, patient ID, blood type,
gender, date of birth, height and weight using a Symbol LS2208 from Motorola,
Inc. Connect and set up the bar code reader beforehand. Refer to the Symbol
LS2208 manual and CNS-9601 Administrator’s Guide.
Entering the Patient Information

1. Touch “Admit” on the All Beds screen or the basic information area of the
bed you are going to admit a patient in. The Bar Code window opens.
2. Scan the bar code of the patient.
3. Confirm the scanned information displayed on the Bar Code window and
touch “Writing”.

4. Confirm the scanned information displayed on the Admit window.
Changing the Patient Information

You can change the patient information of a patient who is already admitted.
1. Touch the basic information area of bed you are going to change the patient
information.
2. Touch “Bar Code” on the Admit window. The Bar Code window opens.

3. Scan the bar code of the patient.
4. Confirm the scanned information displayed on the Bar Code window and
touch “Writing”.
NOTE
Only the scanned information overwrites the information on the Admit
window.
5. Confirm the scanned information displayed on the Admit window.

Discharging a Patient
When the admitted patient no longer needs to be monitored, discharge the

patient. Discharging the patient deletes all the patient data and ends monitoring
of the patient at the central monitor.
5
For the discharged beds:
• “Admit” is displayed.
• No waveform is displayed.
• No alarm function.
• No data is acquired and stored.
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first discharge the previous patient
and delete all data of the previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the
previous patient and new patient will be mixed together.
NOTE
This operation can only be performed for the monitored beds whose data
is saved in this central monitor.
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you are going to discharge a
patient from.
2. Touch “Menu” to display the Menu window.
3. Touch “Admit/Discharge” to display the Admit/Discharge window.
4. Touch “Discharge” to display the Discharge window.

5. Touch “Discharge”. The message window to confirm discharge appears.
6. Touch “Yes”. All data for the patient is deleted.
Selecting Discharge Mode or Delete Data Mode

There are two modes for discharging operation. You can select either one at the
System Configuration window of the System Setup screen.
• Discharge mode: The “Discharge” key is displayed on the Discharge window.
When “Discharge” is touched, all data for the patient is
deleted, the “Admit” key appears at the wave area of the
bed and monitoring ends. To restart monitoring, do the
admitting operation.
• Delete Data mode: The “Delete Data” key is displayed on the Discharge
window. When “Delete Data” is touched, all data for the
patient is deleted and monitoring continues.

Pause Monitoring a Patient
When the patient is temporarily away from the bed and no data from that bedside
monitor is sent to the central monitor, you can pause monitoring of the patient
without deleting the patient data and settings.
5
The pause function pauses displaying measurement values, alarm function and
data saving for review windows without losing patient information and settings.
While monitoring is paused, a reason is displayed beside the paused bed on the
central monitor screen. You can select a reason from different customizable
reasons.
You can customize the reasons on the System Configuration window of the
System Setup screen. Refer to Section 7-1 “Changing the System Setup Screen
Settings for Administrator” of the Administrator’s Guide.
NOTE
• The pause operation can only be done at the central monitor where the
bed’s data is saved.
• The monitoring pause reason only appears on the central monitor and it
does not appear on the bedside monitor.
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed for which you are going to pause
monitoring.
4. Touch “Pause” to display the Pause window.

5. Select the reason you want to display while pause monitoring.
6. Touch “Pause”. Monitoring pauses and the selected reason appears on the
screen.

Pause Timer
During pause you can display a timer on the All Beds screen and Individual Bed
window. To set the timer on or off, edit pause reason and set the default pause
timer interval, refer to Section 7-1 “Changing the System Setup Screen Settings
for Administrator” of the Administrator’s Guide.
1. Select the pause reason in “Pause Reason”.

5
2. Select the pause time in “Pause Time”.
3. Touch “Pause”. Monitoring pauses and the information such as pause reason
appears on the All Beds screen and Individual Bed window.
3
1 2
NOTE
• Monitoring does not automatically resume when the set time elapses.
Touch “Resume” on the Admit/Discharge window to resume monitoring.
• The pause time only appears on the central monitor. It does not appear
on the bedside monitor.
When the Bed Is Paused

All Beds screen
Pause reason The time in parenthesis shows the pause time.
Paused bed Remaining pause time

When the Pause Time is set to Free, remaining
time does not appear.

Individual Bed window
Pause reason
Pause time
When the Pause Time is set
to Free, Expected Return and
Remaining Time do not appear
and the Reduce and Extend
buttons do not function.
Expected return time

Remaining pause time
Reduce Extend
Every touch of the key reduces Every touch of the key extends
the pause time by 15 minutes. the pause time by 15 minutes.
When the Set Pause Time Elapses

When the set pause time elapses, the elapsed time blinks in yellow. You can
select whether to sound a five second notification sound every two minutes on
the Pause Timer Over Time Notification Sound of the System Configuration
window in the System Setup screen.
All Beds screen
Elapsed time
Elapsed time

Resume Monitoring
WARNING
When you resume monitoring of the paused bed at the bedside
monitor or transmitter, check that monitoring is also resumed at the
central monitor. Monitoring of the paused bed automatically resumes
at the central monitor when the Auto Resume After Pause setting on
the System Setup screen are met. When Auto Resume After Pause 5
is set to Off, resume monitoring at the central monitor by pressing
the “Resume” key.
To resume monitoring of the patient whose monitoring is paused:
1. Touch “Resume” on the All Beds screen or on the basic information area.
The Pause window opens.
2. Touch “Resume”. The monitoring resumes.
When Auto Resume After Pause on the System Configuration window of the
System Setup screen is set to 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min
When monitoring at the bedside monitor (transmitter) resumes and properly
continues for this period, monitoring automatically resumes at the central
monitor.

Transferring a Patient to a Different Bedside Monitor
When you want to move a patient to a different bed in the patient monitoring
network, transfer the patient to the destination bed on the central monitor by the
procedure described below. This is called “patient transfer”. By doing the patient
transfer, the patient’s data of the current bed can be observed at the destination
bed.
After patient transfer, the following data can be observed at the destination bed:
• Patient information (except for “Note”)
• Alarm settings
• Trend data
• Hemodynamics list data
• Arrhythmia recall data
• ST recall data
• Full disclosure waveform
• ECG 12 lead analysis file (Only when the data of the source bed and
destination bed are saved in the same central monitor, or when the data of the
source bed and destination bed are saved in different central monitors but both
central monitors are CNS-9601.)
• Alarm History (Only when the data of the source bed and destination bed are
saved in the same central monitor.)
WARNING
When using the Extended Units, before you
perform the patient transfer, make sure that all
unit settings on the source and destination beds
are set to the same units. If the unit settings differ
between the beds, the alarm settings may
change and cause incorrect measurement on the
destination bed.
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the source bedside monitor and the On the central monitor, when the patient is
destination bedside monitor power on and transferred between different central monitors in
connected to the network until the patient transfer the network, the data for that patient is saved
is complete. Otherwise the patient transfer fails only on the new monitor and the previous
and the data is lost. After transferring the patient, monitor. If the patient is transferred from monitor
confirm that the data before the patient transfer A to monitor B, then transferred again to monitor
can be displayed at the destination bed. C, the data is saved on monitor B and C but
deleted from monitor A.

CAUTION CAUTION
When transferring a patient, confirm the After patient transfer, settings other than patient
destination bed you want to transfer by the information and alarm settings are returned to the
message on the screen. If you select the wrong default settings. Change the settings if necessary.
destination bed, the patient data of the source
bed overwrites the patient data of the destination
bed and the overwritten data cannot be 5
recovered.
NOTE
• After the patient transfer, all data other than the data listed on the
previous page and “Note” of the patient information are deleted from the
central monitor and the source bedside monitor.
• The data about ECG 12 lead analysis is moved if bed movement
occurs in the same central monitor or between CNS-9601 and CNS-
9701 Central Monitors. The data about alarm history is moved if bed
movement occurs in the same central monitor. No data will be moved
from any other bed movement.
• Before the patient transfer, confirm that the bedside monitors for the
destination bed and the source bed are both turned on.
• Data before the patient transfer is saved in the source central monitor.
To observe the data before the patient transfer, keep the power of the
source central monitor on.
• The patient transfer can only be performed for the monitored beds
whose data is saved in this central monitor.
• Notes in the patient information are deleted after the patient transfer.
• While a patient is being transferred between different central monitors,
up to one minute of full disclosure waveform and trend data is lost.
OR-011
A “CNS group” consists of a central monitor and all the monitors
OR-001
B B whose data is stored on that central monitor.
OR group
• When transferring a patient within the same CNS group

B Saves data for
the OR and ICU
Example: When a patient is transferred from monitor OR-001 →
OR-002
groups ICU-001 → ICU-014
CNS-9601X
A patient can be transferred between bedside monitors in the
ICU-001 ICU-013 ICU-015 same CNS group any number of times with no data loss. See the
B B
B
diagram on the left.
ICU group
B
• When transferring a patient to a different CNS group
B
ICU-002 ICU-014 A patient can be transferred to a different CNS group once without
data being lost. If the patient is transferred to a third CNS group,
General-001 General-027 General-028 the data is deleted from the first central monitor.
B B B
General group
For example, when a patient is transferred from monitor OR-001
B B Saves data for
→ General-001 → ICU-015, the data saved for General-001 can
General-002 General-003 the General be displayed on CNS-9601X as the data of ICU-015, but data
group
CNS-9601Y saved for OR-001 is lost and cannot be displayed on CNS-9601X.
B: bedside monitor
Transferring a Patient
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to transfer.
4. Touch “Patient Transfer” to display the Patient Transfer window.
5. Touch a bed in Select Destination Bed to select the bed the patient is
transferred to.
When Transferring a Patient to a Vacant Bed

No dialog box appears and the bed registration continues.
When Transferring a Patient to a Bed Where a Patient Name and/or Patient
ID are Already Registered
If there is a patient name and/or patient ID in the destination bed, the
following dialog box appears confirming the transfer of the patient to the
bed. The registered bed name, group, patient name and/or patient ID are
highlighted in red.

Touch “Yes” to continue the registration of the bed. Touch “No” to cancel
registering.
6. When the Extended Units setting is set to ON, the confirmation dialog box
about unit settings appears.
Touch “Yes” to transfer the patient.
Touch “No” to cancel transferring
7. Touch “Transfer”. The message window to confirm the transfer appears.
When Transferring a Patient to a Vacant Bed

Touch ”Yes”. The “TRANSFERRING” message appears. Then it
changes to “Transfer: Success”.
When Transferring a Patient to a Bed Where a Bed Name, Group, Patient
Name and/or Patient ID are Already Registered
If there is a bed name, group, patient name or patient ID in the
destination bed, the following dialog box appears to confirm the transfer
of the patient to the bed. The registered bed name, group, patient name
and/or patient ID are highlighted in red.
Touch “Yes” to transfer the patient to the destination bed. Touch “No” to
cancel transferring the patient.
8. Touch “All Beds” to return to the All Beds screen. When transferring the

patient, the source bed becomes discharged and the patient is admitted to the
destination bed.
NOTE
When the transferred bed is monitored through an RU-960P/ORG-9100
series multiple patient receiver, the following settings return to the Alarm
Master 1 settings after transfer:
• Alarm
• Arrhythmia Analysis ON/OFF
• QRS Detection Type

Changing a Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on This

Central Monitor
This procedure is only for a bed whose data is saved in this central monitor.
Do the following procedure when you change to a different monitor (bedside 5

monitor or multiple patient receiver) for a patient. The bed position for the
patient on the central monitor does not change. The monitoring data and settings
(e.g. waveform selection) for the bed are kept after the monitor is changed.
WARNING
When using the Extended Units, before you change a monitor for a
patient, make sure that all unit settings on the source and destination
monitors are set to the same units. If the unit settings differ between
the monitors, the alarm settings may change and cause incorrect
measurement on the destination monitor.
CAUTION
Keep the current bedside monitor and the new bedside monitor
power on and connected to the network until the monitor is changed.
Otherwise the patient data is lost. After changing the monitor,
confirm that the data and settings before changing the monitor are
displayed in the new monitor.
This operation is available when “Change Device” is set to “ON” on the System
Configuration window of the System Setup screen. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide.
1. Connect the new monitor to the central monitor network and turn the power
on.
2. On the central monitor, touch the basic information area of the bed you want
to change the monitor for.
5. Touch “Change Device” to display the Change Device window.

6. Select the new monitor from the Available Devices box.
NOTE
You cannot select a monitored bed whose data is saved in another central
monitor.
7. Touch “Change Device”. A confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Confirm that the monitor names in the Current Monitored Device and New
Device boxes are correct, and touch “Yes”. The “Changing Device” message
appears and it changes to “Change Device:success”.
9. Touch “OK”.
10. Touch “All Beds” to return to the All Beds screen. The patient is
automatically admitted on the new bedside monitor.
NOTE
After changing the monitor, check that the old monitor is no longer
monitored by other central monitors. If other central monitors are still
monitoring the old monitor, change it to an appropriate monitor on those
central monitors. Refer to “Changing the Monitor for a Bed Whose Data is
Saved on Another Central Monitor”.

Changing the Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved on

Another Central Monitor
This procedure is only for a bed whose data is saved in another central monitor
and also monitored on this central monitor. 5
Do the following procedure when you change to a different monitor (bedside

monitor or multiple patient receiver) for a patient. The bed position for the
patient on the central monitor does not change. The monitoring data and settings
(e.g. waveform selection) for the bed are kept after the monitor is changed.
NOTE
Keep both the current monitor and the new monitor connected to the
network and do not turn them off until changing the monitor is finished. If
either monitor is turned off, the central monitor may keep monitoring the
old bed or it may be unable to monitor either bed.
1. Confirm that the monitor is changed on the central monitor which stores the
bed’s data.
2. On this central monitor, touch the basic information area of the bed you want
to change the monitor for.
5. Touch “Change Remote Filing Bed” to display the Change Remote Filing
Bed window.

6. Select the new monitor from the Available Beds box.
NOTE
You cannot select a monitored bed of this central monitor.
7. Touch “Change Remote Filing Bed”. A confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Confirm that the monitor names in the Current Monitored Bed and New
Bed boxes are correct, and touch “Yes”. The “Changing remote filing bed”
message appears and it changes to “Change Remote Filing Bed: success”.
9. Touch “OK”.
Automatically Changing the Monitor for a Bed Whose Data Is Saved

on Another Central Monitor
The monitor for a bed whose data is saved on another central monitor is
automatically changed on this monitor when all the conditions below are met:
• “Change Device” is set to “ON” on the System Configuration window of the
System Setup screen.
• This central monitor is monitoring a bed whose data is saved in another central
monitor and the monitor for the bed is changed on the central monitor which
saves the bed’s data.

Setting the Bed Color
You can set the background color of the bed name and telemetry channel on the
All Beds screen and basic information area.
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to set the bed color. 5
4. Touch “Bed Color” to display the Bed Color window.
5. Touch the desired color. On the left window, you can confirm the display on
the All Beds screen.
You can select from five group colors when the “Changing Bed Color Also
Changes Bed Group” is set to “ON” on the System Configuration window
of the System Setup screen. When the color is changed, the bed color of all
beds in the same group is also changed.
The bed color is

changed to a new
color.
Touch to return to the factory

default setting (white).

You can select from eight colors when the “Changing Bed Color Also
Changes Bed Group“ is set to “OFF” on the System Configuration window
of the System Setup screen.
NOTE
• When “Changing the Bed Color Also Changes the Beds Groups” is
set to “ON” on the System Configuration window of the System Setup
screen, the bed color and the group color for the Multi Pat. Alarm
Events window changes to the same color.
• The bed color can also be set on the All Beds screen. Refer to “Setting
the Bed Color” in Section 7.

Changing the Receiving Channel Number
When receiving data from a transmitter through an RU-960P/ORG-9100

Multiple Patient Receiver, the transmitter channel must be set on the central
monitor. Otherwise no signal will be received by the central monitor.
5
WARNING
Check that the channel number of the transmitter corresponds to the
receiving channel (the channel displayed on the monitor screen).
Otherwise, the central monitor monitors a different patient.
CAUTION
When you change the receiving channel to monitor a new patient,
first delete all data of the previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the
previous patient and new patient will be mixed together and it will
cause misunderstanding of the patient history.
NOTE
• The receiving channel number is set at the moment you confirm “Yes”
or “No” of all data deletion.
• The receiving channel can be set only when receiving data from a
transmitter through a multiple patient receiver.
• This operation can only be performed for the monitored beds whose
data is saved in this central monitor.
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to set the channel for.
3. Touch “Channel” to display the Channel window of the Setup.
When the “Prohibit Duplicate Channels” is set to “ON” on the System

Configuration window of the System Setup screen, the window confirming
password appears. Refer to Section 7-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

4. Enter the transmitter channel number.
NOTE
When the Prohibit Duplicate Channels is set to “ON” on the System
Configuration window of the System Setup screen, the same channel as
the admitted bed (includes paused bed) cannot be set. “This channel is
being used for another bed. Select a different channel.” message appears
and entered channel number is not applied.
5. Touch “Set”. A message window to confirm all data deletion appears.
NOTE
• You cannot set a channel number which is not included in the
connected multiple patient receiver.
• Do not set receiving channels which interfere with each other.
Otherwise, the “There is a possibility of channel interference.” message
appears. If you use those channels, signals may be difficult to receive
by the multiple patient receiver.
6. Touch “Yes” or “No”.

Yes: All data is deleted. Select “Yes” when you will monitor a new patient.
No: Data is not deleted. Select “No” when you will use another transmitter
to monitor the same patient.
NOTE
When you delete all data of a bed that is monitored by an RU-960P/ORG-
9100 series multiple patient receiver, the alarm settings change to the
Alarm Master 1 settings.
8. Confirm that the correct channel number is displayed on the screen.

Section 6 Alarm Function
Overview of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................. 6.3

Alarm Types.......................................................................................................................................................... 6.4
Alarm Level and Indication................................................................................................................................... 6.5 6
Alarm Level................................................................................................................................................ 6.5
Alarm Indication......................................................................................................................................... 6.5
Alarms on Each Screen........................................................................................................................................ 6.7
Alarms for Monitored Beds......................................................................................................................... 6.7
Vital Signs Alarm/ST Alarm.............................................................................................................. 6.7
Arrhythmia Alarm............................................................................................................................. 6.7
Technical Alarm................................................................................................................................ 6.8
Alarms for Overview Bed............................................................................................................................ 6.9
Alarms for the Central Monitor and WS-960P Recorder Unit..................................................................... 6.9
Temporarily Silencing or Suspending Alarms..................................................................................................... 6.10
Temporarily Silencing Currently Occurring Alarms................................................................................... 6.10
Alarm Silence Time........................................................................................................................ 6.10
When the Alarm Notice is Activated............................................................................................... 6.10
Temporarily Suspending All Alarms......................................................................................................... 6.11
Alarm Suspend Time...................................................................................................................... 6.11
When the Alarm Notice is Activated............................................................................................... 6.11
Suspending All Alarms at the Transmitter................................................................................................ 6.11
Alarm Control Marks........................................................................................................................................... 6.12
Mark Description...................................................................................................................................... 6.12
Vital Sign Alarm Off Mark/Alarm Off Mark..................................................................................... 6.12
Alarm Suspend Mark..................................................................................................................... 6.12
Alarm Suspend Mark (From the Transmitter)................................................................................. 6.12
Alarm Silence Mark........................................................................................................................ 6.12
Priority of Alarm Control Marks................................................................................................................ 6.12
Turning the Alarm Limits Off Mark Display On/Off................................................................................... 6.13
Alarm Recording................................................................................................................................................. 6.14
Alarm Recording Modes........................................................................................................................... 6.14
Overview of Alarm Recording.................................................................................................................. 6.14
Recording Device........................................................................................................................... 6.14
Recording Waveforms.................................................................................................................... 6.14
Recording Time.............................................................................................................................. 6.14
Recording Speed........................................................................................................................... 6.14
Recording Sensitivity...................................................................................................................... 6.14
Necessary Settings for Alarm Recording................................................................................................. 6.14
Alarm Limits Recording.................................................................................................................. 6.15
Arrhythmia Alarm Recording.......................................................................................................... 6.15
ST Alarm Recording....................................................................................................................... 6.15
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording........................................................................................................ 6.15
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording.............................................................................................. 6.15
Stopping Automatic Alarm Recording............................................................................................ 6.15

Setting Alarms.................................................................................................................................................... 6.16
Setting Alarm Limits................................................................................................................................. 6.16
Alarm Limits Range........................................................................................................................ 6.18
Setting Alarm Limits Automatically (Auto Alarm Setting)............................................................... 6.20
Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm................................................................................................................... 6.22
Initialization of Arrhythmia Recording............................................................................................. 6.23
Setting the ST Alarm................................................................................................................................ 6.25
Setting ST Alarms with Auto Alarm Setting Functions................................................................... 6.26
Setting All Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)............................................................................. 6.27
Setting the LEAD OFF and NOISE Alarm................................................................................................ 6.28
Setting the COMMUNICATION LOSS Alarm........................................................................................... 6.28
Setting Alarm on Multi Patient Limits Window.......................................................................................... 6.28
Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume.................................................................................................................... 6.29
Alarm Notice and Arrhythmia Notice.................................................................................................................. 6.30
Alarm Notice............................................................................................................................................. 6.30
Arrhythmia Notice..................................................................................................................................... 6.31
Technical Icon..................................................................................................................................................... 6.34

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Overview of Alarms
WARNING WARNING
A physician must be within the range where he/ Do not diagnose a patient based on only the
she can hear the alarm sound of the central alarm information of the central monitor. An alarm
monitor while monitoring a patient on the central may not be indicated due to alarm level or alarm
monitor. If the physician cannot hear the alarm on/off setting and critical changes on the patient 6
sound, critical changes on the patient may be may be overlooked.
overlooked.
WARNING WARNING
If more than one medical equipment is used When an alarm occurs:
together in the same facility, make sure all • Check the patient first and take necessary
equipments have the same alarm default settings measure to ensure patient’s safety.
(alarm master). If the medical equipments have • Remove the cause of the alarm.
different alarm default settings and when • Check the alarm settings on the central monitor
initialized, the alarm settings differ with the other and change the alarm settings if necessary.
equipments and alarm cannot be managed
appropriately in the facility. If using different alarm
default settings according to areas or wings in the
facility, manage the alarms appropriately.
The table below shows which alarm functions are available on which instrument.
Transmitter through
Alarm functions Central monitor Bedside monitor
multiple patient receiver
Setting Alarms Available Available Not available
• Vital sign alarm (When the monitored bed is (You can set the settings on
• ST alarm a bedside monitor, settings the central monitor.)
• Arrhythmia alarm at the central monitor
and bedside monitor are
synchronized.)
Judging when an No Yes The multiple patient receiver
alarm condition exists (Displays alarms from judges and the transmitter
and what parameters bedside monitors and generates the CALL alarm.
are alarming multiple patient receivers)
Silencing/suspending For a bedside monitor Temporarily silence current Not available at the multiple
alarms same function as the bedside alarms patient receiver
monitor
8000 series beds Pressing the alarm suspend
For a multiple patient temporarily suspend all key on the transmitter
receiver alarm functions suspends all alarm functions
temporarily silence current for 3 minutes.
alarms
Turning all alarm Not available Depends on the bedside Not available
functions On/Off monitor model
Alarm indication Sound, alarm indicator lamp Sound, blinking lamp, screen No indication
(when YL-960P Alarm indication, recording
Indicator is connected),
screen indication, recording

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Types
Unit on which the

Alarm type Cause
alarm occurs
Central monitor Technical alarm When problems occur on the central monitor or network.
When vital sign data of each parameter exceeds preset
Vital sign alarm
value of the upper or lower alarm limit.
When ST level exceeds preset value of the upper or lower
ST alarm
Monitored bed alarm limit.
Arrhythmia alarm When an arrhythmia is detected.
When problems occur on the monitored bed and its
Technical alarm
external instruments.
When problems occur on the currently selected overview
Overview bed Overview bed alarm
bed and its external instruments.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Level and Indication
Alarm Level
There are three alarm levels.
CRISIS: Patient is in critical condition and patient life may be at risk.

Immediate action must be taken. Electrodes or probe off, or
6
incorrect lead or other cable connections may also cause this
alarm.
WARNING: Patient is in critical condition. Prompt action should be taken.
Electrodes or probe off, or incorrect lead or other cable
connections may also cause this alarm.
ADVISORY: Electrodes, probe, cuff, lead and other cable connections
or settings on the monitor are not appropriate for accurate
measurement. Prompt action should be taken.
Alarm Indication
The central monitor can indicate alarms both visually and audibly:
• Alarm sound (see the table below)
• Alarm indicator: alarm indicator indicates three alarm level.
CRISIS: Red blinking, WARNING: Yellow blinking, ADVISORY: Cyan or
yellow lit
• Alarm message or highlighted numeric data on the screen
• Alarm recording starts
Alarm Alarm Frame of waveform Alarm display Alarm

Alarm sound*1
level indicator LED display area*2 on the screen recording
NK 1 (Continuous pip
sound), NK 2 (Continuous Highlighted red
CRISIS Blinking red Blinking red
ping sound) or IEC standard message
(ceg-gC) Automatically
starts when an
NK 1 (Continuous bing bong
Highlighted alarm occurs.
sound), NK 2 (Continuous Blinking or lighting
WARNING Blinking yellow yellow or orange (Recording
ding ding sound) or IEC yellow or orange*3
message On/Off can be
standard (ceg)
set for each
NK 1 and NK 2 (Single beep alarm.)
Highlighted
every 20 or 120 seconds*1) Lights in cyan
ADVISORY None cyan or yellow
or IEC standard (ec every 20 or yellow*1
message*1
seconds*1)
Message None Not lit None White message None
*1 The alarm sound, advisory alarm sound interval and advisory alarm color can
be changed on the Alarm window of the System Configuration window.
*2 Display on the All Beds Screen and the basic information area only.
*3 Blinks in orange when WARNING is the highest priority in all the alarm
generated on the monitored bed. Lits in orange in other alarms.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
When the following alarm and other alarm occur simultaneously, the message
displayed alternately: All alarm off, Alarm suspended, Battery, Arrhy Analy Off.
When two or more alarms on the same channel occur at the same time, the
message is displayed according to the priority.
When an arrhythmia alarm is generated, even if the patient recovers quickly from
the arrhythmia, the alarm status continues for a short time. The time depends on
the alarm level.
• CRISIS: 30 s
• WARNING: 20 s
• ADVISORY: 10 s

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarms on Each Screen
Alarms for Monitored Beds

Vital Signs Alarm/ST Alarm
The vital signs alarm/ST alarm occurs when a measured value exceeds the preset
upper/lower limit for the parameter. The measured value is highlighted. When an
alarm occurs for a parameter which is not displayed on the screen, the displayed 6
parameter changes to the alarmed parameter and is highlighted.
Display examples
With numeric display Without numeric display
The alarm message is displayed in the

The frame of waveform display is
The numeric data is highlighted color according to the alarm level. When
highlighted according to the alarm
The alarm message is displayed in several alarms occur simultaneously, only
level. (CRISIS and WARNING
the color according to the alarm the highest priority alarm is displayed.
only)
level.
Arrhythmia Alarm
The arrhythmia alarm occurs when an arrhythmia occurs. A highlighted
arrhythmia name in the color according to the level is displayed in the bed
display area. When several alarms occur simultaneously, only the highest priority
alarm is displayed.
NOTE
A message is not displayed when:
• Alarm functions are set to OFF on the bedside monitor.
• Alarm for the arrhythmia is set to OFF.
Display examples
All Beds screen
Highlighted arrhythmia name in
the color according to the level
The frame of waveform display is
highlighted according to the alarm
level. (CRISIS and WARNING
only)

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Individual Bed window Basic information area
Highlighted arrhythmia name in

the color according to the level
When several alarms occur

simultaneously, only the
highest priority alarm is
When the detection conditions for “FREQ displayed.
VPC” are satisfied, the VPC is highlighted.
Technical Alarm
When an alarm about instrumental abnormality occurs, a highlighted alarm
message in the color according to the level is displayed in the bed display area.
Display examples
All Beds screen

When several alarms occur simultaneously,
only the highest priority alarm is displayed.
The alarm message is highlighted in the
color according to the level.
When an alarm about an individual parameter occurs, the highlighted alarm

message in the color according to the level is displayed.
When an alarm occurs for a parameter which is not displayed on the screen, the
displayed parameter changes to the alarmed parameter and is highlighted.
Display examples
With numeric display Without numeric display
The highlighted alarm message in

the color according to the level is The alarm message is displayed
displayed at the measurement value. in the color according to the
level. When several alarms occur
simultaneously, only the highest
priority alarm is displayed.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarms for Overview Bed

Alarms for the currently displayed overview bed are displayed on the Overview
Bed screen. The alarm indication and alarm level is the same as for monitored
beds.
The overview bed alarm cannot be silenced by touching “Silence Alarms”. To

stop the overview bed alarm, touch “Stop monitoring” on the Overview Bed
Menu window.
6
When a screen other than the Overview Bed screen is displayed and an alarm
occurs in the currently selected overview bed, the alarm message is displayed in
red at the top of the screen.
Alarms for the Central Monitor and WS-960P Recorder Unit

Alarm messages for the central monitor and WS-960P Recorder Unit are
displayed at the top of the screen. Some messages also have sound.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Temporarily Silencing or Suspending Alarms
You can temporarily silence or suspend alarms by touching “Silence Alarms”.

Whether alarms are silenced or suspended depends on the bed type:
• For beds which are directly connected to the network, currently occurring
alarms are temporarily silenced.
• For 8000 series beds, all alarm functions for the bed are temporarily
suspended.
Temporarily Silencing Currently Occurring Alarms

NOTE
This function is only for the beds directly connected to the network.
At the central monitor, you can silence alarms occurring at all the monitored
beds which are directly connected to the network. When you silence alarms at
the central monitor, they are also silenced at the bedside monitor. Also, when
you silence alarms at the bedside monitor, they are also silenced at the central
monitor.
To silence the currently occurring alarms, touch “Silence Alarms”.
During alarm silence,

• The alarm silence mark and the remaining minutes are displayed in
the display area of the silenced beds. (For technical alarms, these are not
displayed.)
• The alarm sound is silenced
• The visual indication such as an alarm message remains.
Alarms resume when:

• For vital signs alarms, ST alarms and arrhythmia alarms, the cause of alarm
continues after the alarm silence ends.
• A different alarm occurs.
• The cause of alarm disappears during alarm silence, then the same alarm
occurs again.
Alarm Silence Time

Bedside monitor
Alarm silence time is the setting on the bedside monitor.
Bed through multiple patient receiver
Alarm silence time is set on the System Configuration window of the System
Setup screen on the central monitor.
When the Alarm Notice is Activated

When the alarm notice icon on the All Beds screen or the basic information area
is touched, alarms for the bed are silenced.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Temporarily Suspending All Alarms

NOTE
This function is only for the 8000 series beds.
For the 8000 series beds, refer to At the central monitor, you can temporarily suspend all alarm functions of all the
Section 1. 8000 series monitored beds. During alarm suspend, there is no alarm sound, no
alarm message display and no alarm recording.
6
To suspend all alarm functions of the 8000 series monitored beds, touch “Silence
Alarms”. During alarm suspend, the alarm suspend mark with the remaining
minutes indication and the “Alarm Suspended” message are displayed in the
display area of the suspended beds.
Alarm Suspend Time

Bedside monitor
Alarm suspend time is the setting on the bedside monitor.
When the Alarm Notice is Activated

When the alarm notice icon on the All Beds screen or the basic information area
is touched, alarms for the bed are suspended.
Suspending All Alarms at the Transmitter
WARNING
When alarm is suspended by pressing the SUSPEND ALARM key
on the transmitter, all alarms are turned off for that transmitter. Be
careful when you suspend the alarm.
By pressing the SUSPEND ALARM key on the transmitter, you can suspend all
alarms before occurrence. This is useful to prevent unnecessary alarms during
electrode replacement, treatments and so on.
When the SUSPEND ALARM key on the transmitter is pressed, all alarm
function for the patient is suspended for 3 minutes. The alarm suspend mark
is displayed in the display area of the patient on the All Beds screen, Individual
Bed window and basic information area of each screen.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Control Marks
Mark Description
When certain alarm functions are not available, an alarm control mark is
displayed on the display area for the patient.
Vital Sign Alarm Off Mark/Alarm Off Mark

This mark is displayed when both the upper and lower limits of the vital sign
alarms are set to OFF or all alarms are turned off on the bedside monitor.
Alarm Suspend Mark

This mark is displayed when all alarms are temporarily suspended. Remaining
minutes are indicated beside the mark.
Alarm Suspend Mark (From the Transmitter)

This mark is displayed when the SUSPEND ALARM key is pressed on the
transmitter. All alarm functions for the patient are suspended for 3 minutes.
Alarm Silence Mark

This mark is displayed when a currently occurring alarm is temporarily silenced.
Remaining minutes are indicated beside the bell.
Priority of Alarm Control Marks

If more than one alarm control condition exists at the same time, only the highest
priority mark is displayed.
The priority, from high to low is:
1. All alarm off mark
2. Alarm silence mark/Alarm suspend mark
3. Alarm silence mark from the transmitter

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Turning the Alarm Limits Off Mark Display On/Off

When both the upper and lower limits of a vital sign alarm are set to OFF, the
vital sign alarm off mark appears beside the parameter name.
On the System Configuration window of the System Setup screen, you can set
whether or not the vital sign alarm off mark is displayed.
NOTE
Some bedside monitor models allow you to set the conditions to display
the vital sign alarm off mark on the bedside monitor screen. The vital sign 6
alarm off mark is displayed on the central monitor depending on the setup
of the bedside monitor.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Recording
Alarm Recording Modes

NOTE
When all alarms are set to OFF on the bedside monitor, the alarm
recording for the bed is not performed.
Alarm recording is categorized into the following three modes.

• Vital sign alarm recording
• ST alarm recording
• Arrhythmia alarm recording
Each alarm recording automatically starts when the alarm occurs.
Overview of Alarm Recording

Recording Device
Optional WS-960P Recorder Unit.
Recording Waveforms
Waveforms displayed on the All Beds screen beginning nine seconds before the
alarm occurrence.
Recording Time
Select from 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 seconds. Set at “Alarm/Call Recording” on the
Recording window of the System Setup screen.
Recording Speed
Select 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s. Set “Recording Sweep Speed” at “Other” on the
Recording window of the Setup.
Recording Sensitivity
Necessary Settings for Alarm Recording

NOTE
Recording settings set on the central monitor affect the WS-960P
Recorder Unit. Recording settings set on the bedside monitor affect only
the built-in recorder of the bedside monitor.
There are two setting windows to turn alarm recording on or off. Changing
settings on one window changes the settings on the other window.
• ON/OFF key at “Recording” on the each alarm window.
• ON/OFF key for each alarm recording at “Alarm Recording” on the Recording
window of the Setup.
6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Limits Recording

• Set “Alarm Limits Recording” to “ON” on the Alarm Limits window of
the Personal Setup or set “Alarm Limits Recording” to “ON” at “Alarm
Recording” on the Recording window of the Setup.
The settings on both windows are synchronized. Changing one changes the
other.
• Set the upper and lower alarm limits of each parameter on the Alarm Limits
window.
6
Arrhythmia Alarm Recording
NOTE
When the following necessary settings for automatic alarm recording are
set, the arrhythmia alarm recording starts even when there is no alarm
indication on the central monitor.
• Set “Record” of each arrhythmia which needs recording to ON on the

Arrhythmia Alarm window of the Setup.
• Set “Arrhythmia Analysis” to ON on the ECG window of the Parameter Setup.
(Only for beds receiving transmitter data through a multiple patient receiver)
ST Alarm Recording
• Set “ST Alarm Recording” to “ON” on the ST Alarm window of the Personal
Setup or set “ST Alarm Recording” to “ON” at the Alarm Recording window
of the Recording window of the Setup. The settings on both windows are
synchronized. Changing one changes the other.
• Set the upper and lower alarm limits on the ST Alarm window.
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording

Starting Automatic Alarm Recording
When necessary settings for automatic alarm recording are set, the alarm
recording automatically starts when an alarm occurs.
NOTE
When the necessary settings for automatic alarm recording are set, the
arrhythmia alarm recording starts even in situations where there is no
alarm indication on the central monitor such as:
• All alarm function is set to OFF at the bedside monitor.
• An arrhythmia occurs whose alarm setting (“Alarm”) is set to OFF on
the Arrhythmia Alarm setting window.
Stopping Automatic Alarm Recording

Touch “REC” on the All Beds screen or basic information area.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting Alarms
CAUTION
When receiving bedside monitor data through the ZB-800P, ZB-900P
or ZS-900P transmitter, check the alarm, arrhythmia and monitoring
settings on the bedside monitor and central monitor. The alarm,
arrhythmia and monitoring setting information of the bedside monitor
is not transmitted.
NOTE
• Do not change alarm settings on the bedside monitor and the central
monitor simultaneously.
• For a bed monitored through RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient
Receiver, the alarm settings are saved even when the central monitor is
tuned off. In the following cases, the alarm settings become the Alarm
Master 1 settings:
- When the bed is discharged
- When you touch the “Delete Data” key on the Delete Data window of
the Admit/Discharge window
- When you delete all data of the bed when the receiving channel is
changed
The following alarms need to be set for each monitored bed.

• Vital sign alarm setting
• ST alarm setting
• Arrhythmia alarm setting
Setting Alarm Limits
CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you are going to set alarms for.
The Individual Bed window for the bed opens.
3. Touch “Alarm Limits” to display the Alarm Limits window.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
4. Set the necessary settings.

Current value Parameter selection key AUTO
Currently measured Touch to change that Touch to set the parameter
value is displayed. parameter. Keys of all the upper/lower limit automatically
Turning the alarm
available parameters for the based on the current measured
limits recording on
bed are displayed. value. (Auto Alarm Setting).
or off.
Currently set upper/lower limit
Upper limit
Current value is
displayed. Touch
this button to set the 6
upper limit.
Increase/Decrease
key
Touch to increase or
decrease the value
of the upper or
lower limit. To set to
OFF, keep touching
this key until the
setting changes to
OFF.
Current measurement value Current upper/lower limits are displayed Lower limit
in a bar. You can also change the limit by Current value is
directly touching the bar. displayed. Touch
this button to set the
lower limit.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Limits Range
Alarm Item Lower Limit*1 Upper Limit*1 Step Unit

ECG HR*2 15 to 299 16 to 300 1 beat/min
PR 30 to 299 31 to 300 1 count/min
Resp rate 0 to 148 2 to 150 2 count/min
RESP
APNEA –– 5 to 40 5 s
SpO2, SpO2-2 50 to 99 51 to 100*3 1 %
SpO2
Delta SpO2 –– 1 to 50*3 1 %
10 to 255 15 to 260 5 mmHg
NIBP (SYS/DIA/MAP)
1.0 to 34.5 1.5 to 35.0 0.5 kPa
ART, ART2, RAD, DORS,
IBP (SYS/DIA/ 0 to 298 2 to 300 2 mmHg
AO, FEM, P1 to 8, UA, PAP,
MEAN)
RVP, LVP 0.0 to 39.5 0.5 to 40.0 0.5 kPa
IBP (MAX/MIN/ UV, CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP, 0 to 298 2 to 300 2 mmHg
MEAN) ICP2 to 4
0.0 to 39.5 0.5 to 40.0 0.5 kPa
Tskin, Tskin2 to 3, Trect, 0.0 to 44.9 0.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
TEMP Tcore, Tnaso, Teso, Ttymp,
Tblad, Taxil, T1 to 8 32.2 to 112.8 32.4 to 113.0 0.2 °F
delta-T 0.0 to 44.9 0.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
delta-T
delta-T2 to 4 0.0 to 112.9 0.1 to 113.0 0.1 °F
0.0 to 44.9 15.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
Tb
59.0 to 112.8 59.2 to 113.0 0.2 °F
FiO2 18 to 99 19 to 100 1
O2 %
EtO2 10 to 99 11 to 100 1
1 to 5 1 mmHg
FiCO2 ––
0.1 to 0.7 0.1 kPa
CO2
1 to 98 2 to 99 1 mmHg
ETCO2
1.0 to 12.5 1.5 to 13.0 0.5 kPa
FiN2O 0 to 99 1 to 100 1
N2O %
EtN2O 0 to 99 1 to 100 1
FiHAL 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
HAL %
EtHAL 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
FiISO 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
ISO %
EtISO 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
FiENF 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
ENF %
EtENF 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
FiSEV 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
SEV %
EtSEV 0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 0.1
FiDES 0.0 to 19.9 0.1 to 20.0 0.1
DES %
EtDES 0.0 to 19.9 0.1 to 20.0 0.1
SvO2/SvO2 (CCO) 30 to 96 31 to 97 1 %
CCO 1.0 to 19.9 1.1 to 20.0 0.1 L/min
0.0 to 44.9 15.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
Tb (CCO)
59.0 to 112.8 59.2 to 113.0 0.2 °F
MV 0 to 29.9 0.1 to 30 0.1 L/min
Ppeak 0 to 99 1 to 100 2
cmH2O/hPa
PEEP 0 to 49 1 to 50 2
0 to 795 5 to 800 5 mmHg
tcPO2
0 to 109.5 0.5 to 110.0 0.5 kPa
0 to 195 5 to 200 5 mmHg
tcPCO2
0 to 29.5 0.5 to 30.0 0.5 kPa

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Item Lower Limit*1 Upper Limit*1 Step Unit

BIS 1 to 99 2 to 100 1 %
SEF1/SEF2 0.5 to 59.5 1.0 to 60.0 0.5 Hz
EEG
TP1/TP2 0.01 to 9.98 0.02 to 9.99 0.01 nW
SYS 40 to 235 45 to 240
DIA 20 to 175 25 to 180 5 mmHg
MEAN 30 to 195 35 to 200
CNIBP
SYS 5.0 to 31.5 5.5 to 32.0
DIA 2.5 to 23.5 3.0 to 24.0 0.5 kPa
MEAN 4.0 to 26.5 4.5 to 27.0 6
*1 For the setting range, “OFF” can also be set.

*2 When the alarms of EXT BRADY and EXT TACHY are set to ON, setting
of the heart rate alarm is available in the range of EXT BRADY and EXT
TACHY.
*3 Some bedside monitors cannot set the upper limits.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting Alarm Limits Automatically (Auto Alarm Setting)

You can set the upper and lower limits with the Auto Alarm Setting function. In
the Auto Alarm Setting function, the upper and lower limits are automatically
calculated based on the patient’s current vital values. The baseline value for the
upper and lower limit calculation is based on the parameter value at the moment
the Auto Alarm is set.
To set vital sign alarm upper/lower limits by the Auto Alarm Setting, touch
“AUTO”.
Following are the calculation formulas.
Alarm Item Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit

ECG (Heart rate) HR × 0.75 HR × 1.25 beat/min
PR PR × 0.75 PR × 1.25 count/min
RR (RR × 0.75) − 4 (RR × 1.25) + 4 count/min
RESP
APNEA — 60/RR × 2 s
SpO2, SpO2-2 SpO2 − 5, SpO2-2 − 5 SpO2 + 5, SpO2-2 + 5* %
SpO2
Delta SpO2 — 5 %
(NIBP × 0.75) − 10 (NIBP × 1.25) + 10 mmHg
NIBP SYS, DIA, MAP
(NIBP × 0.75) − 1.3 (NIBP × 1.25) + 1.3 kPa
(NIBP × 0.75) − 10 (NIBP × 1.25) + 10 mmHg
CNIBP SYS, DIA, MEAN
(NIBP × 0.75) − 1.3 (NIBP × 1.25) + 1.3 kPa
IBP (AO, ART, ART2, RAD, (IBP × 0.75) − 10 (IBP × 1.25) + 10 mmHg
FEM, DORS, PAP, RVP, LVP, SYS, DIA, MEAN
(IBP × 0.75) − 1.3 (IBP × 1.25) + 1.3 kPa
UA, UV, P1 to 8)
IBP (CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP, (IBP × 0.75) − 5 (IBP × 1.25) + 5 mmHg
MEAN
ICP2 to 4) (IBP × 0.75) − 0.7 (IBP × 1.25) + 0.7 kPa
TEMP (Tskin, Tskin2 to 3, Tcore, Trect, Teso, Ttymp, TEMP − 0.5 TEMP + 0.5 °C
Tblad, Taxil, Tnaso, T1 to 8) TEMP − 0.9 TEMP + 0.9 °F
delta T − 0.5 delta T + 0.5 °C
delta-T (delta-T, delta-T2 to 4)
delta T − 0.9 delta T + 0.9 °F
Tb − 0.5 Tb + 0.5 °C
Tb
Tb − 0.9 Tb + 0.9 °F
FiO2 FiO2 × 0.9 FiO2 × 1.1
O2 %
EtO2 EtO2 × 0.75 EtO2 × 1.25
FiCO2 × 1.25 mmHg
FiCO2 —
FiCO2 × 1.25 kPa
CO2
ETCO2 × 0.75 ETCO2 × 1.25 mmHg
ETCO2
ETCO2 × 0.75 ETCO2 × 1.25 kPa
FiN2O (FiN2O × 0.8) − 5 (FiN2O × 1.2) + 5
N2O %
EtN2O (EtN2O × 0.8) − 5 (EtN2O × 1.2) + 5
FiHAL (FiHAL × 0.9) − 0.5 (FiHAL × 1.1) + 0.5
HAL %
EtHAL (EtHAL × 0.9) − 0.5 (EtHAL × 1.1) + 0.5
FiISO (FiISO × 0.9) − 0.5 (FiISO × 1.1) + 0.5
ISO %
EtISO (EtISO × 0.9) − 0.5 (EtISO × 1.1) + 0.5
FiENF (FiENF × 0.9) − 0.5 (FiENF × 1.1) + 0.5
ENF %
EtENF (EtENF × 0.9) − 0.5 (EtENF × 1.1) + 0.5
FiSEV (FiSEV × 0.9) − 0.5 (FiSEV × 1.1) + 0.5
SEV %
EtSEV (EtSEV × 0.9) − 0.5 (EtSEV × 1.1) + 0.5
FiDES (FiDES × 0.8) − 0.5 (FiDES × 1.2) + 0.5
DES %
EtDES (EtDES × 0.8) − 0.5 (EtDES × 1.2) + 0.5

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Item Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit

SvO2 SvO2 − 5 SvO2 + 5 %
CCO CCO × 0.75 CCO × 1.25 L/min
Tb − 0.5 Tb + 0.5 °C
Tb (CCO)
Tb − 0.9 Tb + 0.9 °F
MV MV × 0.75 MV × 1.25 L/min
Ppeak Ppeak × 0.75 Ppeak × 1.25
cmH2O/hPa
PEEP PEEP × 0.75 PEEP × 1.25
mmHg
tcPO2 tcPO2 × 0.75 tcPO2 × 1.25
kPa 6
mmHg
tcPCO2 tcPCO2 × 0.75 tcPCO2 × 1.25
kPa
BIS 40 — %
SEF1/SEF2 SEF × 0.75 − 2.0 SEF × 1.25 + 2.0 Hz
EEG
TP1/TP2 TP × 0.75 − 0.20 TP × 1.25 + 0.20 nW
* Some bedside monitors cannot set the upper limits.
NOTE
The setting range depends on the bedside monitor. The central monitor
setting might not be applied to the bedside monitor. For the setting range
of the bedside monitor, refer to the bedside monitor operator’s manual.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm
WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set Arrhythmia Analysis on the ECG
window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for
arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
CAUTION
When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or mark to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
Set the following settings for the arrhythmia alarm.

• Alarm detection condition
• Alarm ON/OFF
• Creating the arrhythmia recall files ON/OFF
• Arrhythmia recording ON/OFF
3. Touch “Arrhythmia Alarm” to display the Arrhythmia Alarm window.

6. ALARM FUNCTION

Set the settings for each arrhythmia.
Every touching toggles ON and OFF.
Alarm: Alarm availability
When turning an alarm of crisis level to OFF, a confirming Recall: Arrhythmia recall file creation
message window appears. Record: Arrhythmia recording
The blank box

indicates that
the item is not 6
available with
the bedside
monitor.
Alarm detection condition Alarm detection Current value Increase/Decrease

Touch to display the setting box for condition key
the alarm detection condition. Touch to increase or
decrease the value.
Initialization of Arrhythmia Recording

The arrhythmia recording is initialized to the setting on “Alarm Master 1” when
you set up the monitored bed.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Limits Range
Detection Condition
Item
Setting Range Dependence Step Unit
ASYSTOLE OFF, 3 to 10 — 1 s
V. FIB OFF, --- —
OFF, 16 to 300* V BRADY < V TACHY = VPC RUN beats/min
V. TACHY
3 to 9* VPC RUN ≤ V TACHY beats
EXT TACHY OFF, 16 to 300 TACHY ≤ EXT TACHY
EXT BRADY OFF, 15 to 299 EXT BRADY ≤ BRADY beats/min
OFF, 16 to 300* V BRADY < VPC RUN = V TACHY
VPC RUN ≤ V TACHY
VPC RUN (Applied when a bedside monitor which
3 to 8 beats
arrhythmia type is set to “EXTENDED”
is connected.)
V BRADY OFF, 15 to 299* V BRADY < V TACHY = VPC RUN 1 beats/min
OFF, 16 to 300*
SV TACHY —
3 to 9* beats
OFF (Available when
BRADY < TACHY ≤ EXT TACHY*
the alarm setting of EXT
TACHYCARDIA (* Applied when the alarm setting of EXT
TACHY is set to OFF),
TACHY is set to ON.)
16 to 300
beats/min
OFF (Available when
EXT BRADY* ≤ BRADY < TACHY
the alarm setting of EXT
BRADYCARDIA (* Applied when the alarm setting of EXT
BRADY is set to OFF),
BRADY is set to ON.)
15 to 299
PAUSE OFF, 1.0 to 3.0* — 0.1 s
COUPLET
EARLY VPC OFF, ---
MULTIFORM
— —
V RHYTHM OFF, ---*
BIGEMINY OFF, ---
TRIGEMINY OFF, ---*
FREQ VPC OFF, 1 to 99 — 1 beats/min
VPC ---
IRREGULAR RR OFF, ---*
— —
PROLONGED RR OFF, ---
NO PACER PULSE OFF, ---*
PACER NON-
OFF, 40 to 480* 4 ms
CAPTURE
* For these items, alarm detection condition can be set when arrhythmia type for bedside monitor is set to “EXTENDED”.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting the ST Alarm

3. Touch “ST Alarm” to display the ST Alarm window.

6
Current value Lead selection key AUTO

Currently measured Touch to change the lead. Leads Touch to
value is displayed. displayed here depend on the bed’s automatically set the
Turning the ST measurement environment. upper/lower limit
alarm recording Currently set of the lead based on
on or off. upper/lower limit the current measured
value (Auto Alarm
Setting).
Upper limit
Current value is
displayed. Touch
this button to set the
upper limit.
Increase/Decrease
key
Touch to increase or
decrease the value of
the upper or lower
limit.
Lower limit
AUTO Current Current upper/lower limits are Current value is
Touch to automatically set the measurement value displayed in the bar. Touch the displayed. Touch
upper/lower limit of all the bar to set the value of the upper this button to set the
measurable leads for the bed. or lower limit. lower limit.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Limits Range
Setting range
Item Step Unit
Lower limit Upper limit
ST −2.00 to +1.99 −1.99 to +2.00 0.01 mV
Setting ST Alarms with Auto Alarm Setting Functions

You can set upper and lower limits with the Auto Alarm Setting function. In
the Auto Alarm Setting function, the upper and lower limits are automatically
calculated based on the patient’s current ST values. The baseline value for the
upper and lower limit calculation is based on the parameter value at the moment
the Auto Alarm is set.
To set ST alarm upper/lower limits of the setting lead for the bed by Auto Alarm
Setting, touch “AUTO”.
To set ST alarm upper/lower limits of the all leads for the bed by Auto Alarm
Setting, touch “AUTO”.
Following are the calculation formulas.
Item Lower limit Upper limit Unit

ST ST − 0.5 ST + 0.5 mV

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting All Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)

For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together to
one group of preset settings. This is called an alarm master. This is useful, for
example, if there are typical alarm settings at your hospital, or you have certain
alarm settings for certain patients. You can change individual alarm settings after
setting all alarms with an alarm master. You can set three alarm masters and save
them in the central monitor. To change the settings of the alarm masters, refer to
“Setting Alarm Master” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
6
3. Touch “Alarm Master Display” to display the Alarm Master window.
4. Touch “Alarm Master 1”, “Alarm Master 2” or “Alarm Master 3” to select

the alarm master you want to apply.
5. Touch “Alarm Limits”, “Arrhythmia Alarm” or “ST Alarm” to select which

alarm settings in the alarm master you want to display.
6. Confirm that the selected alarm settings of the selected alarm master are
displayed on the screen. Touch “Apply”. The confirmation message window
appears.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
7. Touch “Yes”. The alarm master settings displayed on the screen are applied
as the alarm settings.
8. Change individual alarm settings on each alarm window if necessary.
When a patient is monitored through a multiple patient receiver, the applied

alarm master is displayed on the right of the bed name and patient name area.
The displayed master is updated when a patient is admitted, the receiving
channel number is changed or an alarm master is applied.
Setting the LEAD OFF and NOISE Alarm

For details, refer to “Setting Other Settings” of “ECG Settings” in Section 13.
Setting the COMMUNICATION LOSS Alarm

Set the COMMUNICATION LOSS alarm ON or OFF.
Setting Alarm on Multi Patient Limits Window

You can set all patients alarm settings on one window. For details, refer to
Section 8-2 “Multi Patient Limits Window”.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume
Adjust the alarm sound volume at the Sound Control window on the System
Setup screen. There are seven volume levels.
NOTE
• Depending on the environment where the central monitor is used, set
the alarm volume appropriately. 6
• You cannot set the alarm sound volume to off.
• You cannot set the alarm sound volume to the value lower than the
volume set at “Alarm Volume Limit” on the Alarm window of the System
Configuration window.
2. Touch ”Sound Control” to display the Sound Control window.
3. Touch the or key in “Alarm Volume” to adjust the volume. Every time
you change the volume, there is a sound at the selected volume. You can also
change the volume by directly touching the bar.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Notice and Arrhythmia Notice
The central monitor has two types of notice function. Only one type can be
activated at a time.
Alarm notice: An alarm notice icon appears on the All Beds screen and
basic information area of the bed when an alarm history file
is created.
Arrhythmia notice: An arrhythmia notice icon appears on the All Beds screen
and basic information area of the bed when an arrhythmia
recall file is created.
NOTE
• To activate the alarm notice or arrhythmia notice function, you need to
set the notice mode at Alarm/Arrhythmia Notice Icon on the System
Configuration - Alarm window of the System Setup screen. Alarm is the
factory default setting.
• The alarm notice and arrhythmia notice function are only available for
beds whose data is saved in this central monitor.
• When you use the alarm notice or arrhythmia notice function and there
are two or more central monitors in the network, confirm that all central
monitors in the network have the same settings for Alarm/Arrhythmia
Notice Icon on the System Configuration - Alarm window of the System
Setup screen. If some central monitor activates the alarm notice or
arrhythmia notice function and others do not, you might misjudge
that there was no alarm for a bed by observing the bed at the central
monitor where the notice function is not activated.
Alarm Notice
The alarm notice icon can be displayed on the All Beds screen and basic
information area of the bed when an alarm history file is created. You need to set
the alarm levels for displaying alarm notice icon at “Alarm Notice Level” on the
System Configuration - Alarm window of the System Setup screen.
You can display the Alarm History screen by touching the notice icon. Alarms
for the bed are silenced/suspended when the alarm notice icon is touched. For
details, refer to “Temporarily Silencing or Suspending Alarms” in Section 6.
NOTE
The maximum number of alarm history file is 5000 for each bed and the
oldest file is automatically deleted to create a new file. When the alarm
history file with a notice icon was deleted before you touch the icon on
the All Beds screen or basic information area, the icon remains on the
All Beds screen and the basic information area. When you touch the icon
and the Alarm History window is displayed, the “No Data” message is
displayed on the screen.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm notice icon

This icon disappears after you touch this icon to
display the Alarm History window. When the Alarm
History window is displayed by other procedure, the
icon does not disappear. The icon also disappears
when the bed is discharged or when monitoring is
paused or when the bed’s data is deleted.
When the alarm 6

notice icon is touched,
alarms only for the
bed are silenced/
suspended.
Touch to sort the files

by the presence of an
alarm notice icon.
Alarm history
The cursor is on the
newest file among
alarm history files
with the alarm notice
icon.
Alarm notice mark

• The mark appears beside the alarm history file when the alarm level is higher than the setting at “Alarm Notice
Level” on the System Configuration-Alarm window of the System Setup screen and the file is created after the
Alarm History window was last displayed. The mark does not disappear when you change the screen to other
review windows of the same bed but disappears when the screen is changed to others.
• The mark only appears when the Alarm History window is displayed by touching the alarm notice icon on the All
Beds screen or basic information area.
• The mark disappears when the bed is discharged or monitoring is paused or when the bed’s data is deleted.
Arrhythmia Notice
The arrhythmia notice icon can be displayed on the All Beds screen and basic
information area of the bed when an arrhythmia recall file is created. You need to
select the arrhythmia types for which the arrhythmia notice icon is displayed at
“Arrhythmia Notice Events” on the System Configuration - Alarm window of the
You can display the Arrhythmia Recall window by touching the arrhythmia
notice icon.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
NOTE
The arrhythmia notice icon is displayed when the arrhythmia recall file
is created, not when the arrhythmia occurs. To display the arrhythmia
notice icon, you must set “Recall” to ON for the arrhythmia type on the
Arrhythmia Alarm window. Otherwise the arrhythmia notice icon is not
displayed even when the arrhythmia is selected at “Arrhythmia Notice
Events” on the System Configuration window.
Arrhythmia notice icon

This icon disappears after you touch this icon to
display the Arrhythmia Recall window. When
the Arrhythmia Recall window is displayed by
other procedure, the icon does not disappear. The
icon also disappears when the bed is discharged
or monitoring is paused or when the bed’s data is
deleted.
Touch to sort the files

by the presence of an
arrhythmia notice icon.
Recall file list

The cursor is on the
newest file with the
arrhythmia notice icon.
Arrhythmia notice mark

• The mark appears beside the recall file when the arrhythmia is set to ON at “Arrhythmia Notice Events” on the
System Configuration-Alarm window of the System Setup screen and the file is created after the Arrhythmia
Recall window was last displayed. The mark does not disappear when you change the screen to other review
windows of the same bed but disappears when the screen is changed to another screen.
• The mark only appears when the Arrhythmia Recall window is displayed by touching the arrhythmia notice icon
on the All Beds screen or basic information area.
• The mark disappears when the bed is discharged or when monitoring is paused or when the bed’s data is deleted.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Arrhythmia notice mark

• The mark appears beside the recall file when the arrhythmia is set to ON at “Arrhythmia Notice Events” on the
System Configuration-Alarm window of the System Setup screen and the file is created after the Arrhythmia
Recall window was last displayed. The mark does not disappear when you change the screen to other review
windows of the same bed but disappears when the screen is changed to another screen.
• The mark only appears when the Arrhythmia Recall window is displayed by touching the arrhythmia notice icon
on the All Beds screen or basic information area.
• The mark disappears when the bed is discharged or when monitoring is paused or when the bed’s data is deleted.
NOTE
• When there is only one recall file with an arrhythmia notice icon, you
can directly open the expanded waveform window by touching the
arrhythmia notice icon on the All Beds screen or basic information area.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
• The maximum number of arrhythmia recall file is 768 for each bed.
The oldest file is automatically deleted to create a new file. When the
arrhythmia recall file with a notice icon was deleted before you touch
the icon on the All Beds screen or basic information area, the icon
remains on the All Beds screen and the basic information area. When
you touch the icon and the Arrhythmia Recall window is displayed, the
“No Data” message is displayed on the screen.
• When the newest arrhythmia recall file with arrhythmia notice icon is
deleted manually and the Arrhythmia Recall window is displayed by
touching the icon, the cursor is at the previous file of the deleted file.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
Technical Icon
ECG or SpO2 technical icons can be displayed on the All Beds screen when
the ECG or SpO2 technical status become yellow or red on the Alarm Events
window.
When a technical icon is touched, the Alarm Events window and action message
for the icon are displayed.
The technical icon disappears when the technical status becomes green or Yes is
touched for the action message.
NOTE
• To display the technical icons, Technical Icon on the Display Setting of
the Monitor Setting in the System Setup screen must be set to “On”.
The default setting is “Off.” Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
• The technical icon can only be displayed on the bed which data is
saved in the central monitor.
• When the central monitor is connected to a central monitor network, set
the technical icon to On on all central monitors. Otherwise, the technical
icon is not displayed on the central monitor on which the technical icon
is set to off and the patient condition may be misjudged.
ECG technical icon
ECG technical icon

When the icon is touched, the action
When Yes is touched, the technical icon and action message disappear. When No is
touched, the message disappears but the icon is displayed continuously.

6. ALARM FUNCTION
SpO2 technical icon
SpO2 technical icon

When the icon is touched, the action
When Yes is touched, the technical icon and action message disappear. When No is
touched, the message disappears but the icon is displayed continuously.
When the ECG and SpO2 measurement conditions become yellow or red at the
same time, only the ECG technical icon is displayed. When the icon is touched,
both ECG and SpO2 action messages are displayed.

Section 7 All Beds Screen
Overview............................................................................................................................................................... 7.2
Displaying the All Beds Screen.................................................................................................................. 7.2
Screen Description..................................................................................................................................... 7.3
16 beds (One waveform).................................................................................................................. 7.3
12 beds (Up to two waveforms)........................................................................................................ 7.4 7
8 beds (One waveform).................................................................................................................... 7.4
8 beds (Up to three waveforms)....................................................................................................... 7.5
6 beds (Up to two waveforms).......................................................................................................... 7.5
6 beds (Up to four waveforms)......................................................................................................... 7.6
4 beds (Up to three waveforms)....................................................................................................... 7.6
4 beds (Up to six waveforms)........................................................................................................... 7.7
Freezing Waveforms................................................................................................................................... 7.7
Temporarily Silencing/Suspending Alarms................................................................................................. 7.7
Changing the All Beds Screen Display Setting..................................................................................................... 7.8
Setting Individually for Each Bed................................................................................................................ 7.8
Setting the Sensitivity and Scale of the Displayed Waveform.......................................................... 7.8
Selecting the Displayed Waveform on the All Beds Screen............................................................. 7.9
Selecting the Parameters of the Displayed Measurement Data..................................................... 7.11
Setting the Bed Color..................................................................................................................... 7.12
Selecting the Heart Rate Display................................................................................................... 7.13
Selecting the Pulse Rate Display................................................................................................... 7.14
Selecting the Source Pulse Rate................................................................................................... 7.15
Setting for All Beds on the System Configuration Window of the System Setup Screen......................... 7.15
Setting for All Beds on the Monitor Setting Window of the System Setup Screen................................... 7.15
Setting Parameter Priority.................................................................................................................................. 7.16
Recordings on the All Beds Screen.................................................................................................................... 7.17
All Beds Manual Recording...................................................................................................................... 7.17
Necessary Settings for All Beds Recording................................................................................... 7.17

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Overview
On the All Beds screen, you can view waveforms and numeric data of all
monitored beds at the same time.
A single central monitor can continuously monitor up to 8 beds. Install the QP-
962P 16 Patient Expansion Program Kit to monitor 12 or 16 beds.
NOTE
Sometimes numeric data and messages disappear for a moment. This is
normal and occurs when the display is refreshed.
Displaying the All Beds Screen

The All Beds screen is the basic screen for all the other screens. All the other
screens have an “All Beds” key at the bottom right. Touch “All Beds” to display
NOTE
When a screen other than the All Beds screen is displayed and there is
no key operation for a certain period, the screen automatically returns to
the All Beds screen. You can set the period at “Screen Timeout” on the
System Configuration window of the System Setup screen. The factory
default setting is set to 5 minutes.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Screen Description
You can choose the number of beds to be displayed from 16 beds (one waveform
per bed), 12 beds (two waveforms per bed), 8 beds (one or three waveforms per
bed), 6 beds (two or four waveforms per bed) and 4 beds (three or six waveforms
per bed). For each bed, you can select the parameter of the displayed waveform
and its sensitivity and scale, the numeric data to be displayed and the bed color.
16 beds (One waveform)
Data area for each bed

When you touch inside the frame, the Individual
QRS mark Bed window for the touched bed opens. The Silence Alarms key 7
selected bed is filled in with the transparent color. Refer to Section 6.
Bed color
Bed name Message area Transmitter channel Patient name Date and time
Waveform label/sensitivity SETUP key

Numeric data Press to open the All-Beds Screen
The number of numeric data that can be displayed on Waveform Setup window.
the screen depends on the Display setting. When a vital
sign alarm occurs, the numeric data is highlighted. Touch to start the All beds recording.
When an alarm occurs for a parameter which is not
displayed on the screen, the displayed parameter Touch to record the patient waveform and
changes to the alarmed parameter and highlighted. numeric data displayed on the screen.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
12 beds (Up to two waveforms)
Scale
8 beds (One waveform)

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
8 beds (Up to three waveforms)
6 beds (Up to two waveforms)

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
6 beds (Up to four waveforms)
4 beds (Up to three waveforms)

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
4 beds (Up to six waveforms)
Freezing Waveforms
NOTE
• You need to assign the waveform freezing function to a function key in
advance.
• Numeric data are not frozen. Numeric data are always updated.
Touch “Freeze” to freeze all waveforms of all beds. The clock time when the
freezing started is displayed below the date on the top of the screen.
During freezing, “Freeze” changes to “Unfreeze”.
To unfreeze, touch “Unfreeze” or change to another screen.
Temporarily Silencing/Suspending Alarms

Refer to Section 6.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Changing the All Beds Screen Display Setting
Set the following settings for the All Beds screen display.
For each bed:
• Set sensitivity and scale of the displayed waveforms.
• Select the displayed waveforms.
• Select the parameter of the displayed numeric data.
• Select the bed color.
• Select the display type for ECG numeric data.
Monitor Setting window of the System Setup screen:

• Monitored Beds Setting
• Display Setting
System Configuration window of the System Setup screen:

• Select the size of patient name (large/normal).
Setting Individually for Each Bed

Following settings are set individually for each bed.
• Set sensitivity and scale of the displayed waveform.
• Select the displayed waveforms.
• Select the parameter of the displayed numeric data.
• Select the bed color.
• Select the display type for ECG numeric data.
Setting the Sensitivity and Scale of the Displayed Waveform
This setting coincides with the setting on the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup of the
Individual Bed screen.
1. On the All Beds screen, touch “SETUP” of the bed you want to change
settings for. The setting window for the bed is displayed.
To change the All Beds Screen Patient Key, Refer to “Setting Display
Setting” in Section 7-1 of Administrator’s Guide.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
2. Touch “Sensitivity”.
3. Set the sensitivity and scale for each displayed waveform. The left window
shows the display on the All Beds screen.
Selecting the Displayed Waveform on the All Beds Screen
Select the waveform to be displayed on the All beds screen.
2. Touch “Wave Selection”.
3. Touch “Manual” or “Auto”.

• Auto: The waveform to be displayed on the All Beds screen is
You can customize parameter priority. automatically selected from the currently measured parameters
Refer to “Setting Parameter Priority” based on the parameter priority and is changed according to the
in this section.
measurement situation. The number of waveforms to be displayed
on the All Beds screen depends on the number of displayed beds.
4/6/8/12 beds: one waveform or two waveforms
16 beds: one waveform
NOTE
• If Auto (2 waves) or Auto (3 waves) is selected and only one waveform
is being measured, Auto (1 wave) is automatically selected instead.
• For a bed connected through the RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient
Receiver with auto lead change function, when Wave Selection is set to
Auto, the display lead of ECG waveform is the same as the setting for
arrhythmia analysis lead. For details, refer to “Setting the Analysis Lead”
of “ECG Settings” in Section 13.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
You can preview the display When displayed beds is 16, Auto (2 waves)
on the All Beds screen here. and Auto (3 waves) do not appear.
When Auto (2 waves) or Auto (3 waves)

is selected, select the number of ECG
waveform traces.
• Manual: The waveforms of the parameters you select here are displayed on
i) Touch the key for the waveform position you want to set. The
key position corresponds to the display position on the screen.
ii) Touch the parameter on the right. You can choose the parameter
from the currently measured parameters or parameters selected
on the Parameter window of the System Setup screen.
You can preview the display
on the All Beds screen here.
i) NONE
ii) No waveform for the
selected position.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Selecting the Parameters of the Displayed Measurement Data
Selecting the parameters of the measurement data to be displayed on the All

Beds screen.
• Auto: The automatically selected parameter of the measurement data is

displayed on the All Beds screen. Automatic selection is based on
the parameter priority and changes according to the situation.
• Manual: The manually selected parameter of the measurement data is
displayed on the All Beds screen.
The first parameter is displayed in large size and the other parameters are 7
displayed in the remaining area in equal size.
However, when you select the S/D/M display format of blood pressure
measurement values (refer to Section 13), it is displayed as large as possible.
You can select whether VPC and ST value are displayed together with HR
when HR is the first display parameter. Refer to “Selecting the Display for ECG
Numeric Data”.
2. Touch “Numerical Selection”.
3. Set whether the parameter of the waveform is to be selected manually or

automatically.
• Auto: The displayed parameter(s) are automatically selected from the
currently measured parameters according to the parameter priority.
Select 2, 3, 6, or 8 for the maximum number of parameters to be
displayed.
NOTE
If the number of measured parameters is less than the selected maximum
number of parameters, the number of displayed parameters decreases
automatically. The measurement value may not follow the parameter
priority when displaying S/D/M format blood pressure measurement
values.
• Manual: Set the parameter display order. Touch the key of the parameter
to display the waveform. You can choose the parameter(s) to be
displayed on the All Beds screen from the currently measured
parameter(s) or from the parameter(s) selected on the Parameters
window of the System Setup screen. On the left window, you can
confirm the display on the All Beds screen.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
NOTE
Whey you select the S/D/M display format of the blood pressure
measurement values, the blood pressure measurement value is displayed
widely. Therefore, some selected parameters may not be displayed.
Setting the Bed Color
You can choose the background color of the bed name and telemetry channel on
the All Beds screen and basic information area.
2. Touch “Bed Color” to display the Bed Color window.
3. Touch the desired color. On the left window, you can confirm the display on

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
You can select from five group colors when the “Changing Bed Color Also
Changes Bed Group” is set to “ON” on the System Configuration window of
the System Setup screen.
The bed color is

changed to a new
color.
You can select from eight colors when the “Changing Bed Color Also
Changes Bed Group” is set to “OFF” on the System Configuration window
Selecting the Heart Rate Display
When HR is selected as the first display parameter on the All Beds screen, you
can select whether VPC count and ST value are displayed together with the heart
rate.
2. Touch “Display Setting”.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
3. Select the display type. The left window shows the display on the All Beds
screen.
HR: HR only
HR+VPC+ST: VPC count and ST value are displayed together with the
heart rate.
Selecting the Pulse Rate Display
Select the pulse rate display on or off.
NOTE
When “Manual” is selected for the Numerical Selection, the parameter
is a selected parameter. Depending on the selected parameter, the PR
Display setting is not used.
3. Select the pulse rate display on or off.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Selecting the Source Pulse Rate
Select the source pulse rate.

7
3. Select the source pulse rate.
PRESS: Displays the PRESS pulse rate.
SpO2: Displays the SpO2 pulse rate.
NOTE
• The PR Source can be selected when monitoring through RU-960P/
ORG-9100 multiple patient receiver with correspond version.
• The PR Source is displayed when “ON” is selected for the PR Display
or “Manual” is selected for the Numerical Selection.
• When the PRESS or SpO2 is monitored, the pulse rate display changes
to the monitored parameter.
Setting for All Beds on the System Configuration Window of the System Setup Screen
You can select the size of the patient’s name display on the All Beds screen.
Refer to Section 7-1 “Changing the System Setup Screen Settings for
Administrator” of the Administrator’s Guide.
Setting for All Beds on the Monitor Setting Window of the System Setup Screen
The Monitor Setting window of the System Setup screen has settings that affect
all beds. Refer to Section 7-1 “Changing the System Setup Screen Settings for
Administrator” of the Administrator’s Guide.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Setting Parameter Priority
Parameters are displayed on All Beds screen according to priority. Refer to

Section 18 “Reference” for the factory default settings of parameter priority.
1. On the All Beds screen, touch the basic information area of the bed you want
to change settings for.
3. Touch “Parameter Priority” to display the Parameter Priority window.
4. Touch a key on the left in “Priority” to select the position you want to insert
the parameter and touch the key on the right to select a parameter.
When you lower the priority of the parameter, it is inserted below the selected
position. When raising the priority of the parameter, it is inserted above the
selected parameter.
Displays other
parameters.
Resets to the factory default settings.

7. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Recordings on the All Beds Screen
On the All Beds screen, the following recordings are available with the WS-960P
Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11.
Manual recording: Single bed recording, All beds recording, Dual waveform
recording
Automatic recording: Periodic recording, Alarm recording
Remote recording: Call recording, Remote delayed recording
7
All Beds Manual Recording
All beds recording records waveforms and numeric data of all the monitored
beds on the All Beds screen with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
To start recording, touch the “Record All” key. The recording stops when the
recording of all beds is finished. To cancel recording, touch “REC Stop”.
Necessary Settings for All Beds Recording
Set “Recording Sweep Speed” at “Other” on the Recording window of the Setup.
Refer to Section 11 for detail.
Select the real time recording or delayed recording at the Recording window of
the System Setup screen. Refer to Section 11.

Section 8 Multi Patient Alarms
Windows
Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 8.0.2
Displaying a Multi Patient Alarms Window.............................................................................................. 8.0.2
Setting a Bed Group.......................................................................................................................................... 8.0.2
Assigning Beds to a Group...................................................................................................................... 8.0.2
Editing Group Names.............................................................................................................................. 8.0.4
Section 8-1 Multi Patient Alarm Events Window................................................................................................ 8.1.1
8
Section 8-2 Multi Patient Limits Window............................................................................................................ 8.2.1
8-1
8-2
Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 8.0.1

8. MULTI PATIENT ALARMS WINDOWS
Overview
There are two types of Multi Patient Alarms windows. The Multi Patient Alarm
Events window displays alarm events of up to eight patients on one window. The
Multi Patient Limits window displays the alarm limits of up to eight patients on
one window and the vital sign alarm limits can be set.
Displaying a Multi Patient Alarms Window

2. Touch “Multi Pat. Alarm Events” or “Multi Pat. Limits” to display one of the
Multi Patient Alarms windows.
Setting a Bed Group
NOTE
The settings on the Multi Patient Alarm Events window and Multi Patient
Limits window are synchronized. Changing one changes the other.
On the Multi Patient Alarms window, you can display eight patients on one
window (Patient 1 to 8 or Patient 9 to 16). You can also assign patients to one or
more groups (group A to E). The group name can be edited.
Assigning Beds to a Group

1. On the Multi Patient Alarm Events window or Multi Patient Limits window,
touch “Group Assignment”. The setting window opens.
2. In the row for the bed you want to change, touch the key in the column for
the desired group. The bed is assigned to the new group.
The displayed window depends on the “Changing Bed Color Also Changes
Bed Group” setting on the System Configuration window.
8.0.2 Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

When “Changing Bed Color Also Changes Bed Group” is set to ON on

the System Configuration window of the System Setup screen
One bed can be assigned to the one group. The bed color changes to the group
color.
8-1
8-2
When “Changing Bed Color Also Changes Bed Group” is set to OFF on
the System Configuration window of the System Setup screen
One bed can be assigned to the several groups. The bed color does not change if
the group changes.

Editing Group Names

There are five groups. You can edit the group name. The name can be up to 16
alphanumeric characters.
1. On the Multi Patient Alarm Events window or Multi Patient Limits window,
touch “Group Name”. The setting window opens.
2. Touch the key for the group you want to change the name for and enter a
name from the keyboard on the window.
3. Touch “ENTER” to save the setting.

Section 8-1 Multi Patient Alarm
Events Window
Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 8.1.2
Displaying the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window................................................................................. 8.1.2
From the Multi Patient Limits Window........................................................................................... 8.1.2
Window Description................................................................................................................................. 8.1.3
Display Type: Alarm Limit........................................................................................................................ 8.1.3
Display Type: Arrhythmia......................................................................................................................... 8.1.4
8
Display Type: Technical............................................................................................................................ 8.1.5
Viewing the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window............................................................................................... 8.1.6 8-1
Changing the Displayed Alarm Type....................................................................................................... 8.1.6
Zooming In and Out on Alarm Events..................................................................................................... 8.1.6
Displaying the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window for a Group of Beds................................................. 8.1.7
Displaying the Individual Alarm Events Window for One Bed................................................................. 8.1.7
Assigning Beds to a Group...................................................................................................................... 8.1.8
Recordings on the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window..................................................................................... 8.1.8
Multi Patient Alarm Events Printing......................................................................................................... 8.1.8
Other Recordings.................................................................................................................................... 8.1.8

Overview
The Multi Patient Alarm Events window displays up to 72 hours of alarm events
for up to eight patients on one window. The most recent 5000 files for each
bed are saved as an alarm history. Limits, arrhythmia and technical alarms are
included.
NOTE
• The Multi Patient Alarm Events window is only available at the central
monitor where the bed’s data is saved.
• After 5000 files are created for the patient, the oldest file of the patient
is automatically deleted to create a new file.
Displaying the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window

2. Touch “Multi Pat. Alarm Event” to display the Multi Patient Alarm Events
window.
From the Multi Patient Limits Window

Touch “Multi Pat. Alarm Event” to display the Multi Pat. Alarm Events window.

8-1. MULTI PATIENT ALARM EVENTS WINDOW
Window Description
Alarm events of up to eight patients are displayed on one window. Each alarm
event is displayed in the color corresponding to its alarm level.
You can display 1, 8, 24 or 72 hours of alarm events.
Display Type: Alarm Limit

Tabs
Touch a desired tab to change Alarm Types Keys Opens the Multi Patient
the patient group. Selects the displayed alarm types. Limits window.
8-1
Technical Status Time bar Print Zoom in/Zoom out

Lights green, yellow or red The judged time is in Prints the displayed multi Show a longer or
according to the number of light blue. patient alarm events on a shorter period of
technical alarms in the past laser printer. alarm events.
one hour. Alarm event
Each alarm event is the
color for its alarm level.
Display items when the display type is Limit
Display item Alarm displayed in the alarm event

HR + PR HR and PR vital sign alarms
ART* + NIBP ART* and NIBP vital sign alarms
SpO2 SpO2 vital sign alarms
CO2 and RR vital sign alarms and APNEA
CO2 + RR + APNEA
alarm
* Typical labels of arterial pressure (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, and FEM)

Display Type: Arrhythmia
Display items when the display type is Arrhythmia

ASY + VF + VT ASYSTOLE, V FIB, V TACHY
TACHY + BRADY TACHYCARDIA, BRADYCARDIA
VPC RUN VPC RUN
ECG Technical LEAD OFF and NOISE alarm

Display Type: Technical
8-1
Display items when the display type is Technical

ECG Technical LEAD OFF and NOISE alarm
ART*1 + NIBP ART*1 and NIBP technical alarms
SpO2 Technical SpO2 technical alarms*2
SIGNAL LOSS*3 SIGNAL LOSS alarm*4
*1 Typical labels of arterial pressure (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, and FEM)
*2 For details about technical alarms, refer to “Error Messages” in Section 16.
*3 “COMMUNICATION LOSS” is displayed when using a hard-wired bedside
monitor.
* “COMMUNICATION LOSS” alarm is displayed when using a hard-wired
4
bedside monitor.

Viewing the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window
The technical status is judged by the number of technical alarms in the last hour
and indicated by specified color.
Number of technical alarms

Technical status
in last hour
Green Good less than 5
Technical status
Yellow Not bad 5 to 10
Red Bad more than 10
Changing the Displayed Alarm Type

Select the alarm type to display on the Multi Patient Alarm Events window from
Limit, Technical and Arrhythmia.
Touch a key under “Alarm Types”.
Zooming In and Out on Alarm Events

You can zoom in and out the waveform display in four steps (1, 8, 24 or 72
hours) without changing the cursor position. Touch “Zoom In” or “Zoom Out” to
change the magnification.
Touch “Zoom In” to decrease the alarm events display width.
Touch “Zoom Out” to increase the alarm events display width.

Displaying the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window for a Group of Beds
To display a group of beds, touch the “Patient 1 to 8” or “Patient 9 to 16” tab or
touch the tab for one of the user-defined groups.
User-defined group
8-1
Displaying the Individual Alarm Events Window for One Bed

Touch a bed to view its individual alarm events window.

Setting a Bed Group

Refer to Section 8-0.
Editing Group Names

Recordings on the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window
Multi Patient Alarm Events Printing

With the laser printer, you can print the multi patient alarm events displayed on
the Multi Patient Alarm Events window.
To print, touch “Print” on the Multi Patient Alarm Events window.
To cancel printing during printing, touch “Print Stop”.
Other Recordings
On the Multi Patient Alarm Events window, the following recordings are
available with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Refer to Section 11.
recording

Section 8-2 Multi Patient Limits
Window
Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 8.2.2
Displaying the Multi Patient Limits Window............................................................................................. 8.2.2
From the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window............................................................................... 8.2.2
Window Description................................................................................................................................. 8.2.3
Viewing the Multi Patient Limits Window........................................................................................................... 8.2.4
Scrolling the Multi Patient Limits Window................................................................................................ 8.2.4
8
Displaying the Multi Patient Limits Window for a Group of Beds............................................................. 8.2.4
Setting Alarm Limits................................................................................................................................ 8.2.5
Assigning Beds to a Group...................................................................................................................... 8.2.5 8-2

Selecting the Displayed Parameter......................................................................................................... 8.2.5
Available Parameters............................................................................................................................... 8.2.7
Factory Default Settings................................................................................................................ 8.2.7
Recordings on the Multi Patient Limits Window................................................................................................. 8.2.8
Multi Patient Limits Printing..................................................................................................................... 8.2.8
Other Recordings.................................................................................................................................... 8.2.8

Overview
On a Multi Patient Limits window, you can display and set the alarm limits for
up to eight patients on one window.
Displaying the Multi Patient Limits Window

2. Touch “Multi Pat. Limits” to display the Multi Patient Limits window.
From the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window
Touch “Multi Pat. Limits” to display the Multi Patient Limits window.

8-2. MULTI PATIENT LIMITS WINDOW
Window Description
On one window, display the setting window of alarm limits for up to eight
patients.
Multi Pat. Alarm
Scroll key Event key
Scrolls the parameter Displays the Multi
Tabs Current value display. Patient Alarm Events
Touch a desired tab to Currently measured Current upper/lower window of all the
change the patient group. value is displayed. limit displayed patients.
Bed name
Patient 8
name
8-2
Cursor Parameter selection key Setting alarm limits of

Selected patient Touch to change that currently selected patient.
enclosed in blue parameter. Keys of all
frame. available parameters for
the bed are displayed.

Viewing the Multi Patient Limits Window
Scrolling the Multi Patient Limits Window

Touch to scroll the displayed parameter by one page.
Displaying the Multi Patient Limits Window for a Group of Beds

To display a group of beds, touch the “Patient 1 to 8” or “Patient 9 to 16” tab or
touch the tab for one of the user-defined groups.
User-defined group

Setting Alarm Limits

Touch a parameter to change the alarm limits settings. To change setting, refer to
“Setting Alarms” in Section 6.
8-2
Setting a Bed Group

Editing Group Names

Selecting the Displayed Parameter

1. Touch “Parameters”.

2. On the left side of the window, touch the key for one of the 12 positions. The
currently set parameter is displayed.
3. In the right side of the window, touch the key of the parameter to assign.
Touch “NONE” to select nothing.

Available Parameters
Setting Items
HR
PR
ST (I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6)
RR
APNEA
NIBP (SYS, DIA, MAP)
SpO2
SpO2-2
ART(SYS, DIA, MEAN)
ART2 (SYS, DIA, MEAN)
CVP (MAX, MIN, MEAN) 8
PAP (SYS, DIA, MEAN)
ICP (MAX, MIN, MEAN)
ICP2 (MAX, MIN, MEAN)
ICP3 (MAX, MIN, MEAN) 8-2
ICP4 (MAX, MIN, MEAN)
TEMP (T1 to T8)
O2 (FiO2, EtO2)
CO2 (FiCO2, ETCO2)
GAS (ETCO2, FiCO2, EtN2O, FiN2O, EtO2, FiO2, EtHAL, FiHAL, EtISO,
FiISO, EtENF, FiENF, EtSEV, FiSEV, FiDES, EtDES)
BIS
EEG (SEF, TP)
Factory Default Settings
Display Position Setting Items

1 HR
2 PR
3 SpO2
4 RR
5 APNEA
6 ETCO2
7 NIBP SYS
8 ART SYS
9 ART MEAN
10 PAP MEAN
11 CVP MEAN
12 T1

Recordings on the Multi Patient Limits Window
Multi Patient Limits Printing

With the laser printer, you can print the multi patients limits displayed on the
Multi Patients Limits window.
To print, touch “Print” on the Multi Patients Limits window.
Other Recordings
On the Multi Patient Limits window, the following recordings are available with
the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Refer to Section 11.
recording

Section 9 Individual Bed Window
Overview............................................................................................................................................................... 9.2
Displaying the Individual Bed Window........................................................................................................ 9.2
From the All Beds Screen................................................................................................................ 9.2
From Any Window Other than the All Beds Screen.......................................................................... 9.2
From the Menu Window................................................................................................................... 9.2
Window Description.................................................................................................................................... 9.3
Wave Display Window................................................................................................................................ 9.3
ECG 12 Lead Display Window......................................................................................................... 9.4
All Vital Signs Window...................................................................................................................... 9.4
Changing Display Types............................................................................................................................. 9.5
Changing the Beds..................................................................................................................................... 9.5
9
Freezing Waveforms................................................................................................................................... 9.5
Temporarily Silencing/Suspending Alarms................................................................................................. 9.5
Learning ECG............................................................................................................................................ 9.5
Starting NIBP Measurement...................................................................................................................... 9.6
Changing the Individual Bed Window Display Settings........................................................................................ 9.7
Setting on the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup Window........................................................................................ 9.7
Selecting the Waveform Sensitivity and Scale on the Wave Display Window.................................. 9.7
Selecting the Waveform Displayed on the Wave Display Window.................................................... 9.8
Selecting the Measurement Data Displayed on the Wave Display Window..................................... 9.9
Changing the Sweep Speed.......................................................................................................... 9.11
Changing the Sweep Speed of the Respiration Waveform............................................................ 9.11
Changing the IBP Waveform Display Mode................................................................................... 9.11
Selecting the Pulse Rate Display................................................................................................... 9.12
Selecting the Source Pulse Rate................................................................................................... 9.12
Setting on the Wave Display Windows of the Indiv. Bed Window............................................................. 9.13
Selecting the Waveform Sensitivity and Scale on the Wave Display Window................................ 9.13
Setting Vital Sign Alarms and Measurement Conditions for the Parameters Displayed on the
Individual Bed Window................................................................................................................... 9.14
Changing the All Bed Screen Display Setting.................................................................................................... 9.15
Setting Parameter Priority.................................................................................................................................. 9.15
Recording on the Individual Bed Window........................................................................................................... 9.16
Dual Waveform Recording........................................................................................................................ 9.16
Necessary Settings........................................................................................................................ 9.16
Multi-Wave Printing.................................................................................................................................. 9.17
Necessary Setting.......................................................................................................................... 9.17
ECG 12 Lead Printing.............................................................................................................................. 9.17
Necessary Setting.......................................................................................................................... 9.17

9. INDIVIDUAL BED WINDOW
Overview
The Individual Bed window displays waveforms and numerical data of one bed
selected from the monitored beds. The Individual Bed window has the following
three types of data display windows and the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup window.
• Wave Display window
Displays all currently measured waveforms and selected numeric data.
• ECG 12 Lead Display window
Displays 12 lead ECG and ST level of each lead.
• All Vital Signs/All Vital Signs 2 window
Displays all numerical data.
NOTE
Sometimes numeric data and messages disappear for a moment. This is
normal and occurs when the display is refreshed.
Displaying the Individual Bed Window

From the All Beds Screen
Touch the data area of the bed you want to display.
From Any Window Other than the All Beds Screen

Touch “Waveform Display”. The Wave Display window opens.
From the Menu Window

Touch “Menu” to display the Menu window and then touch the key for a desired
type of the Individual Bed window.

Window Description
The Individual Bed window displays waveforms and numerical data of one bed
selected from the monitored beds. Up to eight waveforms can be displayed for
the patient. At the top of the screen, there is the basic information area where one
or two waveform and numeric data are displayed for all monitored beds.
The Individual Beds window has three display types.

• Wave Display window
• ECG 12 Lead Display window
• All Vital Signs/All Vital Signs 2 window
On the Expand Individual Bed window:

• The number of parameters of the displayed waveforms and measurement data
are different from the regular window.
• There is no basic information area. The waveforms and measurement data of
all patients are displayed on the All Beds screen.
9
Wave Display Window
When you touch inside the frame, the Individual Bed screen for Silence Alarms key
that bed opens. The selected bed is filled in with the transparent Transmitter channel Refer to Section 6.
color.
QRS mark Message area Patient name Date and time
Bed name
Bed color
Tab to switch
display types
Scale
Numeric data (maximum 11) Waveform label/sensitivity Waveform

Touch to switch the screen to the setting window for each parameter. Touch to
When a vital sign alarm occurs, the numeric data is highlighted. When Record open the
an alarm occurs for a parameter which is not displayed on the screen, the Touch to record the displayed sensitivity/
displayed parameter changes to the alarmed parameter and highlighted. waveforms and numeric data. scale window.
ECG 12 Lead Display Window

Tab to switch
display types
ST value
Numeric data (maximum 11) Lead/Sensitivity 12 lead ECG

Touch to switch the screen to the setting window for each
parameter. When a vital sign alarm occurs, the numeric data is
highlighted. When an alarm occurs for a parameter which is not
displayed on the screen, the displayed parameter changes to the
alarmed parameter and highlighted.
All Vital Signs Window

All Vital Signs 2 window displays numeric data that cannot be displayed on the
All Vital Signs window. When this tab is touched, the right side numeric display
Tab to switch display types shows other numeric data while the left side numeric display does not change.
Numeric data (maximum 11) All vital signs numeric data Parameter name
Touch to switch the screen to the setting With the All Vital Sign window, maximum
window for each parameter. When a vital 56 data With the All Vital Sign window and
sign alarm occurs, the numeric data is All Vital Sign 2 window, maximum 112 data.
highlighted. When a vital sign alarm occurs, the alarmed
data is highlighted.

Changing Display Types

Touch the tab of the display type you want to display.
Changing the Beds

Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display on the top of the
screen.
Freezing Waveforms
NOTE
• You need to assign the waveform freezing function to a function key in
advance. Refer to Section 7-1 of Administrator’s Guide.
• Numeric data are not frozen. Numeric data are always updated.
Touch “Freeze” to freeze all waveforms of individual bed window. The clock
time when the freezing started is displayed below the date on the top of the
screen.
During freezing, “Freeze” changes to “Unfreeze”.
To unfreeze, touch “Unfreeze” or change to another window.
Temporarily Silencing/Suspending Alarms

Refer to Section 6.
Learning ECG
CAUTION
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis, make the monitor
relearn the patient’s ECG and check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise, an important arrhythmia may be overlooked.

NOTE
• When you touch “Learning ECG” at the central monitor, the bedside
monitor relearns ECG.
• Some bedside monitors automatically relearn ECG whenever the
pattern of normal ECG changes.
If there is any question about the arrhythmia analysis result, relearn the dominant
ECG. While learning, the “LEARNING” message appears on the window.
1. Touch the heart rate on the Wave Display window, ECG 12 Lead Display
window or All Vital Signs window. The ECG window is displayed.
When “Learn ECG” is assigned to one of the function keys, you can display
the ECG window by touching the function key from any window.
2. Touch “Learn ECG” to display the learning window. For details about ECG
learning, refer to “ECG Settings” in Section 13.
Starting NIBP Measurement
WARNING
When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
minutes, perform measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation.
Congestion may occur at the measurement site. When performing
periodic measurement for a long time, periodically check the
circulation condition.
CAUTION
Before you remotely start and stop NIBP measurement from the
central monitor, confirm the state of the patient at the bedside
monitor. Carefully start and stop NIBP measurement from the central
monitor.
You can remotely start a NIBP measurement from the central monitor.
1. Touch the NIBP value on the Wave Display window, ECG 12 Lead Display
window and All Vital Signs window. The NIBP window is displayed.
When “NIBP Measurement” is assigned to one of the function keys, you can
display the NIBP Measurement window by touching the function key from
any window.
2. Touch “Meas. and Settings”. The NIBP Measurement window is displayed.

For details, refer to “Starting/Stopping NIBP Measurement” in Section 13.

Changing the Individual Bed Window Display Settings
Set the following settings for the Individual Bed window display.
On the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup window

• Selecting the waveform sensitivity and scale on the Wave Display window
• Selecting the Measurement Data Displayed on the Wave Display Window,
ECG 12 lead display window and All Vital Signs window
• Changing the Sweep Speed
• Changing the Sweep Speed of the Respiration Waveform
• Changing the Blood Pressure Waveform Display Mode
• Selecting the Pulse Rate Display On/Off
On data display windows of the Individual Bed window

• Selecting the waveform sensitivity and scale on the Wave Display window
• Setting vital sign alarms and measurement conditions for the parameters 9
displayed on the Individual Bed window.
Setting on the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup Window

Window
NOTE
The waveform sensitivity and scale setting on the Individual Bed Screen
Setup window links to the setting on Wave Display windows of the
Individual Bed window and All Bed screen display.
1. Display the Individual Bed Screen Setup window.
i) Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to change the
setting for.
ii) Touch “Menu” to display the Menu window.
iii) Touch “Indiv. Bed Screen Setup” to display the setting window.

2. Select the parameter you want to set the sensitivity or scale of and touch the
desired sensitivity or scale key.
Selecting the Waveform Displayed on the Wave Display Window

Select the waveform to be displayed on the right side of the wave display
window. Up to eight waveforms (11 waveforms on the Expand Individual Bed
window) can be displayed.
1. Display the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup screen.
2. Touch “Wave Selection”.
3. Touch “Manual” or “Auto”.

• Auto: The waveform to be displayed is automatically selected from the
You can customize parameter priority. currently measured parameters based on the parameter priority and
Refer to “Setting Parameter Priority” is changed according to the measurement situation. Up to eight
in Section 7.
waveforms are displayed on the Individual Bed window and up to
11 waveforms on the Expand Individual Bed window.
NOTE
For the beds connected through the RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient
Receiver with auto lead change function, when Wave Selection is set to
Auto, the display lead of ECG waveform is the same as the setting for
arrhythmia analysis lead. For details, refer to “Setting the Analysis Lead”
of “ECG Settings” in Section 13.
• Manual: The waveforms of the parameters you select here are displayed
on the wave display window. Select the parameter(s) and their
display position on the wave display window. Up to eight
waveforms can be selected for the Individual Bed window and
11 waveforms on the Expand Individual Bed window.

i) Touch the key for the display position you want to set. The
key position corresponds to the display position on the
window.
ii) Touch the parameter on the right. You can choose the
parameter from the currently measured parameters or
parameters selected on the Parameter window of the System
Setup screen.
You can preview the display.
i)
ii)
These keys are
displayed only when
“Manual” is selected.
NONE 9
No waveform for the
selected position.
Selecting the Measurement Data Displayed on the Wave Display

Window
Select the measurement data to be displayed on the left side of the Wave Display
window, ECG 12 Lead Display window and All Vital Signs window. Up to 11
numeric data (13 numeric data on the Expand Individual Bed window) can be
displayed.
• Auto: The automatically selected parameter of the measurement data is

displayed on the Wave Display window, ECG 12 Lead Display
window and All Vital Signs window. Automatic selection is based on
the parameter priority and changes according to the situation.
• Manual: The manually selected parameter of the measurement data is
displayed on the Wave Display window, ECG 12 Lead Display
window and All Vital Signs window.
The first parameter is displayed in large size and the other parameters are
displayed in the remaining area in equal size.
However, when you select the S/D/M display format of blood pressure
measurement values (refer to Section 13), it is displayed as large as possible.
When the first parameter is HR, VPC and ST are also displayed.
1. Display the Individual Bed screen setup window.
2. Touch “Numerical Selection”.

3. Set whether the parameter of the measurement data is to be selected

manually or automatically.
• Auto: The displayed parameter(s) are automatically selected from the
currently measured parameters according to the display priority.
Up to 11 numeric data (13 numeric data on the Expand Individual
Bed window) can be displayed for a patient. The number of
measurement data isn’t selectable.
NOTE
The measurement value may not follow the parameter priority when
displaying S/D/M format blood pressure measurement values.
• Manual: Select the parameter display order. Touch the key of the
parameter to display its numeric data. You can choose the
parameter(s) to be displayed on the Wave Display window,
ECG 12 Lead Display window and All Vital Signs window from
currently measured parameter(s) or the parameter(s) selected
on the Parameters window of System Setup screen. On the left
window, you can confirm the display on the each window.
NOTE
When you select the S/D/M display format of the blood pressure
measurement values, the blood pressure measurement value is displayed
widely. Therefore, some selected parameters may not displayed.

Changing the Sweep Speed

Select the sweep speed of the waveforms other than the respiration waveform.
1. Display the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup window.
2. Touch “Display Setting” to display the setting window.
3. Touch “25” or “50” for “Sweep Speed”.
Changing the Sweep Speed of the Respiration Waveform

Select the sweep speed of respiration (RESP), CO2, FLOW, VOL, Paw and GAS
waveforms. Speed for the upper button corresponds to the setting at “Sweep 9
Speed”.
3. Touch “25” (When the sweep speed setting of previous section is 50 mm/s,
the display of this tab changes to 50) or “6.25” for “Respiration Wave Sweep
Speed”.
Changing the IBP Waveform Display Mode

There are two ways to display IBP waveforms on the window.
Common: Both IBP waveforms are displayed on the same scale. You can move
the cursor up and down with the upward and downward arrow keys
on the keyboard.
Separate: IBP waveforms are displayed separately on different scales.
1. Display Indiv. Bed Screen Setup window.

3. Touch “Separate” or “Common” for “BP Scale”.
Selecting the Pulse Rate Display

Select the pulse rate display on or off.
NOTE
When “Manual” is selected for the Numerical Selection, the parameter
is a selected parameter. Depending on the selected parameter, the PR
Display setting is not used.
3. Select the pulse rate display on or off.
Selecting the Source Pulse Rate

Select the source pulse rate.
1. Display Indiv. Bed Screen Setup window.
3. Select the source pulse rate.

PRESS: Displays the PRESS pulse rate.
SpO2: Displays the SpO2 pulse rate.
NOTE
• The PR Source can be selected when monitoring through RU-960P/
ORG-9100 multiple patient receiver with correspond version.
• The PR Source is displayed when “ON” is selected for the PR Display
or “Manual” is selected for the Numerical Selection.
• When the PRESS or SpO2 is monitored, the pulse rate display changes
to the monitored parameter.

Setting on the Wave Display Windows of the Indiv. Bed Window

Window
NOTE
The waveform sensitivity and scale setting on Wave Display windows
of the Individual Bed window links to the setting on the Individual Bed
Screen Setup window and All Bed screen display.
1. Display the Wave Display window.
2. Touch the waveform you want to set the sensitivity or scale of. The setting
window opens.
3. Touch the desired sensitivity or scale key.

Setting Vital Sign Alarms and Measurement Conditions for the

Parameters Displayed on the Individual Bed Window
Set the vital sign alarm and measurement conditions for the numeric data to be
displayed on the left side of the Wave Display window, ECG 12 lead display
window and All Vital Signs window.
1. Display the Individual Bed window.
2. On the window, touch a numeric data for which you want to set the vital sign
alarm and measurement condition. The setting window for the parameter
opens.
Example: ECG window
For setting procedure, refer to Section 13.

Changing the All Bed Screen Display Setting
To open the All Bed Screen Setup window, touch the All Bed Screen Setup
tab on the Individual Bed window. For the details of each setting item, refer to
“Changing the All Beds Screen Display Setting” in Section 7.
Setting Parameter Priority

9
Parameters are displayed according to the parameter priority set in Auto function
on the Individual Bed window. Automatic selection is based on the parameter
priority and changes according to the situation. Refer to “Setting Parameter
Priority” in Section 7.

Recording on the Individual Bed Window
On the Individual Bed screen, the following recordings are available with the
WS-960P Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11.
recording
Dual Waveform Recording

Two waveforms of the preset recording period and the numeric data of the
recording start time are recorded with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Waveforms
to be recorded are selected on the Recording window of the Individual Bed
window.
Touch “Record” on the Individual Bed window to start dual waveform recording.
During recording, the “Record” key changes to “REC Stop”. To stop recording,
touch “REC Stop”.
Necessary Settings
1. At “Recording Pattern” on the Recording window of the Setup, select two
parameters for the waveforms to be recorded. (When “Second Wave” is set
to None, only one waveform is recorded.)
2. Set the record sweep speed at “Other” on the recording window of the Setup.
3. Select the real time recording or delayed recording at “Manual Recording”

on the Recording window of the System Setup screen.
4. Set the recording period at “Manual Recording” on the Recording window of

the System Setup screen.
NOTE
When you perform dual waveform recording while freezing waveforms,
the recording period is fixed to 6 seconds and the recorded waveforms
are those frozen and displayed on the window.

Multi-Wave Printing
All displayed waveforms and numeric data on the Wave Display window are
printed on one A4 or letter size page by the laser printer. Each waveform is 10
seconds. On the Wave Display window, touch “Print”. When printing of all
waveforms is finished, printing automatically stops.
To cancel printing, touch “Print Stop”.
NOTE
When you perform multi waveform printing while freezing waveforms, the
printing period is fixed to 6 seconds and the printing waveforms are those
frozen and displayed on the window.
Necessary Setting
Set the record sweep speed at “Other” on the recording window of the Setup.
9
ECG 12 Lead Printing
All ECG waveforms (maximum 12 leads) displayed on the ECG 12 Lead
Display window are printed on one A4 or letter size page by the laser printer.
Touch “Print” on the ECG 12 Lead Display window. When printing of all
waveforms is finished, printing automatically stops.
Necessary Setting
1. Select printing format (number of leads × number of traces) of the all ECG
waveforms (maximum 12 leads) display at the ECG 12 Printing Format on
the System Configuration window of the System Setup screen.
2. Set the record sweep speed at “Other” on the recording window of the Setup.
NOTE
When you select 3 rows × 4 cols in ECG 12 Lead Printing Format, the
record sweep speed is fixed to 25 mm/s regardless of the recording
sweep speed setting in “Other” on the Recording window in Setup.

Section 10 Review Windows
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.0.2
Displaying the Review Window.............................................................................................................. 10.0.3
Common Description of Review Windows....................................................................................................... 10.0.4
Section 10-1 Trend Window......................................................................................................................... 10.1.1
Section 10-2 Tabular Trend Window............................................................................................................ 10.2.1
Section 10-3 Hemodynamics Window......................................................................................................... 10.3.1
Section 10-4 Arrhythmia Recall Window..................................................................................................... 10.4.1
Section 10-5 ST Recall Window.................................................................................................................. 10.5.1
Section 10-6 Full Disclosure Window.......................................................................................................... 10.6.1
Section 10-7 ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window.............................................................................................. 10.7.1
Section 10-8 Alarm History Window............................................................................................................ 10.8.1
Section 10-9 Alarm Events Window............................................................................................................ 10.9.1
Section 10-10 Report Window..................................................................................................................... 10.10.1 10
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
You can review saved data of a monitored bed on the following windows.
For data display:

• Trend window
• Tabular Trend window
• Hemodynamics List window
• Arrhythmia Recall window
• ST Recall window
• Full Disclosure window (Available when QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing
Program Kit is installed)
• ECG 12 Lead Analysis window (Available when QP-964P 12 Lead ECG
Interpretation Filing Program Kit is installed)
• Alarm History window
• Alarm Events window
For report creation:
• Report window
When you change to a different Review window for data display, a cursor is
displayed at the position of the corresponding time.
You can save the following review data for each bed in the central monitor. The
data is saved for the following files/time even when the central monitor is turned
off.
Review data Files/time

Trend data 72 hours
Tabular trend data 72 hours
Hemodynamics data 256 files
Arrhythmia recall data 768 files
ST recall data 4320 files
Full disclosure data 72 hours
ECG 12 lead analysis data 64 files
Alarm history data 5000 files
Alarm events data 72 hours
Report data –
NOTE
When a new file is created over the maximum number, the oldest file is
automatically deleted.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the Review Window

The same procedure is used to display each review window.
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the review
windows for.
3. Touch the key for each review window you want to display.
10
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Common Description of Review Windows
Each review window consists of a basic information area (upper half of the
screen) and review data display area (bottom half of the screen). On the basic
information area, one numeric data and waveform for each monitored patient is
displayed.
Example: Trend window

When you touch inside the frame, the Individual
Bed window for that bed opens. The selected Silence Alarms key
bed is filled in with the transparent color. Transmitter channel Refer to Section 6.
QRS mark Message area Patient name Date and time

Bed name
Bed color
REC key
Patient name and

bed name whose
review data is
currently displayed.
Tab to switch
display types
Review data display area

Section 10-1 Trend Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.1.2
Displaying the Trend Window................................................................................................................ 10.1.2
Window Description............................................................................................................................... 10.1.3
Parameters and Display.............................................................................................................. 10.1.4
Viewing Trend Window..................................................................................................................................... 10.1.8
Scrolling the Trendgraph........................................................................................................................ 10.1.8
Viewing Numerical Data (Cursor Moving)............................................................................................. 10.1.8
Changing the Display Width of the Trendgraph..................................................................................... 10.1.8
Changing the Trend Window Display Setting................................................................................................... 10.1.9
Setting the Displayed Parameters......................................................................................................... 10.1.9
Changing the Scale............................................................................................................................... 10.1.9
Selecting Displayed Events................................................................................................................. 10.1.10
Printing Trendgraphs...................................................................................................................................... 10.1.11 10
10-1

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
The Trend window displays trendgraphs of four parameters and two events of
the most recent 72 hours. Measurement values of the measured parameters are
displayed as trendgraphs.
Displaying the Trend Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the Trend
window for.
3. Touch “Trend” to display the Trend window.

10-1. TREND WINDOW
Window Description
Each parameter data is displayed in the color for each parameter.
You can select either 1, 8, 24 or 72 hours for trendgraph display width.

The numerical data at the cursor is displayed.
You can select two of “ASYSTOLE”, “V-FIB”, “V. TACHY”, “VPC RUN”,
“COUPLET”, “Off/Noise” and “ALL” for event trendgraphs. A mark is put at
the time the selected event occurred.
Cursor
The numerical data and date
Touch a desired tab to and time at the cursor position
change the review windows. Cursor is displayed.
Parameter select
key
Touch to open the
Trend Parameter
Setting window.
Trend Scale 10
Touch to open the
Trend Scale Setting 10-1
window.
Select event key

Touch to display
the Display event
window.
Scroll key Time bar Print Zoom In, Zoom Out

Touch to scroll the trendgraph. Touch to print the Touch to change the
Shows arrhythmia displayed trendgraph. display width of the
occurrence. trendgraph.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Parameters and Display
measurement max
max value measurement
mean value
min
0 0 0 min 0
standard VPC PRESS Temp
Parameter Indication Scale Range (bold: default)

0 - 100
HR PRESS 0 - 200
0 - 300
0 - 20
VPC VPC 0 - 50
0 - 100
ST –0.20 - +0.20
(I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6, Standard –0.50 - +0.50
V, MCL, ECG1, ECG2) –1.00 - +1.00
0 - 50
RR VPC
0 - 150
(mmHg)
0 - 40
0 - 80
ETCO2, FiCO2, VPC
(kPa)
0.0 - 6.0
0.0 - 12.0
(mmHg)
0 - 100
0 - 200
0 - 300
NIBP PRESS
(kPa)
0.0 - 16.0
0.0 - 32.0
0.0 - 40.0
0 - 100
SpO2, SpO2-2 50 - 100
80 - 100
0 - 100
FiO2, EtO2 0 - 60
30 - 60
VPC
0-6
MV 0 - 12
0 - 30
0 - 500
TV 0 - 1000
0 - 2000
0 - 10
0 - 20
Paw TEMP 0 - 50
0 - 100
0 - 150
0 - 200
PR VPC
0 - 300

10-1. TREND WINDOW

(mmHg)
0 - 20
0 - 50
0 - 75
0 - 100
0 - 160
0 - 200
ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, 0 - 300
PRESS
FEM, LVP, P1 to P8, CNIBP (kPa)
0.0 - 3.0
0.0 - 7.0
0.0 - 10.0
0.0 - 14.0
0.0 - 22.0
0.0 - 28.0
0.0 - 40.0
(mmHg)
0 - 20
0 - 50
0 - 75
0 - 100
0 - 160
0 - 200 10
0 - 300
UA PRESS 10-1
(kPa)
0.0 - 3.0
0.0 - 7.0
0.0 - 10.0
0.0 - 14.0
0.0 - 22.0
0.0 - 28.0
0.0 - 40.0
(mmHg)
0 - 20
0 - 50
0 - 75
0 - 100
0 - 160
0 - 200
UV, PAP, RAP, RVP, CVP, LAP, ICP, 0 - 300
PRESS
ICP2 to ICP4 (kPa)
0.0 - 3.0
0.0 - 7.0
0.0 - 10.0
0.0 - 14.0
0.0 - 22.0
0.0 - 28.0
0.0 - 40.0

10. REVIEW WINDOWS

(ºC)
0 - 40.0
15.0 - 34.0
20.0 - 40.0
30.0 - 34.0
Tskin, Tskin2, Tskin3, Trect, Tcore,
34.0 - 40.0
Tnaso, Teso, Ttymp, Taxil, Tblad, T1 TEMP
(ºF)
to T8, Tb, Tb (CCO), Tb (PCCO)
20 - 120
80 - 120
92 - 104
52 - 92
84 - 92
60 - 80
SvO2, SvO2 (CCO), ScvO2 VPC
60 - 100
4.00 - 6.00
CCO, PCCO VPC 0.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 20.00
4.00 - 6.00
CCI, PCCI VPC 0.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 20.00
(mmHg)
0 - 100
0 - 200
0 - 800
tcPO2, tcPCO2 VPC
(kPa)
0.0 - 16.0
0.0 - 32.0
0.0 - 128.0
EtAGENT, FiAGENT, EtHAL, 0.0 - 6.0
FiHAL, EtISO, FiISO, EtENF, 0.0 - 10.0
VPC
FiENF, EtSEV, FiSEV, EtDES, 0.0 - 20.0
FiDES
0 - 80
FiN2O (GAS) VPC 0 - 100
50 - 100
0 - 50
RR (GAS), RR (VENT) VPC
0 - 150
(mmHg)
0 - 40
0 - 80
ETCO2 (GAS), ETCO2 (VENT) VPC
(kPa)
0.0 - 6.0
0.0 - 12.0
0 - 60
FiO2 (GAS), FiO2 (VENT) VPC 30 - 60
0 - 100
0 - 10
0 - 20
Pmin (VENT), Pmean (VENT),
TEMP 0 - 50
PEEP (VENT), Ppeak (VENT)
0 - 100
0 - 150

10-1. TREND WINDOW

0 - 50
RRspon (VENT) 0 - 150
0.0 - 6.0
MVspon (VENT), MV (VENT) 0.0 - 12.0
0 - 30.0
0.0 - 15.0
EEG1, EEG2 (SEF) VPC 0.0 - 30.0
0.0 - 60.0
0.00 - 0.10
0.00 - 0.50
EEG1, EEG2 (TP) 0.00 - 1.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.00 - 10.0
0 - 100
BIS TEMP 50 - 100
10
10-1

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Viewing Trend Window
Scrolling the Trendgraph

Touch the following keys to scroll the trendgraph.
: Scrolls by one page.
: Scrolls by one minute*
* The step depends on the display time width.
By touching the time bar, you can jump to the trendgraph at the touched time.
Viewing Numerical Data (Cursor Moving)

The numerical data at the cursor position is always displayed. You can view the
numerical data of particular date and time by moving the cursor to the date and
time. To move the cursor, touch the , , or key or touch directly
on the trendgraph or time bar.
Cursor
The numerical data and date and
time at the cursor position is
Cursor displayed.
Changing the Display Width of the Trendgraph

You can change the display width of the trendgraph. The display width changes
so that the cursor is centered in the trendgraph.
Touch “Zoom In” to decrease the trendgraph display width.
Touch “Zoom Out” to increase the trendgraph display width.

10-1. TREND WINDOW
Changing the Trend Window Display Setting
Setting the Displayed Parameters

Do the procedure below to change the displayed parameter, change the display
position or stop displaying parameters.
1. Touch the Parameter select key on the position you want to change
the displayed parameter. The Trend Parameter Setting window opens.
Parameters which are currently measured are displayed. When the parameter
you want to choose is not displayed, first register it on the Parameter window
2. Touch the key of the parameter you want to display. Touch “NONE” to
select nothing.
10
10-1
3. Touch the button to close the window.
Changing the Scale

You can change the scale for the displayed trendgraph.
1. Touch “Trend Scale” of the trendgraph you want to change the scale of. The
Trend Scale Setting window opens.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Touch the desired scale.
3. Touch the button to close the window. The trendgraph with the changed
scale is displayed.
Selecting Displayed Events

Select the events to be displayed as trendgraphs. You can select up to two events.
1. Touch the Select event key to display the Display Event window.
2. Touch the key of the event you want to display. Touch “NONE” to select
nothing.

10-1. TREND WINDOW
Printing Trendgraphs
The displayed trendgraphs are printed by the laser printer. Touch “Print” to print
trendgraphs.
To stop printing, touch “Print Stop”.
On the Trend window, the following recordings are available with the WS-960P
Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11.
recording
Remote recording: Call recording, Remote delayed recording 10
10-1

Section 10-2 Tabular Trend Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.2.2
Displaying the Tabular Trend Window.................................................................................................... 10.2.2
Viewing the Tabular Trend Window.................................................................................................................. 10.2.4
Scrolling the Tabular Trend.................................................................................................................... 10.2.4
Displaying a Different Tabular Trend...................................................................................................... 10.2.4
Changing the Tabular Trend Window Display Setting...................................................................................... 10.2.5
Changing the Display Interval............................................................................................................... 10.2.5
Setting the Patterns of Tabular Trend.................................................................................................... 10.2.5
Selecting Parameters for Each Tabular Trend............................................................................. 10.2.5
Registering Names for Each Tabular Trend................................................................................. 10.2.7
Printing Tabular Trend...................................................................................................................................... 10.2.8
10
10-2

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
The Tabular Trend window displays tabular trend of measured parameters of the
most recent 72 hours.
Displaying the Tabular Trend Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the patient you want to display the
Tabular Trend window of.
3. Touch “Tabular Trend” to display the Tabular Trend window.

10-2. TABULAR TREND WINDOW
Window Description
Ten rows of tabular trend are displayed at the same time. The numerical data is
updated every one minute. You can select the time width on the screen.
The numerical value is displayed in the color for each parameter.
The blood pressure and temperature are displayed by their labels.
Parameters included in a tabular

trend that are selected on the Changes the display interval
Tabular Trend Setting window. of the tabular trend.
To display another tabular
trend, touch the tab of the Touch to change to Data stored
desired tabular trend. another review window. date and time Cursor
10
10-2
Scroll keys Tabular trend Time bar Print Touch to open the Tabular
Scrolls the tabular trend. Touch to print the tabular Trend Setting window for the
trend on the screen with currently displayed tabular
a laser printer. trend.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Viewing the Tabular Trend Window
Scrolling the Tabular Trend

Touch the following keys to scroll the tabular trend.
: Scrolls by one row.
By touching the time bar, you can jump to the tabular trend at the touched time.
Displaying a Different Tabular Trend

To display another tabular trend, touch the tab of the desired tabular trend.
Five patterns of tabular trend can be registered in advance at the Tabular Trend
Setting window.
You can select up to 18 parameters for each pattern of tabular trend.

Changing the Tabular Trend Window Display Setting
Changing the Display Interval

NOTE
• This setting only affects display. The data is saved every one minute.
• The NIBP Tabular Trend displays measurement values acquired at NIBP
measurement. You cannot change the display interval.
Touch a key at “Interval” to change the display interval of the tabular trend. After
changing, the tabular trend is displayed in the selected interval.
10
10-2
Setting the Patterns of Tabular Trend

You can register five patterns of tabular trend on the Tabular Trend Setting
window.
One of these patterns is fixed to NIBP tabular trend. Up to 18 parameters can be

assigned to each pattern of tabular trend. Up to 30 parameters can be assigned to
each pattern of tabular trend on the Expand Individual Bed window.
You can choose the parameter(s) to be displayed on each tabular trend from
currently measured parameters or the parameter(s) selected on the Parameter
To display another tabular trend, touch the tab of the desired tabular trend.
Selecting Parameters for Each Tabular Trend

1. Touch “Setting” to display the Tabular Trend Setting window.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Touch the tab of the desired tabular trend to display it.
3. In “Displayed Parameters”, touch the key for the position you want to
change the parameter for. They are displayed at 1 to 18 in order on the
Tabular Trend window.
For NIBP tabular trend, three of 18 parameters are fixed to NIBP SYS, NIBP
DIA and NIBP MAP.
4. Touch a parameter at “Select Parameter”. To select nothing, touch “NONE”.
Automatic selecting function NONE

Touch “AUTO” to automatically select displayed parameters Touch NONE to unselect the
from the currently measured data in the priority. For the priority, selected items. No parameter is
refer to Section 18. displayed on the position.
You can select measuring labels and leads for PRESS, TEMP and ST.
NOTE
When a transmitter measures SpO2 at a finger that is used for NIBP
measurement, select “PR (SpO2)” to display the PR measured at the
transmitter on the NIBP tabular trend.

Registering Names for Each Tabular Trend

1. Touch “Free Name Registration” on the Tabular Trend Setting window. The
Free Name Registration window opens.
2. Touch the key of the tabular trend you want to name.
3. Enter a name on the screen using the keyboard.
NOTE
The list name “NIBP” can not be changed.
10
10-2

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing Tabular Trend
The displayed tabular trend is printed by the laser printer. Touch “Print” to print
tabular trend.
On the Tabular Trend window, the following recordings are available with the
recording

Section 10-3 Hemodynamics Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.3.2
Displaying the Hemodynamics List Window.......................................................................................... 10.3.2
Viewing the Hemodynamics List Window........................................................................................................ 10.3.3
Scrolling the Hemodynamics List.......................................................................................................... 10.3.3
Abbreviations................................................................................................................................................... 10.3.4
Printing the Hemodynamics List...................................................................................................................... 10.3.5
10
10-3

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
The hemodynamics list created on the bedside monitor can be viewed on the
Hemodynamics List window.
Displaying the Hemodynamics List Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the
Hemodynamics List window for.
3. Touch “Hemodynamics List” to display the Hemodynamics List window.
Window Description
A Hemodynamics List of up to 256 measurements can be displayed. 8 rows at a
time are displayed.
Touch to change to
Data stored date and time Cursor another review window.
Parameters
Up to 17 parameters
can be displayed.
Scroll keys Hemodynamics list Scroll bar Print

Touch to scroll the Print the hemodynamics list on
hemodynamics list. the screen with the laser printer.

10-3. HEMODYNAMICS WINDOW
Viewing the Hemodynamics List Window
Scrolling the Hemodynamics List

Touch the following keys to scroll the hemodynamics list.
By touching the scroll bar, you can jump to the desired list.
Scroll bar
10
10-3

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Abbreviations
The following table shows the abbreviations, units and calculations of the
parameters used in the hemodynamics data.
Abbreviation Meaning Units Equation

beat/min or
HR Heart Rate —
beat ·��
�� min
��−1
CO Cardiac Output L ·��
�� min
��−1 —
CCO*1 Continuous Cardiac Output L ·��

�� min
��−1
CI Cardiac Index L ·��
�� min
��−1 ·��
�� m
�−2 CI= CO / BSA*2
AP_S Arterial Systolic Pressure
AP_D Arterial Diastolic Pressure
AP_M Arterial Mean Pressure
PAP_S Pulmonary Artery Systolic Pressure

PAP_D Pulmonary Artery Diastolic Pressure mmHg —
PAP_M Pulmonary Artery Mean Pressure
PCWP Pulmonary Capillary Wedge Pressure
LAP Left Atrial Pressure
CVP Central Venous Pressure
SVI Stroke Volume Index mL ·��

�� m
�−2 SVI = (CI × 1000) / HR
SV Stroke Volume mL SV = (CO × 1000) / HR
LSWI*3 Left Ventricular Stroke Work Index g ·��
�� m
�� ·��
�� m
�−2 LSWI = (SVI × (AP_M − PCWP)) × 0.0136
LSW*3 Left Ventricular Stroke Work g ·��
�� m
� LSW = (SV × (AP_M − PCWP)) × 0.0136
SVRI Systemic Vascular Resistance Index dyn ·��
�� s�� ·��
�
m2 / cm5 SVRI = ((AP_M − CVP_M) × 80) / CI
SVR Systemic Vascular Resistance dyn ·��
�� s�� ·��
��
cm−5 SVR = ((AP_M − CVP_M) × 80) / CO
Pulmonary Vascular Resistance
PVRI*3 dyn ·��
�� s�� ·��
�
m2 / cm5 PVRI = ((PAP_M − PCWP) × 80) / CI
Index
PVR*3 Pulmonary Vascular Resistance dyn ·��
�� s�� ·��
��
cm−5 PVR = ((PAP_M − PCWP) × 80) / CO
RSWI = (SVI × (PAP_M − CVP_M)) ×
RSWI Right Ventricular Stroke Work Index g ·��
�� m
�� ·��
�� m
�−2
0.0136
RSW Right Ventricular Stroke Work g ·��
�� m
� RSW = (SV × (PAP_M − CVP_M)) × 0.0136
*1 CCO is calculated instead of CO when CCO is measured.

*2 BSA = 0.007184 × weight0.425 × height0.725 (m2) (DuBois equation)
*3 “---” is displayed when PCWP is not measured.

10-3. HEMODYNAMICS WINDOW
Printing the Hemodynamics List
The displayed hemodynamics list is printed by the laser printer. Touch “Print” to
print the hemodynamics list.
On the Hemodynamics List window, the following recordings are available with
the WS-960P Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11. 10
recording
Remote recording: Call recording, Remote delayed recording 10-3

Section 10-4 Arrhythmia Recall
Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.4.2
Displaying the Arrhythmia Recall Window............................................................................................. 10.4.2
Arrhythmia Notice.................................................................................................................................. 10.4.2
File List Window.......................................................................................................................... 10.4.3
Expanded Waveform Window..................................................................................................... 10.4.4
Viewing the Arrhythmia Recall Window........................................................................................................... 10.4.5
Scrolling the List of Arrhythmia Recall Files.......................................................................................... 10.4.5
Sorting the List...................................................................................................................................... 10.4.5
Displaying Expanded Arrhythmia Recall Waveform.............................................................................. 10.4.5
Changing Display Zoom and Sweep Speed............................................................................... 10.4.6
Displaying Another File............................................................................................................... 10.4.6
Changing the Number of Waveforms.......................................................................................... 10.4.6 10
Scrolling Multiple Waveforms...................................................................................................... 10.4.7
Annotation List on the Expanded Waveform Window.................................................................. 10.4.8
Measuring Arrhythmia Recall Waveform with Caliper........................................................................... 10.4.8
Selecting the Measured Waveform (Multiple Waveform Display Only)...................................... 10.4.10
Deleting All Measurement Results............................................................................................ 10.4.10
Ending Caliper Measurement.................................................................................................... 10.4.10
Deleting Arrhythmia Recall Files................................................................................................................... 10.4.11 10-4
Automatic Deletion.............................................................................................................................. 10.4.11
Deleting Unnecessary Arrhythmia Recall Files................................................................................... 10.4.11
Deleting Files with Deletion Marks............................................................................................ 10.4.11
Deleting the File Displayed on the Expanded Waveform Window............................................. 10.4.12
Setting Arrhythmia Recall File Creation......................................................................................................... 10.4.13
Priority of Creating Arrhythmia Recall Files......................................................................................... 10.4.14
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types Displayed on the File List............................................................................ 10.4.15
Recording on the Arrhythmia Recall Window................................................................................................ 10.4.16
Arrhythmia Recall Recording............................................................................................................... 10.4.16
Recording/Printing Displayed Files........................................................................................... 10.4.16
Printing Files with Printing Marks.............................................................................................. 10.4.16
Printing Caliper Measurement Data.................................................................................................... 10.4.17
Other Recordings................................................................................................................................ 10.4.17

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
The list of arrhythmia recall files (date and time the file is created, arrhythmia
event, condensed arrhythmia recall waveform) is displayed on the Arrhythmia
Recall window.
Up to 768 files can be created for the most recent 768 arrhythmias for each bed.
One arrhythmia recall waveform is 8 seconds of ECG waveforms (10 seconds for
some bedside monitors). An arrhythmia recall file is created so that the detected
arrhythmia is displayed in the center of the recall waveform.
NOTE
To create arrhythmia recall files:
• Arrhythmia analysis must be set to ON at the bedside monitor.
• For beds through the multiple patient receiver, arrhythmia analysis must
be set to ON at the central monitor.
• “Recall” must be set to ON on the Arrhythmia Alarm window for the
arrhythmia you want to save as recall files.
• When more than 768 files are already saved and another file is created,
the oldest file is automatically deleted.
Displaying the Arrhythmia Recall Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the
Arrhythmia Recall window for.
3. Touch “Arrhythmia Recall” to display the Arrhythmia Recall window.
Arrhythmia Notice
You can display the Arrhythmia Recall window by touching the arrhythmia
notice icon on the All Beds screen or basic information area.
NOTE
To activate arrhythmia notice, “Alarm/Arrhythmia Notice Icon” must be set
to “Arrhythmia” on the System Configuration window of the System Setup
screen. The factory default setting is Alarm.

10-4. ARRHYTHMIA RECALL WINDOW
Window Description
The waveform can be expanded. You can individually put a deletion mark and/or
printing mark for each file.
File List Window
Printing mark
Touch to sort the list
by printing mark.
Deletion mark Selects arrhythmias

Touch to sort the Arrhythmia recall Touch to sort the list to be displayed on
list by Event. waveform by deletion mark. the list.
File creation
date and time Touch to change Scroll keys
Arrhythmia to another review Touch to scroll
name window. the list.
Touch to sort the
list by arrhythmia
notice mark.
10
10-4
File list Record Print Touch to display the

Arrhythmias selected at Touch to record Print all files with expanded waveform
Displayed Arrhythmias the selected file printing marks with of the selected file.
are displayed here. with the WS-960P the laser printer.
Selected file Recorder Unit. Touch to delete all files or
To select a file, touch the file Touch to delete all set all printing marks off.
at the date and time position. files with a deletion
The selected file is indicated mark.
with a highlighted border.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Expanded Waveform Window

Multi-Wave
Touch to change the zoom and Touch to switch to
sweep speed of the arrhythmia the multi waveform
recall waveform. display.
Arrhythmia recall Annotation
waveform Shows beat label. Caliper measurement result
Lead/
sensitivity
Touch to
delete the
Sweep
displayed
speed
file.
Previous, Next Numeric File information
Touch to display data - Creation date and time Touch to put a Touch to switch to
the previous or next - Compressed waveform deletion mark on the file list window.
file. - Arrhythmia name the displayed file.
Touch to put a
printing mark on
Touch to record the displayed file the displayed file.
with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.

Viewing the Arrhythmia Recall Window
Scrolling the List of Arrhythmia Recall Files

Touch the following keys to scroll the file.
: Scrolls by one file.
Up to 11 file lists are displayed on the regular screen.
Sorting the List

Touch an item on the title bar to sort the list by that item.
• Arrhythmia notice mark Sort by the arrhythmia notice mark
• Date/Time Sort by file creation date and time
• Event Sort by arrhythmia name 10
• Mark to Delete Sort by deletion mark Del or OFF
• Mark to Print Sort by printing mark Prt or OFF
10-4
Displaying Expanded Arrhythmia Recall Waveform

You can display the expanded arrhythmia recall waveform on the grid
background.
Touch the file you want to expand at the “Event” position on the file list.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Touch to return to
the file list window.
By touching “Expanded Waveform” on the Arrhythmia Recall window, you can

also display the expanded waveform of the selected file that is indicated with a
highlighted border.
Changing Display Zoom and Sweep Speed

You can change display zoom and sweep speed for arrhythmia recall waveform.
Zoom: ×1, ×2, ×4
Sweep Speed: 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
1. Touch “Zoom” or “Sweep Speed” to open the setting window.
2. Touch the desired value.
3. Touch the button to close the setting window.
Displaying Another File

Touch “Previous” or “Next” to switch files.
Changing the Number of Waveforms

NOTE
Multiple waveform display is only available when the QP-963P Full
Disclosure Filing Program Kit is installed.

You can select either single waveform display or multiple waveform display on
the Expanded Waveform window. Measurement with caliper are available on
both display types.
To select multiple waveform display, touch “Multi-Wave”. Waveforms displayed

for the multiple waveform display are the same as the displayed waveform
setting on the Full Disclosure window.
Returns to single
waveform display.
10
Multiple waveforms
(10 seconds)
10-4
Scrolling Multiple Waveforms

When multiple waveform display is selected, a 10 second segment of the 16
seconds arrhythmia recall waveform is displayed on a grid background. Touch
the or key to scroll the waveform.
You can also scroll the waveform by touching the desired position on the
condensed arrhythmia recall waveform.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Annotation List on the Expanded Waveform Window
Annotation Meaning
N Normal QRS Complex
S Supraventricular Contraction
V Ventricular Premature Contraction
A Abnormal Beat
E Early VPC
P Paced QRS
QRS which cannot be analyzed because of noise, or
―
QRS which is currently being learned
? QRS which cannot be judged
Annotations are not displayed for some beds depending on the bedside monitor
type.
Measuring Arrhythmia Recall Waveform with Caliper

NOTE
Caliper measurement results are saved only when measuring on a
central monitor where the bed’s data is saved. When measuring on a
central monitor where the bed’s data is not saved, the “Caliper information
is not saved” message appears on the screen.
On the expanded waveform window, you can measure the distance between any
two points on an arrhythmia recall waveform.
1. Expand the arrhythmia recall waveform.
2. Touch the key of the measurement item you want to measure.
Measured
Item Direction Unit
waveform
R-R R-R: ms
(HR is also displayed) HR: /min
P-R
Horizontal
QRS-WIDTH
ms ECG
Q-WIDTH
Q-T
ST
Vertical mV
Q-HEIGHT
PR Horizontal /min
Amplitude
IBP (SYS/DIA)
SYS/DIA Vertical mmHg
measurement
PR Horizontal /min
IBP (MEAN)
Amplitude Vertical mmHg
PR PR
/min
RR
Horizontal
Inspired time
ms Respiration
Expired time
wave (Gas)
I:E (measurement
–– ––
value)

Measured
Item Direction Unit
waveform
Inspired pressure
(concentration) Respiration
Vertical mmHg
Expired pressure wave (Gas)
(concentration)
RR /min
Inspired time Horizontal
msec Respiration
Expired time
wave (Others)
I:E (measurement
value) –– ––
None Others
NOTE
• “SYS/DIA measurement” selects the highest and lowest point of the
waveform.
• “I:E (measurement value)” is a calculation value. When the inspired time
and expired time is measured, inspired time is “1”.
• Select either one of the Inspired pressure (concentration) or Expired
pressure (concentration).
10
3. Touch any two points on the waveform. A line appears between the two
points and the vertical or horizontal distance between the two points is
displayed. To continuously measure another distance, touch any two points
on the waveform. The previous measurement result disappears and the new
measurement result is displayed.
NOTE 10-4
• The line and measurement result on the waveform are lost when you
exit the caliper measurement mode.
• If you change the following settings during caliper measurement, the
line and measured value are deleted.
- Display zoom
- Sweep speed
- Measured waveform

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Selecting the Measured Waveform (Multiple Waveform Display Only)

1. Touch the key at “Measured Waveform” to open the setting window.
2. Touch the key of the waveform you want to measure.
Deleting All Measurement Results

Touch “Clear” to delete all measurement results.
Ending Caliper Measurement

Touch the currently selected key in the Caliper Measurement table to end caliper
measurement.
Measured values are saved and remain in the table unless they are deleted.
NOTE

Deleting Arrhythmia Recall Files
Automatic Deletion
Up to 768 files can be created for each bed. When more than 768 files are
created, the oldest file is automatically deleted.
Deleting Unnecessary Arrhythmia Recall Files

You can select and delete unnecessary arrhythmia recall files.
NOTE
Deletion of arrhythmia recall files can only be performed at the central
monitor where the bed’s data are saved. The “Delete” and “Mark to
Delete” are not available (dim) on the screen of the central monitors which
do not save the bed’s data.
Deleting Files with Deletion Marks 10

You can mark files you want to delete, then delete all the marked files together.
1. Do one of the following to add a deletion mark to files you want to delete.
• Touch the file on the file list window. Then, under “Mark to Delete”, touch
“OFF” for each file you want to delete. The key changes to “Del”.
10-4
• Display the file on the expanded waveform window and touch “Mark to
Delete”.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. On the file list window, touch “Delete”. A message window to confirm

deletion appears.
3. Touch “Yes”. All files with a deletion mark are deleted. To cancel deletion,
touch “No”.
You can touch “Mark to Delete All Off” to cancel all delete marks.
Deleting the File Displayed on the Expanded Waveform Window

You can delete the file whose expanded waveform is displayed on the expanded
waveform window.
1. Display the file on the expanded waveform window.
2. Touch “Delete” on the expanded waveform window. A message window to

confirm deletion appears.
3. Touch “Yes”. The file displayed on the Expanded Waveform window is

deleted. To cancel deletion, touch “No”.

Setting Arrhythmia Recall File Creation
You can select whether to create arrhythmia recall files individually for each
arrhythmia type on the Arrhythmia Alarm window of the Personal Setup. Set
“Recall” to “ON” to create recall files for the arrhythmia.
Every touch toggles between ON and OFF.
10
10-4

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Priority of Creating Arrhythmia Recall Files

If several arrhythmias occur while creating an arrhythmia recall file, a recall file
is created according to the priority shown below.
Message Meaning
ASYSTOLE Asystole
V FIB Ventricular fibrillation
V TACHY Ventricular tachycardia
EXT TACHY Extreme tachycardia
EXT BRADY Extreme bradycardia
VPC RUN VPC short run
V BRADY* Ventricular bradycardia
SV TACHY* Supraventricular tachycardia
TACHYCARDIA Tachycardia
BRADYCARDIA Bradycardia
PAUSE* Pause
COUPLET VPC couplet (Paired VPCs)
EARLY VPC Early VPC
MULTI FORM Multi-form ECG
V RHYTHM* Ventricular rhythm
BIGEMINY Ventricular bigeminy
TRIGEMINY* Ventricular trigeminy
VPC Ventricular premature contraction
IRREGULAR RR* Irregular RR
PROLONGED RR Prolonged R-R interval
NO PACER PULSE* Oversensing
PACER NON-CAPTURE* Non-capture
* These arrhythmias become available when “Extended” is selected for

Arrhythmia Type on the SYSTEM SETUP screen. Refer to Section 7-1
“Changing the System Setup Screen Settings for Administrator” of the

Selecting the Arrhythmia Types Displayed on the File List
Select the arrhythmia types to display recall files on the file list window.
Touch the arrhythmia key of the desired arrhythmia type. Every touch toggles
between selected and unselected.
Touch “ALL” to select all arrhythmia types. If you touch “ALL” again, all
arrhythmia types become unselected.
10
10-4

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording on the Arrhythmia Recall Window
Arrhythmia Recall Recording

Recording/Printing Displayed Files
Regardless of whether a file has a printing mark, you can record or print a
selected file.
With the WS-960P Recorder Unit

There are two ways to record.
• On the file list window, touch the or key to select a file you want to
record, and then touch “Record”.
• Display the waveform you want to record on the Expanded Waveform window.
To record with the WS-960P Recorder Unit, touch “Record”. When multiple
waveform display is selected, the top two waveforms are recorded.
With the laser printer

Display the waveform you want to record on the Expanded Waveform window
and touch “Print”. When multiple waveform display is selected, all waveforms
on the Expanded Waveform window are printed.
Printing Files with Printing Marks

With the laser printer you can print all the files with printing marks at the same
time. Up to 12 printing marks can be set.
1. Add a printing mark to every file you want to print by either of the following
methods.
• Under “Mark to Print”, touch “OFF” for each file you want to print on the
file list window. The key changes to “Prt”.
• Display the file on the expanded waveform window and touch “Mark to
Print”.

Touch “Mark to Print All Off” to set all the printing marks off.
2. On the file list window, touch “Print”.
Printing Caliper Measurement Data

You can print caliper measurement results with the laser printer.
1. Do caliper measurement.
10
2. Touch “Print”. The displayed arrhythmia recall waveform and its caliper
measurement data are printed.

10-4
NOTE
When you use the printing marks to print many files at the same time,
caliper measurement results are also printed.
Other Recordings
On the Arrhythmia Recall window, the following recordings are available with
the WS-960P Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11.
recording

Section 10-5 ST Recall Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.5.2
Displaying the ST Recall Window.......................................................................................................... 10.5.2
Viewing the ST Recall Window........................................................................................................................ 10.5.4
Scrolling the ST Recall Files................................................................................................................. 10.5.4
Scrolling the ST Waveform.................................................................................................................... 10.5.4
Changing ST Recall Window Display Settings................................................................................................ 10.5.5
Setting the Display Position of the ST Waveform.................................................................................. 10.5.5
Changing Sensitivity.............................................................................................................................. 10.5.6
Setting ST Analysis Method.................................................................................................................. 10.5.6
Changing the Interval............................................................................................................................ 10.5.6
Recording on the ST Recall Window............................................................................................................... 10.5.7
ST Recall Recording............................................................................................................................. 10.5.7 10
Recording a Selected File........................................................................................................... 10.5.7
Printing Files............................................................................................................................... 10.5.7
Other Recordings.................................................................................................................................. 10.5.7
10-5

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
The ST Recall window displays ST recall files. ST recall files are created at
every preset interval. Maximum 4320 files can be saved.
CAUTION
• Although the ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST
analysis result, the significance of the ST level changes need to be
determined only by a physician.
• The ECG from the transmitter other than ZM series is not
processed by a 3.2 second time constant filter. Therefore, the ST
level measurement is not designed to be accurate enough for
diagnosis. Do not rely on this ST level measurement.
NOTE
When 4320 files are already saved and another file is created, the oldest
file is automatically deleted.
Displaying the ST Recall Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the ST
Recall window of.
3. Touch “ST Recall” to display the ST Recall window.

10-5. ST RECALL WINDOW
Window Description
The ST Recall window displays date and time of file storage, heart rate, ST
waveform and ST value for each lead. Up to seven files are displayed at the same
time.
ST recall waveform Selected file

One waveform is about 0.6 seconds. The selected file is indicated
Waveforms up to 12 leads are saved. File stored date and time. with a highlighted border.
Touch to change the ST Touch to change to Touch to scroll the

recall waveform sensitivity. ST value Lead Heart rate another review window. ST waveforms.
10
Printing mark Time bar Touch to scroll the file list.

10-5
Touch to set the all the Touch to record a selected Touch to print all files with
printing marks off. file with the WS-960P a printing mark with the
Recorder Unit. laser printer.
Touch to set a lead of ST
recall waveform.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Viewing the ST Recall Window
Scrolling the ST Recall Files

ST recall files can be scrolled left or right to display older or newer ST
waveforms.
Touch the following keys to scroll the file list.

You can also scroll the file list by touching the time bar.
Scrolling the ST Waveform

ST waveforms of maximum 12 leads are saved per one file.
Scroll the window up or down to display other leads.
Touch the or key to scroll the ST waveform vertically.

Changing ST Recall Window Display Settings
Setting the Display Position of the ST Waveform

You can set the display position of the lead of ST waveforms.
1. Touch “Lead Display Position” to display the setting window.
2. Select the lead by touching the desired lead key in “Position” and select the
desired lead in “Lead”. The lead display position is changed.
10
Touch NONE to unselect

the selected items.
10-5

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing Sensitivity
You can change the sensitivity of the displayed ST waveform. Touch in the “ST
Sens” to change the sensitivity.
Setting ST Analysis Method

For the RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver, you can set the ST
analysis point on the ECG window of the Parameter Setup. Refer to Section 12.
Changing the Interval

For the RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver, the ST recall file storage
(displaying) interval can be changed on the ECG window of the Parameter
Setup. Refer to Section 12. For other bedside monitors, the interval is fixed to
one minute.

Recording on the ST Recall Window
ST Recall Recording
Recording a Selected File
To record a file with the WS-960P Recorder Unit, touch the file and touch
“Record”.
Printing Files
NOTE
Up to 24 printing marks can be set.
To print files with the laser printer:
1. Touch “Mark to Print” on all files you want to print. A printing mark appears 10
at each selected file.
2. Touch “Print”. All marked files are printed.

10-5
Other Recordings
On the ST Recall window, the following recordings are available with the WS-
960P Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11.
recording

Section 10-6 Full Disclosure Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.6.2
Displaying the Full Disclosure Screen................................................................................................... 10.6.2
Zoom Display.............................................................................................................................. 10.6.3
Expanded Waveform Display (Actual Size Display).................................................................... 10.6.4
Stored Waveforms and Displayed Waveforms............................................................................ 10.6.5
Display Color............................................................................................................................... 10.6.5
Triangle Waveform....................................................................................................................... 10.6.6
Viewing the Full Disclosure Window................................................................................................................ 10.6.6
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform................................................................................................. 10.6.6
Automatic Scroll.......................................................................................................................... 10.6.6
Changing the Sensitivity and Scale....................................................................................................... 10.6.7
Changing the Number of Displayed Waveforms.................................................................................... 10.6.7 10
Changing the Scaling of the Full Disclosure Waveform......................................................................... 10.6.7
Zooming In and Out the Full Disclosure Waveform..................................................................... 10.6.7
Expanding the Full Disclosure Waveform into Actual Size........................................................ 10.6.10
Changing Display Zoom and Sweep Speed............................................................................. 10.6.10
Measuring a Full Disclosure Waveform with the Calipers................................................................... 10.6.11
Selecting the Measured Waveform........................................................................................... 10.6.12
Deleting All Measurement Results............................................................................................ 10.6.12
Ending Caliper Measurement.................................................................................................... 10.6.13
Changing the Stored Waveforms................................................................................................................... 10.6.14
Using the Stored Wave Master............................................................................................................ 10.6.15 10-6
Changing the Stored Wave Master........................................................................................... 10.6.15
Changing the Full Disclosure Window Display.............................................................................................. 10.6.16
Changing the Displayed Waveforms.................................................................................................... 10.6.16
Recording on the Full Disclosure Window..................................................................................................... 10.6.17
Full Disclosure Waveform Printing....................................................................................................... 10.6.17
Recording/Printing Expanded Waveform............................................................................................. 10.6.17

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
NOTE
• The Full Disclosure window is only available when the QP-963P Full
Disclosure Filing Program Kit is installed.
• When you open the Full Disclosure window from another review
window, the full disclosure data of the time that was displayed on the
previous review window is displayed.
The central monitor saves up to 72 hours of full disclosure waveform for

each bed. You can select up to six parameters from the current measurement
parameters and the parameters selected on the Parameters window of the System
Setup screen.
Displaying the Full Disclosure Screen

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the Full
Disclosure window for.
3. Touch “Full Disclosure” to display the Full Disclosure window.

10-6. FULL DISCLOSURE WINDOW
Window Description
The Full Disclosure window displays full disclosure waveform for up to six
parameters. The displayed time length depends on the number of displayed
waveforms.
Zoom Display
Touch to change to another Date and time at the top Cursor

review window. of the cursor When “Expanded Waveform”
Sensitivity and scale is touched, waveforms on the
Date and time Parameter Display time
cursor position is expanded.
at the top of and lead Display time length length of
the waveform of the window one line
Select the displayed

waveforms and
the sensitivity and
scale.
Select whether
to display one
parameter or all 10
selected parameters.
Touch to zoom
in or out on the
full disclosure
waveform at the
cursor position.
Touch to scroll Touch to display the data Set to ON to Touch to expand waveforms
waveforms. of the touched time. automatically scroll at the cursor position.
waveforms. 10-6
When you touch on the Touch to print the full disclosure
screen, the waveform on waveforms displayed on the Select the stored waveforms.
the touched position is screen by the laser printer.
expanded.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Expanded Waveform Display (Actual Size Display)
Expanded waveform Caliper measurement Select the zoom and sweep speed
(10 seconds) results of the expanded waveform.
Date and time
Sensitivity
Parameter
and lead
Sweep speed
Zoom Touch to record the displayed expanded Touch to change to

waveforms displayed on the screen by the Zoom display.
the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
Select the measurement
Touch to print the expanded waveforms waveform for caliper
displayed on the screen by the laser printer. measurement.

Stored Waveforms and Displayed Waveforms

• Stored waveforms are the waveforms to be saved as full disclosure data. You
can select up to 6 parameters from all of the currently measured parameters
and the parameters selected on the Parameters window of the System Setup
screen. You can select stored waveforms only at the central monitor where the
• Displayed waveforms are the waveforms to be displayed on the Full Disclosure
window. Select the displayed waveforms from the stored waveforms.
• If you change the stored waveform setting during monitoring, a confirmation
window opens to ask you if you want to change the displayed waveform
settings to the same as the stored waveform settings. The selectable displayed
waveforms also change before and after the stored waveform settings are
changed.
Display Color
When an arrhythmia alarm is not generating, the full disclosure waveform is
displayed in the color selected for each type of waveform at the Parameter
Colors window of the System Setup screen. However, when an arrhythmia alarm
is generated, the ECG waveforms are displayed in the corresponding arrhythmia
10
alarm color as specified in the table below.
Arrhythmia Alarm ECG Waveform Color

ASYSTOLE
V.FIB
V.TACHY Red
EXT TACHY
EXT BRADY
V BRADY
SV TACHY
TACHYCARDIA Orange
BRADYCARDIA
PAUSE 10-6
VPC RUN
COUPLET
EARLY VPC
MULTIFORM
V RHYTHM
BIGEMINY
TRIGEMINY Yellow
FREQ VPC
VPC
IRREGULAR RR
PROLONGED RR
NO PACER PULSE
PACER NON-CAPTURE
NOTE
When arrhythmia analysis is set to OFF, the display color does not
change.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Triangle Waveform
Triangle waves are displayed in the following situations.
• No communication between the central monitor and bedside monitor. (The
bedside monitor is turned off, or the bedside monitor is not connected to the
central monitor.)
• Signal loss
• Electrodes off
• The parameter is not measured.
• Before the patient is admitted.
• During monitoring is paused.
• The waveform was not selected as a storage waveform.
Viewing the Full Disclosure Window
CAUTION
When the full disclosure waveform is expanded in actual size, the
steep slant such as QRS may be distorted because it has been
compressed then expanded. When reading the expanded ECG
waveforms, be aware of this distortion.
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform

Touch the following keys to scroll the waveform.
: Scrolls by two seconds*
* For the actual size waveform, scrolls by one second.
You can also scroll the waveform by touching the time bar.
Automatic Scroll
This function scrolls by one page every three seconds.
1. Touch “ON” at “Automatic Scroll” to activate the automatic scroll function.
2. Touch the or key to start scrolling.
3. When the desired waveform appears on the window, touch “OFF” at

“Automatic Scroll” to stop scrolling.
NOTE
• If you do any key operation other than touching the or key while
automatic scroll function is ON, the function automatically turns to OFF.
• When you scroll up to the oldest or newest data, scroll automatically stops.

Changing the Sensitivity and Scale

Select the sensitivity and scale on the Zoom Display window and Expanded
Waveform window.
1. Touch the setting value key of the item you want to change the sensitivity
and scale. The setting window opens.
2. Touch the desired value. The changed sensitivity and scale settings take
effect at this moment.
Changing the Number of Displayed Waveforms

Select whether to display single waveform or all waveforms on the Zoom
Display window and Expanded Waveform window. Touch “Single Wave” or “All
Waves” key.
10
Changing the Scaling of the Full Disclosure Waveform
Zooming In and Out the Full Disclosure Waveform
You can zoom in and out the waveform display in five steps without changing the
cursor position. Touch “Zoom In” and “Zoom Out” to change the magnification.
Zoom In: Waveform display is larger. Display time length is shorter.
Zoom Out: Waveform display is smaller. Display time length is longer.
10-6

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
From the left:

Date and time of full disclosure
waveform top, Date and time of the
cursor top, Display time length of the
window, Display time length of one line
The zoom scale of the maximum

zoom in is the same as the zoom scale
on the Expanded Waveform window.

Display time length varies according to the number of displayed waveforms.
Normal Individual Bed Window

When the number of displayed waveforms is 1
Display time length Display time length (1 line) and the
(1 window) number of lines
24 min 90 sec × 16 lines (1 waveform × 16)

1 min 20 sec 20 sec × 8 lines (2 waveform × 4)
30 sec 10 sec × 6 lines (2 waveform × 3)

10

3 min 60 sec × 12 lines (4 waveform × 3) 10-6



10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Expanding the Full Disclosure Waveform into Actual Size

The full disclosure waveform at the cursor position is expanded and redrawn on
a grid background.
To expand the waveform, touch the full disclosure waveform where you want
to expand. The cursor moves to the touched point and the expanded waveform
appears on the grid background.
Cursor
Touch to change to the Zoom display.
Changing Display Zoom and Sweep Speed

On the Expanded Waveform window, you can change display zoom and sweep
speed.
Zoom: ×1, ×2, ×4
Sweep speed: 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
1. Touch “Zoom” or “Sweep speed” to open the setting window.
2. Touch the desired value.

Measuring a Full Disclosure Waveform with the Calipers

NOTE
On the Expanded Waveform window, you can measure the distance between any
two points on full disclosure waveform.
1. Expand any part of the full disclosure waveform.
2. Touch the key of the measurement item you want to measure.
Measured
Item Direction Unit
waveform
R-R R-R: ms
(HR is also displayed) HR: /min
P-R
Horizontal
QRS-WIDTH
ms ECG 10
Q-WIDTH
Q-T
ST
Vertical mV
Q-HEIGHT
PR Horizontal /min
Amplitude
IBP (SYS/DIA)
SYS/DIA Vertical mmHg
measurement
PR Horizontal /min
IBP (MEAN)
Amplitude Vertical mmHg
PR PR
/min 10-6
RR
Horizontal
Inspired time
ms
Expired time
I:E (measurement
–– –– Respiration
value)
wave (Gas)
Inspired pressure
(concentration)
Vertical mmHg
Expired pressure
(concentration)
RR /min
Inspired time Horizontal
msec Respiration
Expired time
wave (Others)
I:E (measurement
value) –– ––
None Others
NOTE
• “SYS/DIA measurement” selects the highest and lowest point of the
waveform.
• “I:E (measurement value)” is a calculation value. When the inspired time
and expired time is measured, inspired time is “1”.
• Select either one of the Inspired pressure (concentration) or Expired
pressure (concentration).
10. REVIEW WINDOWS
3. Touch any two points on the waveform. A line appears between two points
and the vertical or horizontal distance of the two points is displayed.
To continuously measure another distance, touch any two points on the
waveform.
The previous measurement result disappears and the new measurement result
is displayed.
NOTE
• The line and measured value on the waveform are lost when you exit
the caliper measurement mode.
• If you change the following settings during caliper measurement, the
line and measured value on the window are deleted.
- Display zoom
- Sweep speed
- Measured waveform
Selecting the Measured Waveform

Select either waveform to be measured.
1. Touch the key at “Measured Waveform” to open the Select Meas. Waveform
window.
2. Touch the key of the waveform you want to measure.
Deleting All Measurement Results

Touch “Clear” to delete all measurement results.

Ending Caliper Measurement

Touch the key of the currently selected measurement item to end caliper
measurement. Measured values are saved and remain in the table unless they are
deleted.
NOTE
10
10-6

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the Stored Waveforms
NOTE
This setting is only available at the central monitor where the bed’s data is
stored.
You can select which waveforms will be stored in the full disclosure file.
Only the current measurement parameters and the parameters selected on the
Parameter window of the System Setup screen can be selected. You can select up
to 6 waveforms.
1. Touch “Stored Waves” to display the Stored Waves window.
2. After you select a key at “Stored Waves”, touch the key of waveform you
want to store from the options displayed at “Available Waves”.
Touch to use the stored wave master.
Touch NONE to unselect the selected items. Cancel changed

settings.
Touch to automatically select parameters from
the current measurement parameters according to
the parameter priority for the bed.
In the options, current measurement waveforms are displayed. To select a

waveform that is not currently measured, first register the parameter at the
Parameters window of the System Setup screen.
3. Touch the button to close the window. The confirmation window opens
to ask you if you want to change the parameters to be displayed on the Full
Disclosure window to the same as the stored waveform settings.
4. Touch “Yes” or “No” to close the confirmation window. The stored

waveforms change at this point.

Using the Stored Wave Master

You can select up to 6 parameters for stored waveforms and save them as a group
of preset settings. This is called a stored wave master and helps you quickly set
the stored waveform settings. Three masters are available.
To select the stored waveforms by copying the master, touch “Master 1 Waves”,
“Master 2 Waves” or “Master 3 Waves” on the Stored Waves window. You can
change individual settings after copying the master.
10
You can select whether or not to copy stored wave master 1 to a bed when the
bed is discharged or the bed’s data is deleted. Refer to “Copying Settings for a
Bed to Other Beds” in Section 7-2 of Administrator’s Guide.
Changing the Stored Wave Master

You can set the stored wave master on the Master window of the System Setup
screen. You can select any parameters which can be displayed on the central
monitor, regardless of each bed’s monitoring environment. Refer to Section 7-1,
Administrator’s Guide. 10-6

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the Full Disclosure Window Display
Changing the Displayed Waveforms

Select the waveforms to be displayed on the Full Disclosure window from the
stored waveforms.
1. Touch the key of the item you want to change. The Displayed Waves
window opens.
2. Touch the key of the parameter you want to display.
Parameters selected for the stored

waveforms are displayed.
Touch NONE
to unselect all
items.

Recording on the Full Disclosure Window
Full Disclosure Waveform Printing

With the laser printer, you can print the full disclosure waveform displayed on
the Zoom Display window.
Printing on ��
the��
Normal Individual Bed Window –��
�� Zoom
��
Display
No. of Displayed Waveforms Length of Printed Waveform
1 waveform 30 minutes
2 waveforms 15 minutes
The printed time length depends on the number of waveforms displayed on the
screen. The printed waveform is from the currently displayed time to the past.
10
When the display is zoomed in to the utmost, all the displayed waveforms are
printed in the same format as the printing of the Expanded Waveform window.
To print, touch “Print” on the Full Disclosure - Zoom Display window.
To cancel printing during printing, touch “Print Stop”. 10-6
Recording/Printing Expanded Waveform

You can record or print the expanded waveform on the window.
With the WS-960P Recorder Unit

Touch “Record” on the Expanded Waveform window. When three or more
waveforms are on the window, the top two waveforms are recorded.
With the laser printer

The printed time length depends on the number of waveforms displayed on the
screen. When two or more waveforms are displayed, all waveforms are printed.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
No. of displayed waveforms Length of printed waveforms

1 waveform The displayed 10 second waveform plus 10
seconds before and to 20 seconds after (total
40 seconds)
2 waveforms The displayed 10 second waveform plus 10
seconds before (total of 20 seconds)
More than 3 waveforms The displayed 10 second waveform of each
parameter
To print with the laser printer, touch “Print”.
Other Recordings
On the Full Disclosure window, the following recordings are available with the
recording

Section 10-7 ECG 12 Lead Analysis
Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.7.2
Displaying the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window..................................................................................... 10.7.2
Tabular Trend Display.................................................................................................................. 10.7.3
Zoom In (Expanded Waveform) Display...................................................................................... 10.7.4
Comparison Display.................................................................................................................... 10.7.4
Analysis Report Display.............................................................................................................. 10.7.5
Viewing the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window................................................................................................... 10.7.6
Changing the Display Types.................................................................................................................. 10.7.6
Tabular Trend Display.................................................................................................................. 10.7.6
Zoom In (Expanded Waveform) Display...................................................................................... 10.7.6
Comparison Display.................................................................................................................... 10.7.7
Analysis Report Display.............................................................................................................. 10.7.7 10
Scrolling the Files in the Measurement Value Table.............................................................................. 10.7.7
Selecting the Displayed File.................................................................................................................. 10.7.7
Selecting the Reference File................................................................................................................. 10.7.8
Switching Displayed Waveform Types................................................................................................... 10.7.8
Deleting ECG 12 Lead Analysis Files.............................................................................................................. 10.7.9
Automatic Deletion................................................................................................................................ 10.7.9
Deleting Unnecessary ECG 12 Lead Analysis Files............................................................................. 10.7.9
Recording on the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window........................................................................................ 10.7.10
10-7

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
NOTE
This window is only available when the QP-964P 12 Lead ECG
Interpretation Filing Program Kit is installed.
The ECG 12 Lead Analysis window displays the results of ECG 12 lead analysis
performed at bedside monitors. Up to 64 files can be saved for each bed at the
central monitor.
Displaying the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the ECG 12
Lead Analysis window of.
3. Touch “ECG 12 Lead Analysis” to display the ECG 12 Lead Analysis

window.

10-7. ECG 12 LEAD ANALYSIS WINDOW
Window Description
The results of ECG 12 lead analysis performed at bedside monitors are
displayed. The ECG 12 Lead Analysis window has four display types.
Tabular Trend Display

Measurement Value Table
Maximum 4 files are displayed at a
time. Waveforms of the selected file Displays either analysis waveforms or Touch to switch analysis
are displayed on the right window. averaged waveforms of the file selected waveform display and
in the measurement value table. averaged waveform display.
Touch to change to Selected file
another review window. Indicated by Analysis date
highlighted border. Lead and time Gender Age
Reference
file 10
Scroll files in
the table.
Touch to delete the Touch to print the

selected file in the table. waveforms displayed
on the screen by the
Touch to switch Touch to select a file laser printer.
display types. as the reference file.
10-7

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Zoom In (Expanded Waveform) Display

Displays the measurement values of the file whose waveform is
currently displayed on the right window.
Comparison Display
Reference file Selected file

Analysis Report Display

Displays the measurement values of the file whose report is
currently displayed on the right window.
Findings
Signature of the physician who reviewed 10

the analysis report is necessary.
10-7

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Viewing the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window
NOTE
For details about the analysis and the clinical findings, refer to the ECAPS
12C Program User’s Guide.
Changing the Display Types

Touch the key of the desired display type.
On the regular screen, you can display any display type.
Touch the key of the

desired display type.
Zoom In (Expanded Waveform) Display


Comparison Display

Analysis Report Display
10

10-7
Scrolling the Files in the Measurement Value Table

Touch the following keys to scroll files on the measurement value table. By
touching the scroll bar, you can jump to the desired file at that time range.
Selecting the Displayed File

Touch a file on the measurement value table.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Selecting the Reference File

A reference file is a file that is used as the standard when you compare two
analysis results on the Comparison display. The reference file is displayed on the
left window on the Comparison display.
To select a reference file,

1. Touch the desired file on the measurement value table.
2. Touch “Reference File Setting”. The selected file becomes the reference file.
Switching Displayed Waveform Types

You can select whether to display analysis waveforms or averaged waveforms on
the Tabular Trend display, Zoom In display and Comparison display. Every touch
of “Change Disp.” toggles between the two types.
Analysis waveforms
Averaged waveforms

Deleting ECG 12 Lead Analysis Files
Automatic Deletion
Up to 64 files can be saved for each bed at the central monitor. When there are
already 64 files saved and a new file is created at the bedside monitor, the oldest
file is automatically deleted at the central monitor.
Deleting Unnecessary ECG 12 Lead Analysis Files

You can select and delete unnecessary ECG 12 lead analysis files.
NOTE
Deletion of ECG 12 lead analysis files can only be performed at the
central monitor where the bed’s data are saved. The “Delete” key is not
available (dim) on the screen of the central monitors which do not save
the bed’s data.
10
1. Change the display type to Tabular Trend display.
2. Touch the file you want to delete in the measurement value table.
Cursor
Indicates the selected
file.
10-7
Scroll files
in the table.
3. Touch “Delete”. A confirmation window to delete the file opens.
4. Touch “Yes” to delete the selected file. To cancel deletion, touch “No”.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording on the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window
You can print the displayed ECG 12 lead analysis result with the laser printer.
Printed items are different depending on the display types.
Display Format Print Format

Analysis waveforms Analysis waveforms
Averaged waveforms Report + Averaged waveforms
Analysis waveforms Analysis waveform
Zoom In Display
Averaged waveforms Report + Averaged waveforms
Comparison — Cannot be printed
Analysis Report — Report + Analysis waveforms
1. Change display types and waveform types (analysis waveforms or averaged

waveforms) to the desired type.
2. Touch “Print”.
Other Recordings
On the ECG 12 Lead Analysis window, the following recordings are available
with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11.
recording

Section 10-8 Alarm History Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.8.2
Displaying the Alarm History Window................................................................................................... 10.8.2
Alarm Notice.......................................................................................................................................... 10.8.2
Viewing the Alarm History Window.................................................................................................................. 10.8.4
Scrolling the Alarm History Files........................................................................................................... 10.8.4
Sorting the List...................................................................................................................................... 10.8.4
Selecting the Alarm Levels and Types Displayed on the File List.................................................................... 10.8.5
Printing the Alarm History............................................................................................................................... 10.8.6
Alarm History Printing........................................................................................................................... 10.8.6
Printing a Selected File............................................................................................................... 10.8.6
10
10-8

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
The lists of all alarms such as arrhythmia alarm, vital sign alarm, ST alarm and
technical alarm on monitored beds are displayed on the Alarm History window.
The most recent 5000 files can be saved for each bed.
NOTE
• Alarm History window is only available at the central monitor where the
• When more than 5000 files are created for the patient, the oldest file of
the patient is automatically deleted to create new files.
• IBP (SYS/DIA/MEAN) technical alarms are treated as one file and
displayed on the Alarm History window as one file.
Displaying the Alarm History Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the Alarm
History window of.
3. Touch “Alarm History” to display the Alarm History window.
Alarm Notice
You can display the Alarm History window by touching the alarm notice icon on
the All Beds screen or basic information area.
NOTE
To activate alarm notice, “Alarm/Arrhythmia Notice Icon” must be set to
“Alarm” on the System Configuration window of the System Setup screen.
The factory default setting is “Alarm”.

10-8. ALARM HISTORY WINDOW
Window Description
The Alarm History window displays file lists such as report creation date and
time, alarm levels, parameters and descriptions.
You can switch the file list by alarm levels and alarm types.
Date and time (Duration) Level Parameter Description
Touch to change to
Touch to change the
Touch to sort the list. another review window.
alarm level or type.
10
Alarm notice
Cursor Scroll bar Touch to print the list Scroll keys
mark
with the laser printer. Touch to scroll the list.
NOTE
When you display the Arrhythmia Recall window from the Alarm History
window and the cursor on the Alarm History window is at a file whose
parameter is “Arrhythmia” on the Arrhythmia Recall window, the cursor
appears at the file with the nearest clock time to the selected file on the
Alarm History window, regardless of the arrhythmia type.
10-8

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Viewing the Alarm History Window
Scrolling the Alarm History Files

Touch the following keys to scroll the file.

You can also scroll the file by touching the time bar.
Up to 15 files are displayed on the regular screen.
Sorting the List

Touch an item on the title bar to sort the list.
• Alarm notice mark Sort by alarm notice mark
• Date/Time (Duration) Sort by file creation date and time
• Level Sort by alarm level (CRISIS, WARNING, ADVISORY)
• Parameter Sort in the following order
1. Arrhythmia alarm
2. Alarms related to ECG
3. Alarms of parameters in priority
4. Alarms not corresponding to parameters

10-8. ALARM HISTORY WINDOW
Selecting the Alarm Levels and Types Displayed on the File List
Select the alarm levels or types whose alarm history is displayed on the file list
window. Every touch toggles between selected and unselected.
Touch “All” to select all alarm levels or all alarm types. If you touch “All” again,
all alarm levels or all alarm types become unselected.
10
10-8

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing the Alarm History
Alarm History Printing

Printing a Selected File
To print a file with the laser printer, touch “Print”.
Other Recordings
On the Alarm History window, the following recordings are available with the
recording

Section 10-9 Alarm Events Window
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 10.9.2
Displaying the Alarm Events Window.................................................................................................... 10.9.2
From the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window............................................................................. 10.9.2
From the Menu Window.............................................................................................................. 10.9.2
Technical Icon........................................................................................................................................ 10.9.3
Action Message..................................................................................................................................... 10.9.3
Window Description......................................................................................................................................... 10.9.4
Display Type: Limit + Technical.................................................................................................... 10.9.4
Display Type: Arrhythmia + Technical.......................................................................................... 10.9.4
Viewing the Alarm Events Window.................................................................................................................. 10.9.5
Scrolling the Alarm Events.................................................................................................................... 10.9.5
Moving the Cursor................................................................................................................................. 10.9.5
Viewing Other Review Windows of the Selected Time.......................................................................... 10.9.5 10
Changing the Displayed Alarm Type..................................................................................................... 10.9.5
Zooming In and Out on Alarm Events................................................................................................... 10.9.6
Displaying a Multi Patient Alarms Window............................................................................................ 10.9.6
Changing the Alarm Events Window Display Settings.................................................................................... 10.9.7
Setting Items......................................................................................................................................... 10.9.8
Alarm Limit/Technical.................................................................................................................. 10.9.8
Arrhythmia/Technical................................................................................................................... 10.9.8
Printing the Alarm Events................................................................................................................................ 10.9.9
Alarm Events Printing............................................................................................................................ 10.9.9
10-9

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
The Alarm Events window displays up to 72 hours of alarm events for one
patient. The most recent 5000 files are saved as an alarm history. Two alarm
types can be displayed in the Alarm Events window: technical alarm events and
either limits or arrhythmia alarm events.
NOTE
• The Alarm Events window is only available at the central monitor where
the bed’s data is saved.
• After 5000 files are created for the patient, the oldest file of the patient
is automatically deleted to create a new file.
Displaying the Alarm Events Window

From the Multi Patient Alarm Events Window
Touch a bed to view its individual alarm events window.
From the Menu Window
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to display the Alarm
Events window of.
3. Touch “Alarm Events” to display the Alarm Events window.

10-9. ALARM EVENTS WINDOW
Technical Icon
ECG or SpO2 technical icons can be displayed on the All Beds screen when
the ECG or SpO2 technical status become yellow or red on the Alarm Events
window.
When a technical icon is touched, the Alarm Events window and action message
for the icon are displayed.
Technical icon
Refer to Section 5 “Technical Icon” for detail.
NOTE
To display the technical icons, Technical Icon on the Display Setting of
the Monitor Setting in the System Setup screen must be set to On. The
default setting is Off. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
Action Message
When ECG or SpO2 technical status become yellow or red on the All Beds screen
and display the Alarm Events window, an action message is displayed on the
Alarm Events window. 10
Action message The cause of action message is 10-9

When Yes is touched, the technical icon and action shaded.
message disappear. When No is touched, the message
disappear but the icon is displayed continuously.
When Yes is touched on the action message window, the past technical alarms
are cleared and technical status becomes green.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Window Description
All alarm events of one patient is displayed on one screen. Each alarm event is
displayed in the color corresponding to its alarm level.
You can display 1, 8, 24 or 72 hours of alarm events.
Display Type: Limit + Technical
Touch to open a Multi

Number of alarms Alarm types keys
Patient Alarms window.
Date and time at left Date and time Selects the displayed
Event name end of the graph at the cursor Cursor alarm types.
Scroll key Time bar Alarm event Print Zoom in/Zoom out
Touch to scroll the Each alarm event is the Prints the displayed Show a longer or
trendgraph. color for its alarm level. alarm events on a laser shorter period of
printer. alarm events.
Display Type: Arrhythmia + Technical

Viewing the Alarm Events Window
Scrolling the Alarm Events

Touch the following keys to scroll the alarm events.

By touching the time bar, you can jump to the alarm event at the touched time.
Moving the Cursor

To move the cursor, touch the , , or key, touch directly the
cursor or time bar.
Cursor
10
Viewing Other Review Windows of the Selected Time 10-9
You can view other review windows for a particular date and time by moving the
cursor to the date and time and touching the tabs of review window.
Changing the Displayed Alarm Type

Select the alarm type to display on the Alarm Events window from technical
alarm events and either limits or arrhythmia alarm events. Touch a key under
“Alarm Types”.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Zooming In and Out on Alarm Events

You can zoom in and out the waveform display in four steps (1, 8, 24 or 72
hours) without changing the cursor position. Touch “Zoom In” or “Zoom Out” to
change the magnification.
Touch “Zoom in” to decrease the alarm events display width.
Touch “Zoom out” to increase the alarm events display width.
Displaying a Multi Patient Alarms Window

Touch “Multi Pat. Alarm Event” or “Multi Pat. Limits”. For details on the Multi
Patient Alarms Window, refer to Section 8.

Changing the Alarm Events Window Display Settings
Select the events to display on the Alarm Events window. You can select up to 12
events for each “Limit + Technical” and “Arrhy + Technical” window.
NOTE
When both the upper and lower alarm limits are set to OFF on the Alarm
Limits window of the Personal Setup, an alarm off mark is displayed
beside the display position and the alarm event cannot be displayed on
the Alarm Events window.
1. Touch the “Change Events” to display the Change Event window.
2. Touch “Limit + Technical” or “Arrhy + Technical” to display the event 10

settings window.
10-9
When both upper and lower alarm limit settings

are set to OFF, alarm off mark is displayed.
3. On the left side of the screen, touch the key for the displayed alarm events
position you want to change.
4. On the right side of the screen, touch the key of the item you want to display.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting Items
Alarm Limit/Technical Arrhythmia/Technical
Default Default
Alarm Displayed Alarm Displayed
Settings Settings
Alarm Limit on the Alarm Arrhythmia on the Alarm
(Display (Display
Events window Events window
Order) Order)
HR Upper and lower 1 ASYSTOLE Each arrhythmia 1
PR limit alarm of each 2 V. FIB alarm 2
ST parameter –– V. TACHY 3
RR 7 EXT TACHY 4
APNEA 8 EXT BRADY 5
NIBP 3 VPC RUN 8
SpO2 5 V BRADY ––
ART*1 4 SV TACHY ––
CVP –– TACHYCARDIA 6
PAP –– BRADYCARDIA 7
ICP ALL –– PAUSE ––
TEMP ALL –– COUPLET ––
O2 –– EARLY VPC ––
CO2 6 MULTIFORM ––
GAS ALL –– V RHYTHM ––
BIS –– BIGEMINY ––
EEG –– TRIGEMINY ––
FREQ VPC 9
VPC ––
IRREGULAR RR ––
PROLONGED RR ––
NO PACER
––
PULSE
PACER NON-
––
CAPTURE
Default Default
Alarm Displayed Alarm Displayed
Settings Settings
Technical on the Alarm Technical on the Alarm
(Display (Display
Events window Events window
Order) Order)
ECG Technical LEAD OFF alarm, ECG Technical LEAD OFF alarm,
9 10
NOISE alarm NOISE alarm
SpO2 Technical SpO2 technical SpO2 Technical SpO2 technical
alarm*2 11 11
alarm*2
ART*1 + NIBP ART and NIBP ART*1 + NIBP ART and NIBP
10 ––
technical alarm*2 technical alarm*2
TEMP Technical TEMP technical TEMP Technical TEMP technical
–– ––
alarm*2 alarm*2
CO2 Technical CO2 technical CO2 Technical CO2 technical
–– ––
alarm*2 alarm*2
SIGNAL LOSS*3 SIGNAL LOSS SIGNAL LOSS*3 SIGNAL LOSS
12 12
alarm*4 alarm*4
*1 Typical labels of arterial pressure (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, and FEM).
*2 For details about technical alarms, refer to “Error Messages” in Section 16.
*3 “COMMUNICATION LOSS” is displayed when using a hard-wired bedside monitor.
*4 COMMUNICATION LOSS” alarm is displayed when using a hard-wired bedside monitor.

Printing the Alarm Events
Alarm Events Printing

With the laser printer, you can print the alarm events displayed on the Alarm
Events window.
To print, touch “Print” on the Alarm Events window.
Other Recordings
On the Alarm Events window, the following recordings are available with the
WS-960P Recorder Unit. For details, refer to Section 11. 10
recording
10-9

Section 10-10 Report Window
Overview........................................................................................................................................................ 10.10.2
Displaying the Report Window............................................................................................................ 10.10.2
Window Description............................................................................................................................. 10.10.2
Report Mode....................................................................................................................................... 10.10.3
Manual Printing......................................................................................................................... 10.10.3
Automatic Printing..................................................................................................................... 10.10.3
Printing Items...................................................................................................................................... 10.10.3
Report Creating Flowchart.................................................................................................................. 10.10.3
Changing Report Settings............................................................................................................................. 10.10.4
Setting Printing Format....................................................................................................................... 10.10.4
Setting the Report Mode........................................................................................................... 10.10.4
Selecting Printing Items............................................................................................................ 10.10.4
Setting Report Range............................................................................................................... 10.10.4 10
Setting Trend Data Printing................................................................................................................. 10.10.6
Changing Trend Interval............................................................................................................ 10.10.6
Changing Printing Parameters.................................................................................................. 10.10.6
Entering Comments....................................................................................................................................... 10.10.7
Using Template to Enter a Comment........................................................................................ 10.10.8
Printing the Report........................................................................................................................................ 10.10.8
Manual Printing......................................................................................................................... 10.10.8
Automatic Printing..................................................................................................................... 10.10.8
10-10

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Overview
On the Report window, you can create and print a report.
Displaying the Report Window

1. Touch the basic information window of the bed you want to display the
Report window of.
3. Touch “Report” to display the Report window.
Window Description
Touch to change to
another review window.
Touch to display the

desired window.
Report Mode
Select report printing
mode.
Report Items
Select whether the
following items are
printed.
- Tabular trend
- Trendgraph
- Full disclosure
compressed
waveform
Settings for report creation. Touch to print the report

The items differ depending with the laser printer.
on the Report Mode.

10-10. REPORT WINDOW
Report Mode
There are two types of report printing: manual and automatic.
NOTE
Automatic printing is only available at the central monitor where the bed’s
data are saved. The report mode is fixed to manual at central monitors
where the bed’s data is not saved.
Manual Printing
In manual printing, a patient’s past data (data which is already saved in the
central monitor) can be printed as a report.
Automatic Printing
In automatic printing, reports of preset contents are automatically printed at the
preset intervals.
Printing Items
10
You can print the following items.
• Patient information
• Report creation date and time
• Report creation conditions
• Comment
• ECG waveform (5-second waveform 5 minutes before the end time of the
printing data)
• Tabular trend
• Trendgraph
• Full disclosure compressed waveform
Patient information, report creation date and time, report creation conditions,
comment and ECG are printed on the report cover.
To print the cover, set “Report Cover Sheet” to ON on the System Configuration
window of System Setup screen. The default setting is OFF.
10-10
Report Creating Flowchart
A report is created and printed by the following steps.
Display the Report window.

Set the settings for report format.

Set the settings for trend data printing.

Enter comments.

Print the report.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing Report Settings
Settings are categorized into format settings and trend data settings. Touch the
tab to change the setting window.
Setting Printing Format

Touch “Format” to display the Format window.
Setting the Report Mode

Touch “Manual” or “Auto” to select whether report creation and printing are
done manually or automatically.
NOTE
Automatic printing is only available at the central monitor where the bed’s
data are saved. The report mode is fixed to manual at central monitors
where the bed’s data is not saved.
Selecting Printing Items

Set whether or not the following items are printed by touching “Yes” or “No”.
• Tabular trend
• Trendgraph
• Full disclosure compressed waveform
NOTE
When the patient’s data is not saved at any central monitor, these settings
are not available.
Setting Report Range

Set the printing start date and printing duration. The approximate number of
printed pages is displayed.
Manual recording
The patient’s past data is printed as a report. To change settings, touch the item
you want to set and then touch a numeric pad key. Set printing start time and
printing duration and then touch “Print” to start printing.
NOTE
When the selected report range includes future time, the data of the
future part is not included in the report.

Date
Touch the key for the
start date of printing
data.
Print Time,
Duration
Touch the item you
want to set and
then enter from the
numerical pad to the
right.
Approximate printing
pages
The white part is printed.
Automatic Printing
Reports of preset contents are automatically printed at the preset intervals. The
report of the preset printing duration is automatically created. Data up until the
10
printing start time is printed. When one report printing finishes, the printing start
time is automatically renewed according to the printing interval setting.
NOTE
You cannot set the printing interval shorter than the printing duration. If a
printing interval shorter than the printing duration is entered, the printing
interval is automatically modified to the same value as the printing
duration.
Print Time, Duration,

Report Interval
Touch the item you
want to set and
then enter from the
numerical pad to the 10-10
right.
Approximate printing
pages.
The white part is printed.

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting Trend Data Printing

Touch “Trend” to display the Trend setting window.
Changing Trend Interval

Set the interval to print tabular trend. Touch the key of the desired interval.
NOTE
When “NIBP” is selected, only the data for the time NIBP is measured is
printed.
Changing Printing Parameters

Set the parameters to be printed for trendgraph and tabular trend.
1. Touch any item or blank space in the Parameter List where you want to
change the setting. You can insert a new item by touching “Insert”. When
you touch a space which already has a setting, the setting is overwritten.
Touch to insert a new item in the selected space.
Touch to delete the selected item.
2. Touch a parameter in the Select Parameter area. The selected parameter is

displayed in the space selected in step 1.
NOTE
When “NIBP” is selected for trend interval, all the NIBP related
parameters are automatically added as printing parameters at the end of
the list.

Touch to unselect
all items.
Entering Comments
10
You can print comments in the report.
NOTE
• The comment is printed on the cover page. To print the cover, set
“Report Cover Sheet” to ON on the System Configuration window of
System Setup screen. The default setting is OFF.
• When a bed is monitored by several central monitors, the comment
entered at one central monitor is saved only in that central monitor.
Other central monitors and the bedside monitor do not share comments
entered at a different central monitor.
1. Touch “Nurse Notes” to display the Nurse Notes window.
2. Enter comments with the keyboard on the Nurse Notes window.

10-10

10. REVIEW WINDOWS
Using Template to Enter a Comment

You can save one comment you often use.
Saving a Template
Enter the comment in the template and then touch “Save”.
Recalling a Template
Touch “Recall”. The comment in the template is copied to the comment column.
Any previous comment in the comment column is overwritten.
Printing the Report
You need to confirm report setting before printing. To print comments, enter
them in advance. To print the cover page, set “Report Cover Sheet” to ON on
the System Configuration window of System Setup screen. The default setting is
OFF.
Manual Printing
Touch “Print” to start printing.
Automatic Printing
Reports of preset contents are automatically created and printed at the preset
intervals.
To cancel printing, touch “Print Stop”. If you cancel printing, all pending
printing reports are also canceled.

Section 11 Recording
Overview............................................................................................................................................................. 11.2
Description of Recording Modes.............................................................................................................. 11.3
Manual Recording.......................................................................................................................... 11.3
Automatic Recording...................................................................................................................... 11.5
Remote Recording......................................................................................................................... 11.5
Recording Priority..................................................................................................................................... 11.6
Recorder Unit (WS-960P).............................................................................................................. 11.6
Laser Printer.................................................................................................................................. 11.6
Recording Sensitivity................................................................................................................................ 11.7
Recorded/Printed Data............................................................................................................................. 11.7
Manual Recording.............................................................................................................................................. 11.8
Single Bed Recording............................................................................................................................... 11.8
Necessary Settings for Single Bed Recording............................................................................... 11.8
Starting Single Bed Recording....................................................................................................... 11.9
Automatic Recording.......................................................................................................................................... 11.9
Periodic Recording................................................................................................................................... 11.9
Necessary Settings for Periodic Recording.................................................................................... 11.9
Alarm Recording.................................................................................................................................... 11.10
Remote Recording............................................................................................................................................ 11.10
Necessary Settings for Remote Recording............................................................................................ 11.10
Call Recording.............................................................................................................................. 11.10
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording........................................................................................ 11.10
Starting Remote Recording.................................................................................................................... 11.10
Call Recording.............................................................................................................................. 11.10
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording........................................................................................ 11.10
Changing Recording Settings........................................................................................................................... 11.11
Changing Settings on the Recording Window of the Setup.................................................................... 11.11
Changing Alarm Recording Settings............................................................................................ 11.12
Setting Recording Waveforms for Dual Waveform Recording...................................................... 11.12
Changing Recording Interval of Periodic Recording.................................................................... 11.13
Setting the Record Sweep Speed................................................................................................ 11.14
Changing Settings on the Recording Window of the System Setup Screen.......................................... 11.15 11
Displaying the Recording Window of the System Setup Screen.................................................. 11.15
Changing the Recording Time...................................................................................................... 11.16
Selecting the Real Time Recording or Delayed Recording.......................................................... 11.16
Changing the Recording Start Position........................................................................................ 11.16
Changing Settings on the Arrhythmia Alarm Window of the Personal Setup......................................... 11.16

11. RECORDING
Overview
This central monitor has three recording types.

• Manual recording
• Automatic recording
• Remote recording
This central monitor can be connected to the following two optional devices
below.

(paper width 50 mm)
Touch the “Record” key, “Record All” key or “REC” key on the screen to record
with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
Laser printer
(A4 or letter paper size)
Touch the “Print” key on the screen to print with the laser printer.

11. RECORDING
Description of Recording Modes

Manual Recording
How to start Available screen/

Recording type Recorded data Recording time
recording window
“Manual Recording” on
• Waveform on the All Beds the Recording window All screens with
Single bed recording “REC”
screen of the System Setup “REC”
• Numerical data at the recording screen*1
start time 10 seconds × the
All beds recording “Record All” All Beds screen
number of all beds
• Two waveforms selected at
“Manual Recording” on
“Recording Pattern” on the Individual Bed
Dual waveform the Recording window
Recording window of the Setup “Record” window, Overview
recording of the System Setup
• Numerical data at the recording Bed window
screen*1
start time
Individual Bed
• Waveforms of all parameters
window, Overview
displayed on the screen
Multi-wave printing 10 seconds*1 “Print” Bed window
• Numerical data at the recording
(when display type is
start time
“Wave Display”)
Individual Bed
• All ECG waveforms displayed
window, Overview
on the screen
ECG 12 lead Bed window
(up to 12 leads) --- “Print”
printing (when display type
is “ECG 12 Lead
start time
Display”)
Multi patient alarm Displayed alarm events for multi Multi Patient Alarm
--- “Print”
events printing patients Events window
Multi patients limits Displayed upper/lower limits for Multi Patients Limits
--- “Print”
printing multi patients window
Trendgraph printing Displayed trendgraph Displayed time width “Print” Trend window
Tabular trend
Displayed tabular trend Displayed 10 rows “Print” Tabular Trend window
printing
Hemodynamics list Hemodynamics List
Displayed hemodynamics list --- “Print”
printing window
• Displayed arrhythmia recall
waveforms (top two waveforms Arrhythmia Recall
“Record”
in multi-wave display) window
• Numerical data
• Displayed arrhythmia recall Arrhythmia Recall
Arrhythmia recall waveforms “Print” window - Expanded
8 or 10 seconds*2
recording/printing • Numerical data waveform display
Arrhythmia recall files with
printing mark (up to 12 files) Arrhythmia Recall 11
• Arrhythmia recall waveforms “Print” window - File list
• Numerical data display
• Caliper measurement data
Arrhythmia recall files with Arrhythmia Recall
Arrhythmia recall caliper measurement data window - Expanded
caliper measurement • Arrhythmia recall waveforms 8 or 10 seconds*2 “Print” waveform display
data printing • Numerical data (with caliper
• Caliper measurement data measurement data)

11. RECORDING
How to start Available screen/

Recording type Recorded data Recording time
recording window
• Displayed ST recall file
• Numerical data when the file is “Record”
created.
ST recall recording/
ST recall files with printing mark --- ST Recall window
printing
(up to 24 files)
“Print”
• ST recall waveforms
• Numerical data
Full Disclosure
Full disclosure Displayed full disclosure Depends on the number window when
“Print”
waveform printing waveform of displayed waveforms compressed waveform
is displayed
Expanded full disclosure
waveform (top two waveforms in 10 seconds “Record”
multi-wave display)
One waveform: 40 Full Disclosure
Expanded full
seconds window when
disclosure waveform�
Two waveforms: 20 expanded waveform is
printing/recording Displayed full disclosure
seconds “Print” displayed
waveform
More than three
waveforms:
10 seconds
Full Disclosure
Full disclosure • Full disclosure waveforms window when
waveform caliper and numerical data for which expanded waveform is
10 seconds “Print”
measurement data caliper measurement is done displayed
printing • Caliper measurement data (with caliper
measurement data)
The print result is different depending on:
ECG 12 lead
• Display type (Tabular Trend, Zoom In, Comparison, Analysis Report)
analysis result
• Regular screen or Expand Individual Bed window
printing
Refer to Section 9 “ECG 12 Lead Printing”.
Alarm history Currently displayed alarm history Alarm History
--- “Print”
printing file list window
Alarm events
Displayed alarm events --- “Print” Alarm Events window
printing
Patient name, bed name, five
seconds ECG1 waveform, full
Report printing --- “Print” Report window
disclosure waveform, trend data,
etc.
*1 When printing frozen waveform, recording time is six seconds. Waveform

beginning six seconds before “Freeze” is touched is recorded.
*2 Depends on the bedside monitor model.

11. RECORDING
Automatic Recording
These recordings automatically start at the preset time and under preset
conditions.
How to start
Recording type Recorded data Recording time Available screen
recording
• Waveforms beginning five
Set at “Periodic
seconds before the recording
Recording” on the
start time on the All Beds
Periodic recording Recording window
screen
of the System Setup
screen
start time Automatically All screens and
• Waveforms beginning nine starts windows
Set at “Alarm/Call
seconds before the alarm
Recording” on the
occurrence on the All Beds
Alarm recording Recording window
screen
of the System Setup
• Numerical data at the alarm
screen
occurrence
Remote Recording
Remote recording is performed when there is a recording request from a
transmitter or a bedside monitor that is not connected to a recording device.
NOTE
• Remote recording is available only at the central monitor where the
• The BSS-9800 bedside station and BSM-9510 bedside monitor select
the central monitor which performs remote recording, and remote
recording is only available at the selected central monitor.
Recording from a Transmitter

The recording starts when the CALL button on the transmitter is pressed when
receiving data from a transmitter through the multiple patient receiver.
How to start
recording
• Waveform on the All Beds
Set at “Alarm/Call
screen, beginning 9 seconds
Recording” on the CALL
before the CALL button is All screens and
Call recording Recording window button on the
pressed windows
of the System Setup transmitter
• Numerical data of the recording
screen 11
start time
Recording from a Bedside Monitor

The recording starts when there is a recording request from a bedside monitor
that is not connected to a recording device.
NOTE
Remote recording from the 8000 series beds are not available.

11. RECORDING
How to start
recording
• Waveform selected at the
Request from
Remote delayed bedside monitor Continues until “REC” All screens and
the bedside
waveform recording • Numerical data at the recording for the bed is touched windows
monitor
start time
Recording Priority
Recorder Unit (WS-960P)
When using the WS-960P recorder unit, the following recording priority applies.
High Priority
Stop recording
• Single bed recording

• Dual waveform recording
• All beds recording
Postponed Canceled
• Alarm recording • Manual recording of the frozen waveform
• Periodic recording • Manual recording on each review window
• Call recording • Remote delayed recording
Low Priority
If more than one recording mode is activated at the same time, only the highest
priority mode is used.
If single bed recording, dual waveform recording, or all beds recording occurs
during any other type of recording, the other recording is canceled.
During any type of recording, if an equal priority recording occurs, that

recording is not performed; only the current recording is performed.
During call recording, alarm recording and periodic recording, if a higher priority
recording occurs, the current recording changes to standby and is continued as
soon as the recording device is available.
During manual recording of the frozen waveform, manual recording on each

review window and remote recording, if a higher priority recording occurs, the
current recording is canceled.
If the recorder is currently recording when you touch the REC key, the current
recording stops and the single bed recording you requested starts.
Laser Printer
When printing with the laser printer there is no priority; priority does not apply.

11. RECORDING
The sensitivity of the waveforms recorded on the recording paper depends on the
sensitivity of the waveforms displayed on the screen.
Display Sensitivity
Single Wave Dual Wave
× 1/4 × 1/2 × 1/4
× 1/2 × 1/2 × 1/4
× 3/4 ×1 × 1/2
×1 ×1 × 1/2
× 3/2 ×1 × 1/2
×2 ×2 ×1
×4 ×2 ×1
Recorded/Printed Data
Single wave recording
Recording date and time or QRS detection Numeric data when recording
File creation date and time Patient name type* ECG filter* starts or file is created.
Bed name
Lead and
sensitivity
Recorded
waveform
Recording Recording speed

name
Dual wave recording
Parameter name
Recording time 11
* QRS detection type and ECG filter are recorded only when the bedside monitor
which sends QRS detection type and ECG filter data to the central monitor and
the followings recordings are performed:
• Periodic recording
• Alarm recording
• Call recording

11. RECORDING
Record name list
Recording type Recorded name

Single bed recording MANUAL RECORD: (recording time)
All beds recording ALL BEDS RECORD
Dual waveform recording DUAL WAVE RECORD
Arrhythmia recall recording ARRHY RECALL
ST recall recording ST RECALL
Expanded full disclosure waveform
FULL DISCLOSURE ZOOM RECORD
recording
Periodic recording PERIODIC RECORD
Vital (parameter name) ALARM RECORD
Alarm recording ST ST (lead name) ALARM RECORD
Arrhythmia (arrhythmia name) ALARM RECORD
Call recording CALL RECORD
Remote delayed waveform recording NETWORK REM MANUAL RECORD : CONTINUOUS
Manual Recording
Manual recordings are the recordings generated by touching “Record”, “Record

All” or “REC”. Waveforms and data on the screen are recorded.
Manual recordings, except for single bed recording, all beds recording, alarm
history recording and report recording, are also available on the overview bed
screen.
This section explains single bed recording that can be done in the same way on
each screen. For other manual recordings, refer to each section that explains the
screen where the recording is performed.
All beds recording: Section 7

Multi patient alarm events printing: Section 8
Multi patients limits printing: Section 8
Dual waveform recording: Section 9
Multi-wave printing: Section 9
ECG 12 lead printing: Sections 9 and 10
Recording on each review window: Section 10
Single Bed Recording

This recording is available on all screens and windows with the “REC” key.
Real time or delayed waveform on the All Beds screen and numerical data are
recorded.
Necessary Settings for Single Bed Recording

• Set the Record sweep speed at “Other” on the Recording window of the Setup.
• Select the real time or delayed recording at “Manual Recording” on the

11. RECORDING

• Set the recording time at “Manual Recording” on the Recording window of the
Starting Single Bed Recording

Touch “REC” on the bed you want to record on the All Beds screen or “REC” on
the basic information area. The recording starts. When recording of the recording
time finishes, the recording device automatically stops.
All Beds screen
Basic information area
To stop recording, touch “REC” again.
Automatic Recording
Recording starts automatically at the preset recording condition. There are two
automatic recording modes: periodic recording and alarm recording.
Periodic Recording
Waveform beginning 5 seconds before the recording start time on the All Beds
screen and numerical data are recorded at the preset interval with the WS-960P
Recorder Unit.
11
Necessary Settings for Periodic Recording

• Set the recording interval at “Periodic Recording” on the Recording window
of the Setup. The factory default setting is OFF. Periodic recording is not
performed when OFF is selected.
• Set the Record sweep speed at “Other” on the Recording window of the Setup.
• Set the recording time at “Periodic Recording” on the Recording window of
To stop recording, touch “REC” on the bed during recording.

11. RECORDING
Alarm Recording
For alarm recording, refer to Section 6.
Remote Recording
Remote recording is performed when there is a recording request from a

transmitter or a bedside monitor that is not connected to a recording device.
NOTE
• Remote recording is available only at the central monitor where the
• The BSS-9800 bedside station and BSM-9510 bedside monitor select
the central monitor which performs remote recording, and remote
recording is only available at the selected central monitor.
Necessary Settings for Remote Recording

Call Recording
• Set the recording time at “Alarm/Call Recording” on the Recording window of
• Set “Call Recording” to ON at “Alarm Recording” on the Recording window
of the Setup.
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording

The recorded waveform is selected at the bedside monitor.
Starting Remote Recording

Call Recording
This recording starts when there is a recording request from a transmitter.
Waveform on the All Beds screen beginning 9 seconds before the CALL button
on the transmitter is pressed and numerical data are recorded with the WS-960P
Recorder Unit.
To start recording, press the CALL button on the transmitter. The recorder
automatically stops when recording of the preset recording time finishes.
To stop recording, touch “REC” on the bed on the All Beds screen or basic
information area.
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording

NOTE
Remote recording from 8000 series beds are not available.
This recording starts when there is a recording request from a bedside monitor
that is not connected to a recording device. The waveform and numerical data
displayed on the bedside monitor is recorded with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.

11. RECORDING
On the bedside monitor press the key with the function to start recording.
The recorder automatically stops when recording of the preset recording time
finishes.
To stop recording, touch “REC” on the bed on the All Beds screen or basic
information area.
Changing Recording Settings
You can change recording settings on the Recording window of the Setup or the
Changing Settings on the Recording Window of the Setup

To display the Recording window,
1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to change settings for.
3. Touch “Recording”. The Recording window opens.
11

11. RECORDING
Changing Alarm Recording Settings

On the Recording window, touch “Alarm Recording”. Touch “ON” or “OFF”
for each alarm recording mode to set whether or not the recording is performed.
The settings on this window are synchronized with the settings on each alarm
window of the Personal Setup.
Turning all alarms on

or off.
ST Alarm Recording
NOTE
ST alarm recording is not available for 8000 series beds.
Call Recording
NOTE
This setting is available only when the central monitor is receiving data
from a transmitter.
Setting Recording Waveforms for Dual Waveform Recording

1. Touch “Recording Pattern” to display the setting window.
2. Touch either the “First Wave” or “Second Wave” key.

11. RECORDING
3. Touch the desired parameter at “Record Wave Selection” to set the parameter
of the waveform.
NOTE
When “Second Wave” is set to “NONE”, only one waveform is recorded in
dual waveform recording.
Changing Recording Interval of Periodic Recording

1. Touch “Periodic Recording” to open the setting window.
2. Touch the desired recording interval (OFF, 30 min, 60 min, 120 min, FREE).
The factory default setting is OFF. Periodic recording is not performed when
OFF is selected.
When “FREE” is selected:

You can set any interval.
1. Touch “FREE”. The numeric pads appears.
2. Enter any interval with the numeric pads.
3. Touch “ENTER” to set the interval. If you don’t touch “ENTER”, the setting
is not valid.
11

11. RECORDING
Setting the Record Sweep Speed

You can set the record sweep speed of the following:
• Multi-wave printing (includes printing of the frozen waveform)
• ECG 12 lead printing (6 rows × 2 cols and 12 rows ×1 col only)
• Periodic recording
• Alarm recording
1. Touch “Other” to display the setting window.
2. Touch either “25 mm/s” or “50 mm/s” key. The default setting is 25 mm/s.

11. RECORDING
Changing Settings on the Recording Window of the System Setup Screen

Displaying the Recording Window of the System Setup Screen
Touch “System Setup” to display the System Setup screen and then touch
“Recording” to display the Recording window.
11

11. RECORDING
Changing the Recording Time

Set the recording time of manual recording, periodic recording and alarm/call
recording.
Setting range (The underlined values are the factory default settings.)
Manual recording: 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s, 2 min
Periodic recording: 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s
Alarm/call recording: 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s
Touch the recording time for each recording.
Selecting the Real Time Recording or Delayed Recording

This setting is for single bed recording, all beds recording, and dual waveform
recording.
Real Time: Real time waveform is recorded.
Delay: Waveform beginning 8 seconds before the “REC”, “Record All” or
“Record” is touched is recorded.
Changing the Recording Start Position

Set the recording start position.
Immediate: Recording paper does not feed to the recording paper mark and
recording starts immediately.
After mark: Recording paper feeds to the recording paper mark and starts
recording.
Changing Settings on the Arrhythmia Alarm Window of the Personal Setup

For setting the arrhythmia alarm recording on or off for each arrhythmia, refer to
“Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm” in Section 6.

Section 12 Overview Bed Window
Overview............................................................................................................................................................. 12.2
Displaying the Overview Bed Menu Window............................................................................................ 12.2
Alarm Function for an Overview Bed........................................................................................................ 12.3
Window Description.................................................................................................................................. 12.4
Selecting Another Bedside Monitor as an Overview Bed................................................................................... 12.5
Switching to Other Windows of the Overview Bed Window................................................................................ 12.5
Recordings on the Overview Bed Window......................................................................................................... 12.6
12

12. OVERVIEW BED WINDOW
Overview
You can select an overview bed from up to 300 bedside monitors in the
network that the central monitor is not continuously monitoring, and display the
waveforms and data of the bedside monitor on the Overview Bed window.
The following table shows the available operations on the Overview Bed
window.
Item Overview bed Monitored bed

Wave display window Yes
ECG 12 lead display
Yes
window
Individual Bed windows All vital signs window Yes
Individual Beds screen
Yes
display settings
Parameter priority Yes
Trendgraph Yes
Tabular trend Yes
Hemodynamics Yes
Arrhythmia recall Yes
ST recall Yes
Review windows
Full disclosure Yes Yes
ECG 12 lead analysis Yes
Alarm history No
Alarm events No
Report No
Admit/discharge No
Personal Setup
Alarm settings No
Recording settings Yes
Setup
Channel settings No
Refer to “Alarm Function
Alarms
for an Overview Bed”.
Refer to “Alarm Function
Recording
for an Overview Bed”.
Displaying the Overview Bed Menu Window

Touch “Overview” to display the Overview Bed Menu window.

Alarm Function for an Overview Bed
WARNING
If the communication between the central monitor and an overview
bed is lost, there will be no communication loss alarm or overview
bed alarm. Do not rely solely on the overview bed function to monitor
the patient vital signs.
Alarm indication (alarm sound and window indication) on the Individual Bed
window of the Overview Bed window are the same as those on the Individual
Bed window of the monitored bed. Alarm level for each alarm type is also the
same. However, alarm recording is not performed for an overview bed.
When a window other than the Overview Bed window is displayed and an alarm
occurs on the currently selected overview bed, the alarm message is displayed in
red at the top of the screen.
Overview bed alarm occurs only for the alarm on the currently selected overview
bed displayed on the Overview Bed window.
The overview bed alarm cannot be silenced by touching “Silence Alarms”.
To stop the overview bed alarm, touch “Stop monitoring” on the Overview Bed
Menu window.
12

Window Description
The Overview bed window consists of the Overview Bed Menu window and
windows access from it. From the Overview Bed Menu window, you can go to
any kind of overview bed window.
Touch to change to another type

of overview bed windows. Touch to select another bedside monitor as an overview bed.
Touch to
unselect bedside
monitor as an
overview bed.
No overview bed
alarm occurs.
Scroll keys
Touch to see all
bedside monitors
that are available
as an overview
bed.

Selecting Another Bedside Monitor as an Overview Bed
On the Overview Bed Menu window, touch the desired bed name key in “Select
Overview Bed”.
Touch to select another bedside monitor as an overview bed.

Touch to select no bedside
monitor as an overview bed.
Scrolls one page.
Scrolls one row.
Scrolls one page.
Switching to Other Windows of the Overview Bed Window
On the Overview Bed Menu window, touch a key of a desired window.

Each window of the Overview Bed window has the same displays and settings as
the windows for the monitored beds are available.
12
Touch to select another

bedside monitor as an
overview bed.

Recordings on the Overview Bed Window
For the overview bed, recording/printing except for the following are available.
• Automatic recording
• Remote recording
• Alarm history recording
• Alarm events recording
• Report recording

Section 13 Parameter Setup
Overview of Parameter Setup............................................................................................................................. 13.3

Displaying Each Parameter Setup Window.............................................................................................. 13.4
ECG Settings...................................................................................................................................................... 13.5
Setting Vital Sign Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 13.5
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms........................................................................................................................ 13.6
Turning ECG Measurement ON/OFF....................................................................................................... 13.6
Setting the Analysis Lead......................................................................................................................... 13.7
Setting QRS Detection............................................................................................................................. 13.8
Setting QRS Detection Type........................................................................................................... 13.8
Setting QRS Detection Sensitivity.................................................................................................. 13.9
Setting ECG Lead Name........................................................................................................................ 13.10
ST Settings............................................................................................................................................. 13.11
Setting the ST Analysis Point....................................................................................................... 13.11
Setting the ST Interval................................................................................................................. 13.11
Learning ECG........................................................................................................................................ 13.12
Setting Other Settings............................................................................................................................ 13.13
Turning Arrhythmia Analysis ON/OFF.......................................................................................... 13.13
Turning Pacing Detection ON/OFF............................................................................................... 13.13
Turning Hum Filter ON/OFF......................................................................................................... 13.14
Turning Pacing Mark ON/OFF...................................................................................................... 13.14
Turning Auto Lead Change ON/OFF............................................................................................ 13.14
RESP Settings.................................................................................................................................................. 13.16
Setting the Vital Sign Alarm.................................................................................................................... 13.16
Turning the Impedance Respiration Measurement ON/OFF.................................................................. 13.16
Changing the Respiration Detection Sensitivity..................................................................................... 13.17
SpO2 Settings................................................................................................................................................... 13.18
NIBP Settings................................................................................................................................................... 13.19
Setting NIBP Measurement Mode and Interval...................................................................................... 13.19
Starting/Stopping NIBP Measurement................................................................................................... 13.20
PRESS Settings............................................................................................................................................... 13.21
Changing the Display Pattern and the Blood Pressure Label................................................................ 13.22
Changing the Arterial Pressure Detection Sensitivity............................................................................. 13.23 13
TEMP Settings.................................................................................................................................................. 13.24
Setting the Label for Temperature Measurement and Equation for ΔT.................................................. 13.24
CO2 Settings..................................................................................................................................................... 13.26
O2 Settings........................................................................................................................................................ 13.27
Anesthesia Gas Settings.................................................................................................................................. 13.28

Setting the Displayed Parameters of Waveforms and Numerical Data................................................... 13.29
Ventilator Settings............................................................................................................................................. 13.30
CCO Settings.................................................................................................................................................... 13.31
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Numeric Data............................................................................... 13.32
PiCCO Settings................................................................................................................................................ 13.33
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Numeric Data............................................................................... 13.33

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Overview of Parameter Setup
Parameter Setup sets measurement conditions of each parameter. These settings

can be set individually for each bed. The available setting items depend on the
bed type.
: Settings only available for beds connected through the RU-960P/ORG-

9100 Multiple Patient Receiver.
Setting Item Description

Setting vital sign alarms
Setting arrhythmia alarms
Turning ECG measurement ON/OFF
Setting analysis lead
Setting QRS detection settings
Setting ECG lead names
Setting ST analysis point
ECG
Setting ST interval
Learning ECG
Turning arrhythmia analysis ON/OFF
Turning pacing detection ON/OFF
Turning hum filter ON/OFF
Turning pacing mark ON/OFF
Turning auto lead change ON/OFF
RESP Turning respiration measurement ON/OFF
Setting respiration detection sensitivity
SpO2 Setting vital sign alarm
NIBP Setting measurement interval
Starting/Stopping NIBP measurement
PRESS Setting labels
Setting display patterns
TEMP Setting labels
Setting equation for ∆T
CO2 Setting vital sign alarms
O2 Setting vital sign alarms
Anesthesia Gas Setting displayed parameters of waveforms and numerical
data 13
Setting displayed parameters of waveforms and numerical
Ventilator
data
CCO
Setting displayed parameters of numeric data
PiCCO Setting displayed parameters of numeric data

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Displaying Each Parameter Setup Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to set the settings for.
3. Touch each parameter key of Parameter Setup to display the setting window
for the parameter.
Or,
On the Individual Bed window, touch the parameter you want to display the
setting window for. The setting window for the parameter opens.
(example: when opening the ECG window)

13. PARAMETER SETUP
ECG Settings
CAUTION CAUTION
When the “CHECK LEADS” message is When the “NOISE” or “CANNOT ANALYZE”
displayed, ECG is not monitored properly and the message is displayed, ECG data and alarm are
ECG alarm does not function. Check the not reliable. Remove the cause by checking the
electrode, electrode leads and connection cord, electrodes, electrode leads, patient’s body
and if necessary, replace with new ones. movement, EMG and peripheral instruments
grounding. Also check that no electric blanket is
used.
ECG settings are set on the ECG window. On the Menu window, touch “ECG”
to display the ECG window. The ECG window is divided into the following nine
categories. Touch the tab of the category name to display another category.
• Vital Sign Alarm

• Arrhythmia Alarm
• ECG Measurement
• Lead Select
• QRS Detection Sensitivity
• Lead Name
• ST
• Learning ECG
• Other Settings
Setting Vital Sign Alarms

Set the HR and ST alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as
on the Alarm Limits window of the Personal Setup. Refer to Section 6.
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms

The setting procedure is the same as on the Arrhythmia Alarm window of the
Personal Setup. Refer to Section 6.
Turning ECG Measurement ON/OFF
CAUTION
When the ECG measurement is OFF, ECG alarms do not occur even
if each ECG alarm item is set to ON.
NOTE
• This setting is only available for the beds monitored through the RU-
960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver.
• This setting cannot be set to OFF while ECG is being monitored.
• When “ECG Measurement” is set to OFF at the central monitor when
ECG monitoring starts at the monitoring device (bedside monitor,
transmitter, etc.), ECG measurement automatically turns to ON at the
central monitor. If ECG does not appear on the screen in 10 seconds,
manually turn it to ON.
• When “ECG Measurement” is set to OFF, PR alarm automatically turns
to ON.
• After setting “ECG Measurement” to ON, confirm that ECG is displayed
on the screen.
• You can fix “ECG Measurement” to ON on the System Configuration
window of the System Setup screen. Refer to Section 7-1,
This setting turns ECG measurement ON or OFF.
1. Touch “ECG Measurement” to display the setting window.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
2. Touch ON or OFF.
ON: ECG waveform and numeric data of the ECG related parameters are
displayed on the screen. ECG related alarms generate.
OFF: ECG waveform and numeric data of the ECG related parameters are
not displayed on the screen.
Setting the Analysis Lead

NOTE
• This setting is only available for beds connected through an RU-960P/
ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver.
• To set this setting, arrhythmia analysis must be set to ON on the Other
Settings window. Refer to the “Setting Other Settings” of the “ECG
Settings” section.
Select the ECG lead for arrhythmia analysis. When monitoring multiple ECG
leads, you can also set the second lead for arrhythmia analysis.
Touch “Analysis Leads” to display to the setting window.
Select single or multiple leads for analysis before selecting the analyzing lead.
Single: One lead is used for arrhythmia analysis.
Multi: Two leads are used for arrhythmia analysis.
Trace 2 can also be set when

Analysis Mode is set to Single.
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Relation with displayed waveforms on the All Beds screen

When Wave Selection is set to Auto on the All-Beds Screen Setup, the lead of
the displayed ECG waveform matches the arrhythmia analysis lead setting. The
relation between display lead and analysis lead is as follows.
Analysis lead 1: The lead of the displayed ECG waveform when the number
of ECG waveforms is set to 1, or the lead of the upper
displayed waveform when the number of ECG waveforms
is set to 2.
Analysis lead 2: The lead of the lower displayed waveform when the
number of ECG waveforms is set to 2. (Analysis lead 2 can
also be set when Analysis Mode is set to Single.)
The lead of the displayed ECG waveform does not match the arrhythmia analysis
lead setting here when auto lead change function is on. For auto lead change
function, refer to “Turning Auto Lead Change ON/OFF” of “Setting Other
Settings” in this section.
Relation with displayed waveforms on the Individual Bed window

When Wave Selection is set to Auto on the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup, the lead of
the displayed ECG waveform on the screen matches the arrhythmia analysis lead
setting. The relation between display lead and analysis lead is as follows.
Analysis lead 1: The lead of the upper displayed waveform on the Individual
Bed window.
Analysis lead 2: The lead of the lower displayed waveform. (Analysis lead 2
can also be set when Analysis Mode is set to Single.)
When Wave Selection is set to Auto on the Indiv. Bed Screen Setup and two
traces are being measured, both traces are always displayed on the screen.
The lead of the displayed ECG waveform does not match the arrhythmia analysis
lead setting here while the analysis lead is automatically changed to a stable lead
by auto lead change function. For auto lead change function, refer to “Turning
Auto Lead Change ON/OFF” of “Setting Other Settings” in this section.
Setting QRS Detection

Setting QRS Detection Type
Set the QRS detection type. Touch “Adult”, “Child” or “Neonate” in QRS
Detection Type.
NOTE
• When “Adult” or “Neonate” is selected, QRS Detection Sensitivity
setting is not displayed.
• You can set the QRS Detection Type when using a RU-960P/ORG-9100
multiple patient receiver which accepts QRS detection type setting.
• When discharging or deleting data, the QRS Detection Type setting
returns to the setting of Alarm Master 1.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the correct patient type is
set for QRS Detection Type on the following window.
• When using a multiple patient receiver: QRS Detection window of
the ECG window.
• When using a bedside monitor and transmitter: Home screen or
ECG window of the monitor.
If an inappropriate patient type is set, heart rate cannot be counted
accurately and noise or P waves may be counted as QRS and
cardiac arrest may be overlooked.
CAUTION
Use the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver only with the specified
version of MU-960P Central Monitor Main Unit. If the multiple patient
receiver is used with the unspecified version of the central monitor
main unit, heart rate might be counted incorrectly or noise and P-
waves might be incorrectly counted as QRS because the QRS
detection type cannot be set on the multiple patient receiver. This
could cause failure to detect asystole.
The following table shows the difference of each QRS detection type.
QRS Detection Setting

Items
Adult Child Neonate
Detection of thin QRS Not available Available
QRS detection sensitivity
Not available Available Not available
setting
Setting QRS Detection Sensitivity

Set the QRS detection sensitivity to count heart rate correctly.
1. Touch “QRS Detection Sensitivity” to open the setting window.
2. Touch the key for the desired sensitivity in “QRS Detection Sensitivity”.
(The factory default setting is ×1)
13
When heart rate counting is incorrect because the ECG waveform is too large or
small, change the QRS detection sensitivity.
- For too large ECG: Select lower sensitivity.
- For too small ECG: Select higher sensitivity.
13. PARAMETER SETUP
Setting ECG Lead Name

Select the ECG lead name to be displayed on the screen.
NOTE
• This setting only changes the lead name displayed on the screen. It
does not change the ECG lead measured at transmitters or bedside
monitors. This setting can only be set when receiving from a transmitter
without lead switching function.
1. Touch “ECG Leads” to open the setting window.
2. After you select the key in “Lead”, touch to select the label in “Name”.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
ST Settings
CAUTION
NOTE
This setting is only available for beds connected through an RU-960P/
Setting the ST Analysis Point

1. Touch “ST” to open the setting window.
2. Touch or at ISO point and ST point to set each value. One touch of
or increases or decreases the value by 4 ms. The cursors on the screen that
represent each point move together with the value. You can also move the
cursor by touching the waveform.
Time from the ISO point Time from the
current R point ST point current R point
Touch to change the Touch to apply the Touch to return to the

sensitivity on the above above settings to ST default settings.
setting window. analysis.
Item Setting Range Steps Factory Default Setting
ISO point 0 to 248 (ms) 4 80
ST point 0 to 340 (ms) 4 108
Setting the ST Interval 13

Set the interval where ST recall files are saved.
1. Touch “ST Interval”. The ST File Interval window opens.
2. Touch the desired interval.

NOTE
When the interval is set to 30 seconds, files for 72 hours cannot be saved.
To save files for 72 hours, set the interval to one minute or longer. When
the interval is set to 30 seconds, files for maximum 36 hours can be saved.
13. PARAMETER SETUP
Learning ECG
CAUTION
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis, make the monitor
relearn the patient’s ECG and check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise, an important arrhythmia may be overlooked.
NOTE
• This settings only available for beds connected through the RU-960P/
• When you touch “Learn ECG” at the central monitor, the command is
sent to the bedside monitor and the bedside monitor relearns ECG.
• Bedside monitors of some models automatically learn ECG whenever
the pattern of normal ECG changes.
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis result, relearn the dominant
ECG. While learning, the “LEARNING” message appears on the screen.
1. Touch “Learn ECG” to display the setting window.
2. Touch “Learn ECG”. The bedside monitor relearns ECG.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Setting Other Settings

Touch “Other Settings” to open the setting window.
Turning Arrhythmia Analysis ON/OFF
WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set Arrhythmia Analysis on the ECG
window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for
arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
NOTE
• This setting is only available for beds connected through the RU-960P/
• When arrhythmia analysis is set to OFF, the following operations for
arrhythmia analysis are not performed.
- Display of VPC count and ST measurement value
- Generating arrhythmia alarms
- Creating arrhythmia recall files
- Arrhythmia alarm recording
- Creating ST recall files
Set arrhythmia analysis on or off. Touch “ON” or “OFF” in “Arrhythmia

Analysis”. When you set the arrhythmia analysis to off, the “Arrhy Analy Off”
Turning Pacing Detection ON/OFF
WARNING WARNING
Turn the pacing pulse detection* to ON when Even when the pacing pulse detection is set to
monitoring a pacemaker patient. Otherwise the ON, the pacemaker pulse can be overlooked or
pacemaker pulse is not rejected. However, even detected as QRS. You cannot confirm the
when the pacing pulse detection is set to ON, the pacemaker operation only from the detected
pacemaker pulse might not be rejected. When the pacemaker pulse.
pacemaker pulse is not rejected, the pacemaker
pulse is detected as QRS and false heart rate
may be indicated or critical arrhythmia such as
asystole may be overlooked. Keep pacemaker
patients under close observation.
* For the pacemaker pulse rejection capability of RU- 13

960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver, refer to
“Specifications - Arrhythmia Specifications on RU-960P/
ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver” in Section 18.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
NOTE
• When the patient has an implanted cardiac pacemaker, the pacing
pulse may be counted as QRS and the heart rate may be miscounted.
• The pacing pulse is a very small wave which cannot be displayed on
the monitor.
• When pacing detection is set to ON, the pacemaker spikes are rejected
which allows correct heart rate counting.
• When pacing detection is set to OFF, a Non-paced mark is displayed on
the Individual Bed window when the bedside monitor sends the pacing
detection information to the central monitor.
• When you monitor a premature baby or infant and the monitor
miscounts the narrow width QRS, set this to OFF.
• When pacing mark is set to ON, the pacing mark is displayed on the
ECG. Refer to the “Turning Pacing Mark ON/OFF” section.
Select whether or not to reject the pacemaker spike from the heart rate count.
Touch “ON” or “OFF” in “Pacing Detection”.
Turning Hum Filter ON/OFF

Set the hum filter on or off. Set to ON when there is a lot of hum interference
from the use of an electrosurgical unit or other instrument.
Touch “ON” or “OFF” in “Hum Filter”.
Turning Pacing Mark ON/OFF

Set whether or not to display pacing marks on the ECG waveform. Touch “ON”
or “OFF” in “Pacing Mark”.
Pacing mark: The pacing pulse is a very small wave which cannot be
displayed on the monitor. When you turn this setting to ON,
white pacing marks are displayed at the points where a pacing
spike is detected.
Pacing Mark
Pacing Mark ON Pacing Mark OFF
Turning Auto Lead Change ON/OFF

NOTE
This setting is only available for beds connected through the RU-960P/

13. PARAMETER SETUP
When set to “ON”, the analysis leads 1 and 2 can automatically change to
stable leads when there is an electrode detachment on the analysis lead. When
the analysis leads become stable again, the analysis leads change back to the
original lead. When the analysis lead 1 changes automatically, the “AUTO
LEAD CHANGE” message is displayed, but when there is a message of a
higher priority, this message is not displayed. When the analysis lead 2 changes
automatically, no message is displayed.
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
RESP Settings
On the Menu window, touch “RESP”. The RESP window opens.
Setting the Vital Sign Alarm

Set each respiration alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same
as on the Alarm Limits window of the Personal Setup. Refer to Section 6.
Turning the Impedance Respiration Measurement ON/OFF
CAUTION
When measuring respiration by impedance method and Impedance
Respiration Measurement on the RESP window is set to OFF,
respiration alarms do not occur even if each respiration alarm item is
set to ON.
NOTE
• Respiration settings are only available while measuring respiration.
• This setting is only available for beds connected through the RU-960P/
Set whether or not to use impedance method respiration measurement.

1. Touch “Resp Meas” to open the setting window.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
2. Touch “ON” or “OFF”.
Changing the Respiration Detection Sensitivity

NOTE
• The display sensitivity of respiration curve on the All Beds screen
and Individual Bed window is not synchronized with this respiration
detection sensitivity setting.
Set the detection sensitivity in respiration measurement.

When respiration counting is incorrect because the respiration waveform is too
large or small, change the detection sensitivity.
• For too large respiration waveform: Select smaller sensitivity
• For too small respiration waveform: Select larger sensitivity
1. Touch “Sensitivity” to open the setting window.
2. Touch the key for the desired sensitivity in “Sensitivity”. (The factory
default setting is ×1)
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
SpO2 Settings
On the Menu window, touch “SpO2”. The SpO2 window opens.

Status Alarm tab is not available.

Set each SpO2 alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as on
the Alarm Limits window of the Personal Setup. Refer to Section 6.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
NIBP Settings
On the Menu window, touch “NIBP”. The NIBP window opens.

Set each NIBP alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as on
Setting NIBP Measurement Mode and Interval
WARNING
When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
minutes, perform measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation.
Congestion may occur at the measurement site. When performing
periodic measurement for a long time, periodically check the 13
circulation condition.
NOTE
When the measurement interval less than 2.5 minutes is set, the
confirmation window appears. Touch “Yes” to set.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
1. Touch “Meas. and Settings” to open the setting window.
2. Set the measurement interval.

Manual: Perform single measurement.
STAT: Continuously repeat measurements for 15 minutes.
(Specific interval): Intervals selectable at the bedside monitor appear in
“Measurement Interval”. Measurement are performed
at the selected interval. (Auto Measurement)
Starting/Stopping NIBP Measurement
CAUTION
Before you remotely start and stop NIBP measurement from the
central monitor, confirm the state of the patient at the bedside
monitor. Carefully start and stop NIBP measurement from the central
monitor.
NOTE
The NIBP measurement cannot be stopped from the BSM series bedside
monitor through QI-910R interface. Stop the NIBP measurement from the
bedside monitor.
To start NIBP measurement,
1. Touch “START” at NIBP Measurement. A window to confirm the

measurement start appears.
2. Touch “Yes” to start measurement. Touch “No” to cancel starting

measurement.
To stop NIBP measurement, touch “STOP” at NIBP Measurement. When

measurement interval is set, measurement continues at the preset interval
until “STOP” is touched.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
3. When the NIBP measurement is finished, the individual bed window of the
bed is displayed with the measured values. When “Measurement Interval” is
set to “STAT”, the individual bed window is not displayed.
PRESS Settings
On the Menu window, touch “PRESS”. The PRESS window opens.

Set each PRESS alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as
on the Alarm Limits window of the Personal Setup. Refer to Section 6.
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Changing the Display Pattern and the Blood Pressure Label

NOTE
Blood pressure label setting is only available for beds connected through
the RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver. Display pattern can be
set at any beds.
You can change the display pattern of the blood pressure measurement value and
the label of the blood pressure measurement site.
1. Touch “Label/Disp.” The setting window opens.
2. After you touch the key for the display pattern or label name you want to
change, touch one of the “Select Display Pattern” keys.
Selectable display patterns are:
S/D/M: systolic/diastolic/mean
Mean
Selectable labels are:

ART: Arterial Pressure
You can set up to 2 lines (ART, ART2)
RAD: Radial Artery Pressure
DORS: Dorsal Artery Pressure
AO: Aortic Pressure
FEM: Femoral Artery Pressure
UA: Umbilical Artery Pressure
UV: Umbilical Vein Pressure
PAP: Pulmonary Artery Pressure
CVP: Central Venous Pressure
RAP: Right Atrial Pressure
RVP: Right Ventricular Pressure
LAP: Left Atrial Pressure
LVP: Left Ventricular Pressure
PRESS: Others
You can set up to 8 lines (P1 to P8)
ICP: Intracranial Pressure
You can set up to 4 lines (ICP, ICP2 to ICP4)

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Changing the Arterial Pressure Detection Sensitivity

You can change the arterial pressure detection sensitivity.
1. Touch “Other”. The setting window opens.
2. Touch “Adult/Child” or “Neonate”.

Adult/Child: Detection sensitivity is standard sensitivity (4.5 mmHg).
Neonate: Detection sensitivity becomes higher (1 mmHg).
NOTE
You can set the arterial pressure detection sensitivity when using a
RU-960P/ORG-9100 multiple patient receiver which accepts the arterial
pressure detection sensitivity setting.
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
TEMP Settings
On the Menu window, touch “TEMP”. The TEMP window opens.

Set each TEMP alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as on
Setting the Label for Temperature Measurement and Equation for ΔT

NOTE
This setting is only available for beds connected through an RU-960P/
You can set the label for the temperature measurement site and the equation for
ΔT.
1. Touch “Label/dT” to open the setting window.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
2. After you touch the key for the label name or equation for ΔT you want to
change, touch one of the “Select Label” keys.
Selectable labels are:
Tskin: Skin temperature
Up to 3 sites can be set. (Tskin, Tskin2, Tskin3)
Trect: Rectum temperature
Tcore: Core temperature
Tnaso: Nasal cavity temperature
Teso: Esophagus temperature
Ttymp: Tympanic membrane temperature
Tblad: Bladder temperature
Taxil: Axillary temperature
T1 to T8: Others
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
CO2 Settings
On the Menu window, touch “CO2”. The CO2 window opens.

Set each CO2 alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as on

13. PARAMETER SETUP
O2 Settings
On the Menu window, touch “O2”. The O2 window opens.

Set each FiO2 alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as on
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Anesthesia Gas Settings
On the Menu window, touch “Anesthesia Gas”. The Anesthesia Gas window
opens.

Set each Anesthesia Gas alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the
same as on the Alarm Limits window of the Personal Setup. Refer to Section 6.
NOTE
• Alarms at the external instrument such as ventilator multigas etc.
cannot be set at the central monitor.
• Parameter priority setting is not for each parameter of GAS but GAS.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Waveforms and Numerical Data

Every touch of a key in “Wave Display” and “Numerical Display” toggles it
between selected and unselected.
Touch to return to the

default settings.
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Ventilator Settings
On the Menu window, touch “Ventilator”. The Ventilator window opens.
NOTE
Parameter priority setting is not for each parameter of Ventilator but
Ventilator.
Set displayed parameters of waveforms and numeric data.

Perform this setting when you limit the ventilator parameters on the All
Beds screen and Individual Bed window. Only the parameters you set in this
“Parameter Setup” are displayed.
Every touch of key in “Wave Display” and “Numerical Display” toggles between
selected and unselected.

default settings.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
CCO Settings
On the Menu window, touch “CCO”. The CCO window opens.

Set each CCO alarm upper/lower limits. The setting procedure is the same as on
13

13. PARAMETER SETUP
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Numeric Data

NOTE
Parameter priority setting is not for each parameter of CCO but CCO.
Perform this setting when you limit the CCO parameters on the All Beds screen
and Individual Bed window. Only the parameters you set in this “Parameter
Setup” are displayed.
Every touch of key in “Numerical Display” toggles between selected and

unselected.

default settings.

13. PARAMETER SETUP
PiCCO Settings
On the Menu window, touch “PiCCO”. The PiCCO window opens.
Setting the Displayed Parameters of Numeric Data

NOTE
Parameter priority setting is not for each parameter of PiCCO but PiCCO.
Perform this setting when you limit the PiCCO parameters on the All Beds
screen and Individual Bed window. Only the parameters you set in this
“Parameter Setup” are displayed.
Every touch of key in “Numerical Display” toggles between selected and

unselected.

default settings.
13

Section 14 Personal Setup and Setup
Overview of Personal Setup and Setup.............................................................................................................. 14.2

Displaying Each Setting Window.............................................................................................................. 14.2
14

14. PERSONAL SETUP AND SETUP
Overview of Personal Setup and Setup
Personal Setup and Setup have the following settings for each bed.
Item Description
Patient admission and discharge, Pause
monitoring, Patient transfer, Change
Admit/Discharge
monitor/multiple patient receiver, Change
Personal remote filing bed
Setup Alarm Limits Setting vital sign alarms
Arrhythmia Alarm Setting arrhythmia alarms
ST Alarm Setting ST alarms
Alarm Master Display Setting alarms using alarm masters
Recording Setting recording
Setup
Channel Setting receiving channel
For details of each setting, refer to the following sections.
Admit/Discharge: Refer to Section 5.

Vital Sign Alarm: Refer to Section 6.
Arrhythmia Alarm: Refer to Section 6.
ST Alarm: Refer to Section 6.
Alarm Master Display: Refer to Section 6.
Recording: Refer to Section 11.
Channel: Refer to Section 5.
Displaying Each Setting Window

1. Touch the basic information area of the bed you want to set the settings for.
3. In “Personal Setup” or “Setup”, touch the key of the desired setting. The
setting window opens.

Section 15 RU-960P Multiple Patient
Receiver
General............................................................................................................................................................... 15.2
Transmitters and Available Parameters.................................................................................................... 15.3
Preparation......................................................................................................................................................... 15.6
Installing the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver..................................................................................... 15.6
Selecting the Receiver Type..................................................................................................................... 15.6
Installing the ZR-920P Receiver............................................................................................................... 15.6
Installing the Band Pass Filter.................................................................................................................. 15.6
Attaching Antennas.................................................................................................................................. 15.6
Turning On the Power............................................................................................................................... 15.6
Display on the Central Monitor when Not Receiving Data from the Transmitter....................................... 15.6
Changing Settings.................................................................................................................................... 15.7
ECG Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................. 15.7
Respiration Monitoring........................................................................................................................................ 15.7
SpO2 Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................. 15.8
NIBP Monitoring................................................................................................................................................. 15.8
IBP Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................... 15.8
Temperature Monitoring...................................................................................................................................... 15.8
CO2 Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................... 15.9
Initializing the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.............................................................................................. 15.9
15

15. RU-960P MULTIPLE PATIENT RECEIVER
General
The RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver is designed as a component of an MU-

960R Central Monitor Main Unit to be used in the ICU, CCU, HCU, recovery
room, operating room and general ward. It can receive the ECG, respiration,
SpO2, NIBP, IBP (up to 3 channels), CO2 and temperature (up to 2 channels) data
from a transmitter and send it to a central monitor. The multiple patient receiver
also sends processed vital sign data such as real time heart rate, respiration rate
and alarm data to a central monitor. Data for up to 8 patients can be received and
sent by the multiple patient receiver.
This version of RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver can be used with MU-960R
Central Monitor Main Unit version 01-06 or later.
CAUTION
Use the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver only with the specified
version of MU-960P Central Monitor Main Unit. If the multiple patient
receiver is used with the unspecified version of the central monitor
main unit, heart rate might be counted incorrectly or noise and P-
waves might be incorrectly counted as QRS because the QRS
detection type cannot be set on the multiple patient receiver. This
could cause failure to detect asystole.
NOTE
• Upgrade the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver and central monitor
to the Nihon Kohden recommended software version. Only use the
specified configuration of units. If more than one RU-960P Multiple
Patient Receiver is used in the same facility, make sure the multiple
patient receivers have the same software version. If multiple patient
receivers with different software versions are used together, correct
system operation cannot be guaranteed.
• When Arrhythmia Type is set to Extended on the ORG Setting of the
central monitor and RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver is connected to
the central monitor network, check that the version of other instruments
in the network corresponds to the Extended setting. Otherwise,
monitoring is not available.

CNS-9601 Central Monitor

ZR-920P Receiver
Install in the multiple
patient receiver.
Transmitter
(Refer to next page)
Transmitters and Available Parameters

The multiple patient receiver can receive data from the following transmitters.
Available measuring parameters depend on the transmitter.
A bedside monitor with attached ZB-800P, ZB-900P or ZS-900P transmitter can

also be used as a transmitter.
15

Transmitter Receiver Type Parameters

ZB-811P/ZB-910P
Single-lead ECG
ZS-910P
ZB-823P Dual-lead ECG
ZB-822P/ZB-920P Single-lead ECG
ZS-920P Respiration (impedance method)
Single-lead ECG
ZB-930P
Respiration (impedance method)
ZS-930P/ZS-530P
SpO2
Single-lead ECG
ZS-940P
SpO2
Non-invasive blood pressure
Single-lead ECG
BSM-1100 series with
SpO2
ZB-800P
Single-lead ECG
SpO2
1-ch invasive blood pressure
Temperature
AA-101P and ZB-800P
The following parameters depend on the setup of the
bedside monitor. Refer to the operator’s manual.
Respiration (thermistor method)
CO2
Single-lead ECG
BSM-2101 with ZB-800P SpO2
A Non-invasive blood pressure
Single-lead ECG
BSM-2102 with ZB-800P SpO2
Single-lead ECG
SpO2
Temperature
ZB-900P/ZS-900P
Respiration (impedance/thermistor method)
1-ch or 2-ch invasive blood pressure
CO2
Single-lead ECG
SpO2
BSM-3101 with ZB-800P
2-ch temperature
Single-lead ECG
SpO2
2-ch temperature
ZB-900P/ZS-900P
CO2

Transmitter Receiver Type Parameters

Single-lead ECG
SpO2
2-ch temperature
ZS-900P
CO2
Single-lead ECG
BSM-7103/7113 with
ZB-800P
Single-lead ECG
BSM-7104/7114 with Respiration (impedance method)
ZB-800P SpO2
Temperature
A
Single-lead ECG
BSM-7105/7115 with
SpO2
ZB-800P
Temperature
Single-lead ECG
SpO2
BSM-7106/7116 with
ZB-800P
Temperature
OLV-3100 with ZB-900P/
SpO2
ZS-900P
Single-lead ECG
OPV-1500 with ZB-900P/ Respiration (impedance/thermistor method)
ZS-900P SpO2
Single-lead ECG
ZM-920P (3 electrodes)
Eight-lead ECG
Single-lead ECG
ZM-930P (3 electrodes) Respiration (impedance method)
SpO2
Eight-lead ECG
ZM-930P (6 electrodes) Respiration (impedance method)
C
SpO2
Single-lead ECG
SpO2
Eight-lead ECG
SpO2
15

Preparation
Installing the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver

Refer to Administrator’s Guide.
Selecting the Receiver Type

Select the receiver type according to the transmitter type. Refer to “Transmitters
and Available Parameters” for the transmitter and receiver type.
Installing the ZR-920P Receiver

One receiver receives data from one transmitter. To monitor eight patients at the
same time, eight receivers must be installed in the multiple patient receiver.
Refer to the ZR-920P Receiver Installation Guide when installing a receiver into
the multiple patient receiver.
Installing the Band Pass Filter

A band pass filter eliminates environmental interference when installed in
the multiple patient receiver. There are different band pass filters for different
channel ranges.
Refer to Administrator’s Guide for installing the band pass filter.
Attaching Antennas
For details about antennas and antenna constructions, contact your Nihon
Kohden representative.
Turning On the Power

When the central monitor is turned on, the power of multiple patient receiver is
on (there is no power switch on the multiple patient receiver).
Display on the Central Monitor when Not Receiving Data from the Transmitter
When the central monitor cannot receive data from the transmitter, “SIGNAL
LOSS” message appears and triangle waveforms are displayed on the screen.
When “ECG Measurement” on the ECG window is set to OFF, only the
“SIGNAL LOSS” message appears.

Changing Settings
After turning on the power of multiple patient receiver, change the settings on
the central monitor so that the data can be properly received from and sent to the
other instruments.
Set the following settings on the central monitor.

• ORG Settings (Group, Channel, Antenna, Mode, Type, Alarm Level)
Refer to Section 7-1 “ORG Setting” in Administrator’s Guide.
• Patient attribute information
Refer to Section 5 “Admitting Patient”.
• Parameter Settings
Refer to “ECG Settings”, “RESP Settings”, “PRESS Settings” and “TEMP
Settings” in Section 13.
ECG Monitoring
Refer to Section 7 “All Beds Screen” and Section 9 “Individual Bed Window”
for monitoring screen/window. Refer to Section 13 “Parameter Setup” for the
settings.
CAUTION
Respiration Monitoring
settings.
15

SpO2 Monitoring
settings.
CAUTION
The sensitivity of the pulse waveform measured by a ZM-930P
transmitter is automatically changed inside the transmitter. When the
sensitivity is changed, the waveform becomes flat for about one
second.
NIBP Monitoring
settings.
IBP Monitoring
settings.
Temperature Monitoring
settings.
NOTE
Only the numeric data is displayed on the central monitor for Temperature
and NIBP.

CO2 Monitoring
settings.
Initializing the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver
When initializing the RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver is necessary, such as

when the multiple patient receiver is no longer used in the network, or frequent
network communication errors occur, do the following procedure.
Following data returns to factory default settings.

• Patient attribute information
• System Setup settings
• Parameter Setup settings
NOTE
Initializing the multiple patient receiver does not initialize the Arrhythmia
recall files, tabular trend data and trend data.
1. Turn the central monitor main unit power off.
2. While pressing the INITIALIZATION switch on the multiple patient

receiver with the end of a paper clip or thin object, turn the central monitor
main unit power on.
3. When the ERROR lamp lights then turns off, release the INITIALIZATION
switch.
The multiple patient receiver is initialized.
NOTE
Do not press the INITIALIZATION switch unless initialization is necessary.
ERROR lamp INITIALIZATION

switch
15

Section 16 Error Messages and
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................. 16.2
System..................................................................................................................................................... 16.2
Network.................................................................................................................................................... 16.3
Measurement Value.................................................................................................................................. 16.3
Alarm........................................................................................................................................................ 16.3
Admitting/Discharging.............................................................................................................................. 16.4
All Beds Screen/Individual Bed Window................................................................................................... 16.5
Trend Window........................................................................................................................................... 16.6
Tabular Trend Window.............................................................................................................................. 16.6
Hemodynamics List Window.................................................................................................................... 16.6
Arrhythmia Recall Window....................................................................................................................... 16.7
ST Recall Window.................................................................................................................................... 16.7
Full Disclosure Window............................................................................................................................ 16.8
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window................................................................................................................ 16.8
Report Window......................................................................................................................................... 16.8
Recording................................................................................................................................................. 16.9
Overview Bed Window........................................................................................................................... 16.10
Parameter Setup.................................................................................................................................... 16.10
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver........................................................................................................ 16.11
General........................................................................................................................................ 16.11
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 16.11
Respiration Monitoring................................................................................................................. 16.12
SpO2 Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 16.12
NIBP Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 16.13
IBP Monitoring............................................................................................................................. 16.14
Temperature Monitoring............................................................................................................... 16.14
CO2 Monitoring............................................................................................................................. 16.14
Error Messages................................................................................................................................................ 16.16
Messages From Bedside Monitors/Multiple Patient Receiver................................................................ 16.16
Messages about Measurement Conditions of Each Parameter................................................... 16.16
Other............................................................................................................................................ 16.20
Messages From Central Monitor............................................................................................................ 16.21
WS-960P Recorder Unit............................................................................................................... 16.21
Laser Printer................................................................................................................................ 16.21
Other............................................................................................................................................ 16.22
Messages From RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver............................................................................. 16.23
General........................................................................................................................................ 16.23
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 16.24
SpO2 Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 16.25
NIBP Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 16.26 16
CO2 Monitoring............................................................................................................................. 16.26

16. ERROR MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
System
Trouble Possible Cause/Criteria Action

Reboot the display with the following
procedure.
1. Confirm the cable connection for the
touch screen.
2. Turn off the LCD display and then turn
The touch screen keys do not The touched position and activated it on again.
function. position do not match. 3. Perform touch screen initialization and
calibration at the Touchkeys Setting
If the trouble remains after actions 1 to 3,
exit the central monitor program and restart
your computer.
The screen is out of Select the correct screen frequency referring
Display position is not correct.
synchronization. to the LCD display manual.
At present, the CNS-9601 Central Monitor
Cannot display data saved in the
–– cannot display data saved in the NFS-9000
NFS-9000 Network File Server.
Network File Server.
Data is deleted when the central
monitor power is turned off.
The system crashes when trying
Faulty storage device. The central monitor may lose its function as
to review the past data.
a monitor.
The system crashes periodically
such as once a day.
Clock error.
If the clock becomes incorrect after
Incorrect date and time. adjusting the clock and turning the Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
central monitor power on again, the
back up battery is weak.
• Slow operation. Shut down the central monitor system
• It takes time to read out the program and restart it. For a stable
Windows is unstable.
saved data. operation, restart the central monitor system
• Malfunction. program once every three months.

Network

The bedside monitor or multiple
Turn on the bedside monitor or multiple
patient receiver for that bed is
patient receiver.
turned off.
A desired bed is not displayed in
On the Monitor Setting window, check other
the selected group.
The desired bed belongs to another groups to find the desired bed. Check group
group. names of each bedside monitor and multiple
patient receiver.
8000 series beds connected to the network
Cannot find 8000 series beds in through the CNS-9301/9302 central monitor
––
the network. belong to the same group as the CNS-
9301/9302 central monitor.
Measurement Value

Waveform too large or too small.
Adjust the QRS detection sensitivity.
QRS detection threshold is changed.
Heart rate is not counted correctly.
QRS and pacemaker spikes are not
Turn pacing detection ON.
distinguished.
Arrhythmia is not measured
ECG learning is not correct. Relearn patient’s ECG.
correctly.
Heart rate and arrhythmia are not ECG lead that is inappropriate for
Change the ECG lead used for analysis.
measured correctly. analysis is selected.
Hum interference on the ECG
Noise on the ECG waveform. Set the hum filter to ON.
waveform.
The ST analysis point is not set Confirm that the ST analysis point setting is
The ST value is inaccurate.
properly. properly set for ST analysis.
Waveform too large or too small.
Set the proper sensitivity.
Respiration is not measured Respiration sensitivity is changed.
correctly. Respiration measurement is set to
Turn the respiration measurement ON.
OFF.
Alarm

Each alarm setting of the Personal
Turn the alarms ON for the bed.
Setup is set to OFF.
Arrhythmia analysis is turned
Turn arrhythmia analysis ON on both the
OFF at the bedside monitor and/or
No alarm. bedside monitor and central monitor.
central monitor.
Turn all alarms ON at the bedside monitor.
All alarms are set to OFF at the
This operation cannot be done at the central
bedside monitor.
monitor.
All alarms for a bed cannot be This operation is not available at the central
––
turned ON/OFF together. monitor.
16

Admitting/Discharging

Cannot transfer a patient’s data. You are trying to do this operation
Do this on the central monitor where the
Cannot change the receiving on a central monitor where the
patient’s data is saved.
channel. patient’s data is not saved.
You are trying to do this operation
Do this on the central monitor where the
on a central monitor where the
Cannot admit/discharge a patient. patient’s data is saved.
patient’s data is not saved.
The bedside monitor is turned off. Turn on the bedside monitor.
Cannot select a bedside monitor
as a transfer destination bedside The bedside monitor is turned off. Turn on the bedside monitor.
monitor.
To save the patient’s data in the first central
The patient was transferred between monitor, do not transfer the patient to a
The patient’s data before patient
bedside monitors in different CNS bedside monitor in a third CNS group
transfer is lost.
groups more than once. after the patient is transferred to a bedside
monitor in a second CNS group.
Turn on the central monitor where the
The patient’s data before patient The central monitor where the
patient’s data before the patient transfer is
transfer cannot be reviewed. patient’s data is saved is turned off.
saved.
The message “Transferring” is
During patient transfer, the central
displayed on the screen but it
monitor was turned off. Or, there Admit the patient at the destination bedside
does not change to “Completed”.
was trouble on the network and the monitor. The lost data cannot be restored.
All patient’s data is lost after
transfer failed.
patient transfer.
You transferred an 8000 series bed You cannot transfer ST recall data of an
ST recall data is lost after patient
that was a monitored bed of a CNS- 8000 series bed that was a monitored bed of
transfer.
9301/9302 central monitor. a CNS-9301/9302 central monitor.

All Beds Screen/Individual Bed Window

Numeric data and messages The display is refreshed. This is
––
disappear for a moment. normal.
The bed is discharged. Admit the patient.
The monitoring of the bed is paused. Resume monitoring.
The bedside monitor or the multiple Turn on the bedside monitor or the
patient receiver is turned off. multiple patient receiver.
The currently measured lead/label Confirm the setting so that the currently
is different from the lead/label to be measured lead/label matches the lead/
displayed on the screen. label to be displayed on the screen.
Waveform is not displayed. The waveform is not selected as the Set the waveform to the displayed
displayed waveform. waveform.
The bed is not registered as a
Register the bed to the monitored bed.
monitored bed.
Network is disconnected. Confirm the network connection.
The bedside monitor is an 8000 series Several types of waveforms cannot
bed connected to the network through be displayed on 8000 series bedside
the CNS-9301/9302 central monitor. monitors.
The parameter of the numeric data is Set the parameter of the numeric data to
not selected as the displayed parameter. the displayed parameter.
The label of the currently measured Confirm the setting so that the label of
numeric data is different from the label the currently measured numeric data
to be displayed. matches the label to be displayed.
Numeric data is not displayed.
A vital sign alarm occurred in a
parameter that is not set to a displayed The numeric data of a parameter whose
parameter and its numeric data took the vital sign alarm is currently occurring
place of a numeric data that is set to the has a higher priority to be displayed.
displayed parameter.
Measure the waveform or numeric data.
Confirm the setting so that the currently
measured lead/label matches the lead/
label to be displayed on the screen.
The desired waveform or numeric The waveform or numeric data is not Register the desired parameter on the
data cannot be selected. measured. Parameters window of the System Setup
screen. A parameter registered at the
Parameters window of the System Setup
screen is displayed on setting keys even
when it is not currently measured.
Some of the patient waveforms cannot
be displayed on this central monitor
Display the All Beds screen at the
Some waveforms are not while another central monitor that is
central monitor where the patient’s data
displayed. connected to a multiple patient receiver
is saved.
or a signal exchanger displays the
Individual Bed window of the patient.
Refer to Section 18 “Parameter Priority”
The desired parameter cannot be The parameter is a parameter that
for the list of parameters that can be
displayed. cannot be displayed.
displayed on the central monitor.
Cannot find a key to freeze a Those functions are not assigned to
Assign these functions to function keys.
waveform or relearn ECG. function keys.
16

Trend Window

The central monitor where the bed’s Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
Trend data is not displayed.
data is saved is turned off. data is saved.
The central monitor where the bed’s Trend data is not created when the central
Trend data is not saved. data is saved was turned off during monitor where the bed’s data is saved is
measurement. turned off.
Tabular Trend Window

Tabular trend data is not The central monitor where the bed’s Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
displayed. data is saved is turned off. data is saved.
The parameter is not registered
Cannot select a parameter you Register the parameter at the Parameters
at the Parameters window of the
want to add to the tabular trend. window of the System Setup screen.
When an NIBP measurement is
delayed or remeasured and its
Set the tabular trend display interval to 1
NIBP numeric data is not measurement timing does not
min. The NIBP tabular trend and all NIBP
displayed. match the selected tabular trend
measurements are displayed.
interval, that NIBP data will not
appear on the tabular trend.
The central monitor where the bed’s Tabular trend data is not created when the
Tabular trend data is not saved. data is saved was turned off during central monitor where the bed’s data is
measurement. saved is turned off.
Hemodynamics List Window

Hemodynamics data is not The central monitor where the bed’s Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
displayed. data is saved is turned off. data is saved.
The central monitor where the bed’s Hemodynamics data is not created when
data is saved was turned off during the central monitor where the bed’s data is
Hemodynamics data is not saved. The central monitor can display
The bedside monitor cannot output hemodynamics data of the BSM-4100 series
hemodynamics data to the network. bedside monitor only when the bedside
monitor version is 02-09 or later.

Arrhythmia Recall Window

Arrhythmia recall files are not The arrhythmia analysis is set to
Turn the arrhythmia analysis to ON.
created. OFF.
Arrhythmia recall files for a
Recall file creation for the
particular arrhythmia are not Turn the setting to ON.
arrhythmia is set to OFF.
created.
Arrhythmia recall files for
Recall file creation for the
unnecessary arrhythmias are Turn the setting to OFF.
arrhythmia is set to ON.
created.
The number of arrhythmia recall
files for one bed exceeded the limit
Arrhythmia recall files are
and older files are deleted. Deleted files cannot be recovered.
deleted.
You touch “Delete” when several
files have a deletion mark.
Turn the bedside monitor or multiple patient
The bedside monitor is turned off.
receiver on.
Arrhythmia recall files are not
displayed.
The arrhythmia types to be
Select the arrhythmias to be displayed on
displayed on the screen are not
the screen.
selected.
The central monitor where the bed’s Arrhythmia recall files are not created when
Arrhythmia recall files are not
data is saved was turned off during the central monitor where the bed’s data is
saved.
Waveforms displayed for the multi
waveform display are synchronized with
When the multi waveform Stored waveforms and displayed
the displayed waveform settings on the
display is selected, the desired waveforms are not selected for full
Full Disclosure window. Set at “Stored
waveforms cannot be displayed. disclosure waveform.
Waves” and “Displayed Waves” on the Full
Disclosure window.
Multi waveform cannot be The QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing Install the QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing
displayed. Program Kit is not installed. Program Kit.
ST Recall Window

With the creation interval of 30 seconds, the
ST recall files for 72 hours cannot The interval of ST recall file total number of files exceeds the limit. To
be saved. creation is set to 30 seconds. save recall file for 72 hours, set the creation
interval to 1 min or more.
The central monitor cannot save or display
ST recall files of the following bedside
ST recall files are not saved. monitors:
The bedside monitor cannot output
• BSM-4100 series bedside monitor whose
ST recall files to a network.
version is not 02-09 or later.
• 8000 series bed that is a monitored bed of
a CNS-9301/9302 central monitor.
16

Full Disclosure Window

The QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing Install the QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing
Full disclosure waveform is not Program Kit is not installed. Program Kit.
displayed. The QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing Choose a central monitor with the QP-963P
Program Kit is not installed in the Full Disclosure Filing Program Kit installed
central monitor where the bed’s for the central monitor where the bed’s data
data is saved. is saved.
The desired full disclosure The full disclosure waveform is not Choose the waveform for the stored
waveform is not displayed. saved. waveform on the Full Disclosure window.
The parameter is not measured. Measure the parameter.

The desired waveform cannot be
selected for a stored waveform. This central monitor is not the This setting is only available at the central
central monitor where the bed’s monitor where the bed’s data is saved or the
data is saved. BSS-9800 Bedside Station (central mode).
The waveforms that are selected data is saved is turned off. data is saved.
for the stored waveform are not The currently measured lead/label
Make the currently measured lead/label
saved. is different from the lead/label to be
match the lead/label to be saved.
saved.
Turn arrhythmia analysis to ON at the
Arrhythmia analysis is set to OFF
bedside monitor and central monitor. You
at the bedside monitor and/or the
cannot set color to an arrhythmia that does
central monitor.
not have color.
On the Full Disclosure window, Turn the arrhythmia alarm to ON at the
The arrhythmia alarm is set to OFF
the arrhythmia waveform is not bedside monitor and central monitor. You
at the bedside monitor and/or the
indicated with the preset color. cannot set color to an arrhythmia that does
central monitor.
not have color.
Noise interference.
You cannot set color to an arrhythmia that
Poor electrode attachment
does not have color.
condition.
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window

The QP-964P 12 Lead ECG
Install the QP-964P 12 Lead ECG
Interpretation Filing Program Kit is
Interpretation Filing Program Kit.
not installed.
ECG 12 lead analysis files are not
The central monitor can display ECG 12
displayed. The bedside monitor cannot output
lead analysis files of the BSM-4100 series
ECG 12 lead analysis files to a
bedside monitor only when the bedside
network.
monitor version is 03-02 or later.
Report Window

Report printing starts The report printing mode is set to
Set the mode to “Manual”.
automatically. “Auto”.

Recording

In the following recordings,
waveforms that you do not want
to record are recorded.
Waveforms displayed on the All
- Manual recording ––
Beds screen are recorded.
- Periodic recording
- Alarm recording
- Call recording
In the dual waveform recording, Recorded waveform is not selected
Select the desired waveform on the
waveforms that you do not want on the Recording window of the
to record are recorded. Setup.
In the remote delayed waveform
Recorded waveform is selected at
recording, waveforms that you do ––
the bedside monitor.
not want to record are recorded.
Alarm recording is not performed Recall file creation for the
Turn the setting to ON.
for a particular arrhythmia. arrhythmia is set to OFF.
Vital sign alarm recording is not Vital sign alarm recording is set to
Set vital sign alarm recording to ON.
performed. OFF.
Arrhythmia alarm recording is Arrhythmia alarm recording is set
Set arrhythmia alarm recording to ON.
not performed. to OFF.
ST alarm recording is not
ST alarm recording is set to OFF. Set ST alarm recording to ON.
performed.
Periodic recording is not Periodic recording is set to OFF on
Set periodic recording to ON.
performed. the Recording window of the Setup.
Call recording is set to OFF on the
Call recording is not performed. Set call recording to ON.
Trend data are not printed for the Set the correct settings on the Report
Report settings are not correct.
report printing. window.
On the Recording window of
Dual waveform recording is not
the Setup, “Second Wave” at Set a desired waveform for “Second Wave”
performed. (Only one waveform
“Recording Pattern” is set to at “Recording Pattern”.
is recorded/printed.)
NONE.
If you have replaced the printer or central
Printing is not possible from the
The setup is wrong. monitor, you need to install the network
network printer.
printer again.
Waveform is not printed on the Waveform cannot be printed on the
––
screen copy. screen copy.
16

Overview Bed Window

When the Individual Bed window
of a patient is displayed on a central
monitor that is connected to a
Display the All Beds screen at the central
Some waveforms are not multiple patient receiver or a signal
monitor that saves the data of the bedside
displayed. exchanger, some of the patient
monitor you want to display.
waveforms cannot be displayed
on the Overview Bed of another
central monitor.
The desired bed cannot be To display data of an 8000 series bed on this
selected for the Overview Bed The bed is an 8000 series bed. central monitor, a central monitor on the
screen. network must be monitoring the bed.
The alarm for the overview bed No bedside monitor is selected at
Select a desired bed as an overview bed.
does not occur. the Overview Bed window.
Cannot silence an overview bed To stop overview bed alarm, stop
alarm. An overview bed alarm cannot be monitoring any overview bed by touching
An overview bed alarm of an silenced at the central monitor. “Stop monitoring” on the Overview Bed
unintended bed occurs. Menu window.
Parameter Setup

Available settings depend on
Available settings differ among
the bedside monitor model and ––
bedside monitors.
connection method.


General

Network cable(s) in the network is
The LINK lamp is off. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
disconnected or damaged.
The ERROR lamp continues to
System error. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
light.
The distance between the
For stable signal reception, contact your
transmitter and antenna is too far or
Nihon Kohden representative.
there is interference on the signal.
Extend the electrode lead because the
electrode lead is also the antenna. Keep
The electrode lead is twisted or not
the transmitter approx. 10 cm away from
Sometimes there is a signal loss. straight.
the patient for optimum waveform signal
transmission.
Sometimes there is a pulse noise
Place other electronic equipment a few
on ECG.
meters away from the multiple patient
Electromagnetic interference. receiver.
If the problem cannot be solved, use the
band pass filter.
The antenna setting on the monitor Set the antenna setting on the monitor
is not correct. correctly.
The cable is disconnected from the Check that the cable is correctly connected
transmitter. to the transmitter.
The waveforms and data do not See above (“Sometimes there is a signal
Unstable signal.
appear on the monitor screen. loss”).
If ECG monitoring is necessary, change the
ECG measurement is turned off.
setting to on.
Make sure that there is at least 5 cm on the
The multiple patient receiver is There is not enough space around
side and rear and 10 cm above the multiple
too hot. the multiple patient receiver.
patient receiver.
ECG Monitoring
Problem Possible Cause/Criteria Action

The QRS wave is not recognized
Select another lead.
properly.
The heart rate is inaccurate. Pacing detection is set at OFF. Turn it ON.
QRS detection sensitivity is QRS is too small: Increase the sensitivity.
insufficient. QRS is too large: Decrease the sensitivity.
The reference ECG is different from
“Learning ECG” is required.
the patient’s stable ECG.
Select a lead that would minimize
The arrhythmia alarm occurs Body movement and
the effect from body movement and
frequently when heart rate is electromyography.
electromyography.
normal.
You might need to perform antenna
The status of signal reception is
construction.
poor.
16

Respiration Monitoring

Respiration measurement is set to
Turn the respiration measurement ON.
The respiration waveform is not OFF.
displayed on the screen. Malfunction of the respiration Replace the respiration pickup with a new
pickup. one.
When measuring at the nostrils, the Attach the respiration pickup to a position
position of the respiration pickup is where sufficient temperature changes can
not appropriate. be seen.
The respiration pickup for nose is
The amplitude of the respiration Measure with a respiration pickup for
used for measuring a patient with
waveform is small or becomes a airway.
trachea tube inserted.
baseline.
The temperature difference between
inspiration and respiration is small
Use the impedance method.
due to increase in temperature of the
inspired air.
The inspiration temperature
The respiration and inspiration
is higher than the respiration Use the impedance method.
phases are reversed.
temperature.
Pneumograph is too small: Increase the
The respiration rate is not The respiration waveform amplitude sensitivity.
accurate. is too small. Pneumograph is too large: Decrease the
sensitivity.
SpO2 Monitoring

The probe size is inappropriate. Use the correct size probe.
The probe is attached to the same
limb that is used for NIBP or IBP Attach the probe to the other limb.
measurement.
Unstable SpO2 value.
Locate the ESU as far as possible from
An ESU is used. the probe and wait until the pulse wave
stabilizes.
Measuring on the venous pulse. Cannot measure correctly.
Attach the probe correctly. (The emitter and
The probe is not attached properly.
detector of the probe must face each other.)
The attachment site is inappropriate. Attach the probe to a site 1 cm thick.
If necessary, remove nail polish and clean
The measuring site is not clean.
SpO2 value on the instrument and the measuring site.
CO oximeter do not match. Too much abnormal hemoglobin
Cannot measure correctly.
(HbCO, MetHB, etc.).
Dye (methylene blue or indocyanine
green) is injected in the blood.
Measuring during CPR. Cannot measure correctly.
Probe was disinfected by an Disinfect the probe using the specified
unspecified procedure. method.
Probe is damaged.
The disposable probe is repeatedly
Replace the probe with a new one.
used.
Light interference. Cover the attachment site with a blanket.
Sine-wave noise on the pulse
The line frequency setting on the Set the correct line frequency on the bedside
wave.
bedside monitor is not correct. monitor.

NIBP Monitoring

The cuff hose is not connected to Connect the cuff hose to the socket
Cuff inflation pressure is less than
the cuff socket properly. properly.
10 mmHg or NIBP data display
The cuff is not wrapped around the
disappears for a few seconds. Wrap the cuff around the upper arm.
arm or is wrapped too loosely.
The cuff hose is not connected to Connect the cuff hose to the bedside
the bedside monitor cuff socket. monitor socket firmly.
The cuff hose or air hose may be
The cuff does not inflate. folded or squeezed when the cuff
pressure display on the screen Check the cuff hose and air hose.
increases quickly but the actual cuff
does not inflate.
Select the cuff which fits the patient’s limb
The cuff size is not correct.
circumference.
The cuff is not wrapped around the Wrap the cuff around the upper arm, not too
Abnormal measurement results
arm correctly. tightly or too loosely.
are displayed.
NIBP data is not correct because of Prevent the patient from moving during
body movement. measurement.
Measurement on the wrong site. Measure NIBP at the correct site.
The NIBP START/STOP key on the
The cuff is suddenly deflated
bedside monitor is pressed during ––
during inflation.
inflation.
Auto measurement does not start
The time interval for the NIBP auto
even when the time interval has Set the correct time interval.
measurement is set incorrectly.
passed.
The measurement mode is set to
The cuff suddenly inflates. Check the time interval.
auto mode.
Cannot connect cuff to the air
Unspecified cuff is used. Use a cuff specified by Nihon Kohden.
hose.
Noise which disables calculation of
Remove the cause.
the blood pressure has interfered.
Ask the patient not to move too much
The pulse wave is unstable due to
Cannot measure NIBP. and perform invasive blood pressure
arrhythmia.
measurement as required.
The air hose is bent or squeezed. Remove the cause.
The cuff has worn out. Use a new cuff.
Measuring over a long period Increase the measuring interval.
Blood congestion occurs. of time at intervals less than 2.5
minutes. Do not measure NIBP over a long time.
Do not perform NIBP measurement on a
Thrombus occurs. Measuring a sickle anemia patient.
sickle anemia patient.
16

IBP Monitoring

Air bubbles remain in the circuit. Remove the air bubbles.
An extra tube is connected in the
Remove the extra tube.
circuit.
The acquired blood pressure
The position of the blood pressure Check the position of the blood pressure
value is different from the
transducer is inappropriate. transducer.
estimated value.
A blood pressure transducer with
Check the blood pressure transducer.
different sensitivities is used.
Other causes. Perform zero balance adjustment again.
No invasive blood pressure value The measurement is out of range. Check the measuring condition.
appears on the screen. The transducer is damaged. Replace the transducer with a new one.
Temperature Monitoring

Replace the temperature probe with a new
The temperature probe is faulty.
The temperature value is not one.
displayed on the screen. Transmitter or bedside monitor
malfunction.
CO2 Monitoring

The airway adapter is dirty. Replace the airway adapter with a new one.
CO2 is mixed in the inspiration. Refer to the bedside monitor operator’s
(TG-900P CO2 sensor kit only) manual.
The measurement is performed
where atmospheric pressure is low, Consider the atmospheric pressure when
The measured value is low.
such as at high altitude. making evaluation.
(TG-900P CO2 sensor kit only)
Zero calibration is not performed.
(TG-950P/TG-970P CO2 sensor kit Calibrate the airway adapter.
only)
Anesthetic gas is used.
The measured value is high
O2: 4 L/min, N2O: 2 L/min, Set the correct inspired gas composition.
(error is about 8 mmHg).
sevoflurane: 1%
Oscillation. Check the respirator and remove the cause.
The respiration rate of the patient is
very high or respiration is irregular.
After completing suction, wait at least 20
Currently doing suctioning.
seconds, then detect the inspiration again
The measured value is inaccurate. (TG-900P CO2 sensor kit only)
and correct the error.
A Jackson Rees respiration circuit
or Mapleson D respiration circuit is
connected to the patient.
Oscillation. Check the respirator and remove the cause.
The respiration waveform does
The airway adapter is disconnected Connect the airway adapter to the CO2
not appear.
from the CO2 sensor kit. sensor kit.


CO2 sensor or CO2 adapter is faulty. Replace the CO2 sensor or CO2 adapter with
(TG-900P CO2 sensor kit only) a new one.
The red LED on the CO2 adapter
The red LED blinks when apnea is longer
blinks. Apnea for longer than 20 seconds.
than 20 s regardless of the alarm setting on
the monitor.
16

Error Messages
Error messages are categorized into two types, messages sent from bedside
monitors/multiple patient receiver and messages generated at the central monitor.
Messages From Bedside Monitors/Multiple Patient Receiver

Messages about Measurement Conditions of Each Parameter
The central monitor receives error messages from bedside monitors and multiple
patient receiver and displays them on the screen. Here is the message list. For
causes and countermeasures for each message, refer to the bedside monitor/
multiple patient receiver operator’s manual.
Some messages displayed at the bedside monitor/multiple patient receiver are not
displayed or different on the central monitor.
An item with an asterisk (*) is an alarm.
Parameter Message
* CHECK LEADS
* CHG ELECTRODE
* NOISE
* CANNOT ANALYZE
Arrhy Analy Off
ECG SMALL QRS
RHYTHM CHG
LEARNING
LOW mV
HIGH mV
PACING
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
* Probe Off
* Probe Broken
SpO2 No Pulse
* Light Interfer.
Pulse Search
* Check Probe Site
M (Unstable Pulse)
Small Pulse

Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
RESP
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
* Safety Valve Open
* No Pulse
* Meas Time Out
NIBP * Check Cuff/Hose
* Systolic Over
Re-measuring
Please Wait
Small Pulse
Zeroing
Noise
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Check Label
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
PRESS
Out of Range
Zero Imbalance
Zero Unstable
Zero Out of Range
Zeroing Complete
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
TEMP * Check Label
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
CO2 16
* Connector Off
(Mainstream)
* Check Sensor
* Adapter Error

Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Module Overheat
CO2
* Line Block
(Sidestream)
* Filter Line Off
* Replace Scubber
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
O2
* Check Sensor
Cal?
Calibrating
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Connector Off
FLOW * Check Sensor
* Change Sensor
Calibrating
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* OM2 Disconnected
SvO2 * Check OM2
* OM2 Failure
Out of Range
Parameter Message
* Unit Failure
* Connector Off
* Check Catheter
CCO * Catheter Location
CO<1.0L/m
Signal Adapting
Unstable Tb
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Connector Off
PiCCO
* Check Sensor
* Alarm

Parameter Message
* Unit Failure
Anesthesia Gas * Too Many Params
* Com Error
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
tcPO2/tcPCO2 * Connector Off
* Com Error
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
BIS
* Connector Off
* Com Error
Parameter Message
* Unit Failure
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
CNIBP
Pulse Search
Sensor Expired
Out of Range
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
EEG * Connector Off
* Check Sensor
* Alarm
Parameter Message
* Connector Off
VENT
* Alarm
16

Other
Message Possible Cause/Criteria Action

Check the patient condition and ensure
Weak electric field strength of a
patient’s safety. Then check the followings:
wireless telemeter.
• Remaining charge of the transmitter
SIGNAL LOSS*1 battery
The network communication is lost • Transmitter antenna lead condition
during sleep mode. • Distance between the multiple patient
receiver and transmitter
BATTERY*1 Weak transmitter battery*3 Replace the batteries with new ones.
The CALL button on the transmitter
CALL*1 ––
was pressed.
Two or more transmitters have the
This channel is already in use*2 Change the channel of the transmitter.
same channel.
• The selected bedside monitor
power is OFF or is disconnected
from the network.
Check the patient condition and ensure
• The network communication is
COMMUNICATION LOSS patient’s safety. Then check the monitoring
lost during sleep mode.
systems.
The multiple patient receiver for the
transmitter is disconnected from the
network.
ALL ALARMS OFF All alarms are off. ––
ALARMS SUSPENDED Alarms are suspended. ––
OFF The bed is discharged. ––
*1 SIGNAL LOSS, BATTERY and CALL are displayed only when receiving
data from a transmitter.
* “This channel is already in use” is displayed only when using a transmitter or
2
multiple patient receiver which accepts the “This channel is already in use”
message.
* The battery replacement indication message on the monitor disappears after
3
a short time depending on the type of battery in the transmitter. Immediately

replace the battery with a new one when the battery replacement indication
appears.
CAUTION
While the “SIGNAL LOSS” message is displayed, parameters are not
monitored and the alarms do not function. Check the transmitter and
communication status and remove the cause.

Messages From Central Monitor


The recorder unit door is not closed
RECORDER DOOR OPEN Close the door completely.
completely.
Set recording paper in the recorder unit.
If there is recording paper in the recorder
No recording paper in the recorder
RECORDER OUT OF PAPER unit and the message still appears, the paper
unit.
detection sensor is malfunctioning. Clean
the sensor part in the recorder unit.
RECORDER POWER OFF OR The recorder unit is disconnected. Connect the recorder unit.
DISCONNECTED The recorder unit is turned OFF. Turn the recorder unit power ON.
Laser Printer

Printer is OFF LINE The laser printer is not registered. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
Set paper in the printer. Refer to the printer
Printer is OUT OF PAPER No paper in the laser printer.
manual.
Job Error Error in the printer. Refer to the printer manual.
The laser printer cover is not closed
Paper tray is open Close the cover completely.
completely.
16

Other

To resume monitoring, touch “Resume” on
The monitoring of the bed is
Resume the Pause window of the Admit/Discharge
paused.
of the Personal Setup.
Connect the power cord to the central
The power cord is disconnected.
monitor properly.
Confirmation of AC power
The central monitor is operated on
supply
the battery power because of AC Check the AC power supply.
power shut down.
Unit Fan Error Power unit fan failure. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
The battery is expired.
Abnormal discharging, abnormal
Battery Error Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
charging, or any other abnormal
conditions.
Connect to AC power and charge the battery
The battery is being charged. until the message disappears.
The message appears when the
central monitor has been stored NOTE
Battery Power Charging Do not remove the power cord while this
for a long time without being
connected to AC power or after the message is displayed. If this message
battery operation. appears for more than one day, contact
The central monitor main unit Check if the fan works.
Abnormal Temperature
temperature increases. Check if the vent hole is not blocked.

Messages From RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver

General

The transmitter battery is reversed. Insert the battery correctly.
The transmitter battery is weak. Replace the battery with a new one.
The channel number of the
Set the channel number of the monitor to
monitor does not match that of the
match the transmitter channel.
transmitter.
Receiving antenna is disconnected. Connect the antenna properly.
The transmitter power is turned off. Turn on the transmitter power.
SIGNAL LOSS The antenna system is faulty. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
The antenna is not placed at an
Place the antenna at an appropriate position.
appropriate position.
Check the DIP switch setting on the ORG
Setting window of the SYSTEM SETUP
The transmitter type (A or C) does screen on the central monitor. If the DIP
not match the receiver (A or C). switch setting does not match the transmitter
type, change the DIP switch setting on the
multiple patient receiver.
An alarm has been produced at an You need take an appropriate action
XXX alarm
item that is not displayed. depending on the alarm level.
The transmitter has reduced in
Immediately replace the transmitter’s
(Low battery) battery voltage, suggesting that the
battery with a new one.
battery is approaching its life limit.
The Call button on the transmitter
CALL ––
has been pressed.
ORGXXXXX SRAM Battery The backup battery of the multiple
Low. Contact NIHON KOHDEN patient receiver is old.
16

ECG Monitoring

The baseline is not stable due to
Change the electrode position.
respiration or body movement.
Change the electrode position to where
EMG noise is superimposed.
there is less muscle.
The electrode is pulled by the lead. Put some slack into the electrode lead.
The electrode is dry. Replace the electrode with a new one.
The contact between the lead and Clean the electrode lead clip or replace the
electrode is poor. electrode lead with a new one.
NOISE Rub the skin with “skinPure” skin
High electrode impedance.
preparation gel.
An electric blanket is used. Use another warming method.
Keep the ESU away from the transmitter
ESU emits strong electromagnetic
or bedside monitor or turn off the emitter
interference.
source power.
Connect the equipotential ground terminal
Equipotential grounding is not on the bedside monitor to the equipotential
acquired. ground terminal on the wall with the
grounding lead.
Noise interference for more than
30 seconds and heart rate cannot be
CANNOT ANALYZE Remove noise.
counted and arrhythmia cannot be
analyzed.
Connect the electrode lead to the electrode
The electrode lead is detached.
firmly.
The electrode cannot be attached
Replace the electrode with a new one.
firmly to the skin.
The electrode lead is disconnected
Connect the electrode lead to the transmitter
from the transmitter or bedside
or bedside monitor.
monitor.
The contact between the lead and
CHECK ELECTRODES electrode is poor. Replace the electrode lead with a new one.
The electrode lead is damaged.
Differential offset voltage at
Replace the electrode with a new one.
electrodes.
ECG waveform baseline wanders Change the electrode positions to where
due to body movement and it is there is less influence from the body
difficult to detect QRS. movement.
A large hum noise superimposes on Check that the central monitor is properly
the ECG waveform. grounded.
PACING QRS of a pacing pulse is detected. ––
(This message appears only when An electric blanket is used. Use another warming method.
PACING DETECT is set to ON Set the PACING DETECT to OFF on the
on the ECG screen.) ECG of a neonate is monitored.
ECG window.

SpO2 Monitoring

Considerable body movement. When the message is displayed frequently,
The probe is not attached to the check the patient condition and, if
M (highlighted) patient properly. necessary, change the attachment site.
The message will disappear once the
NIBP measurement is in process.
measurement process is completed.
A surgical light, bilirubin lamp, or
LIGHT INTERFERE Cover the attachment site with a blanket.
sunlight is close to the probe.
Searching for the correct pulse
Wait until the pulse wave is detected.
wave.
The probe attachment site is not
Attach the probe to an appropriate place.
appropriate.
Poor blood circulation for Check the patient condition, probe
measuring SpO2. attachment or change the attachment site.
The probe is secured too tightly
DETECTING PULSE and it is obstructing the blood Reattach the probe.
circulation.
The finger probe is not attached to
Attach the finger probe firmly to the patient.
the patient properly.
The probe is not attached to the
Attach the probe to the patient properly.
patient properly.
The probe cable is disconnected Connect the probe cable to the SpO2
from the SpO2 connection cord.* connection cord.
Measurement cannot be performed
because the patient’s pulse wave is
CANNOT DETECT PULSE See the actions at DETECTING PULSE.
small or the probe is not attached to
the patient properly.
The probe cable is disconnected Connect the probe cable to the SpO2
from the SpO2 connection cord. connection cord.
The probe is expired. Replace the probe with a new one.
The probe is damaged or short-
Replace the probe with a new one.
circuited.
The probe cable is worn out. Replace the probe with a new one.
CHECK PROBE The SpO2 connection cord is
Firmly connect the SpO2 connection cord to
disconnected from the bedside
the bedside monitor.
monitor.
The probe cable is disconnected Firmly connect the probe cable to the
from the transmitter. transmitter.
The probe is not attached to the
Attach the probe to the patient properly.
patient properly.
* This applies only when data is being sent from a combination of a vital sensor
(a monitor from A&D Co., Ltd.) and a ZB-900P or ZS-900P.
16

NIBP Monitoring

NIBP SAFETY CIRCUIT The air hose is bent or squeezed. Remove the cause.
RUNNING The inflation time is too long. Stop measurement.
(When this message is displayed, In auto mode measurement, the
measurement cannot be cuff inflation started before the cuff Stop measurement.
performed for 40 seconds.) deflation is complete.
Enormous pressure was applied by When measuring an adult, ask the patient
HIGH CUFF PRESS
the pressure of the cuff. not to move too much.
The cuff is disconnected from the
Firmly connect the cuff to the air hose.
air hose.
CHECK CUFF/HOSE
The cuff or air hose is damaged. Replace the cuff or air hose with a new one.
The air hose is bent or squeezed. Remove the cause.
The maximum blood pressure
exceeded 290 mmHg when using Measure by palpation, auscultation or the
SYSTOLIC OVER
the adult cuff, or 125 mmHg when invasive blood pressure method.
using the neonate cuff.
The measuring time exceeded the If the cause is arrhythmia, measure by
MEAS TIME-OUT specified time due to arrhythmia or invasive blood pressure measurement.
noise. Remove the cause if due to noise.
The patient’s pulse wave is too Measure by palpation or the invasive blood
small. pressure method.
WEAK PULSE
The cuff is wrapped too loosely. Wrap the cuff around the arm properly.
The cuff size is inappropriate. Use the appropriate cuff.
Measure by palpation or the invasive blood
The patient’s pulse wave is small.
pressure method.
CANNOT DETECT PULSE
The cuff is not wrapped on the Wrap the cuff around the arm of the patient
patient correctly. properly.
NIBP MODULE ERROR Module malfunction. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
CO2 Monitoring

The CO2 adapter is damaged. Replace the CO2 adapter with a new one.
The CO2 sensor is damaged. Replace the CO2 sensor with a new one.
CHECK SENSOR
Refer to the CO2 sensor kit manual. If
Insufficient sensor light.
necessary, replace the kit with a new one.

Section 17 Maintenance
Daily Check........................................................................................................................................................ 17.2

Checking Sound Generation from the Speaker........................................................................................ 17.2
Calibrating the Touchkeys......................................................................................................................... 17.2
Adjusting the LCD Display........................................................................................................................ 17.4
Printing a Screen Hard Copy.............................................................................................................................. 17.5
Inspection After Use........................................................................................................................................... 17.5
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilization.............................................................................................................. 17.6
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit and RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver......................................... 17.6
Cleaning......................................................................................................................................... 17.6
Disinfecting..................................................................................................................................... 17.6
LCD Display............................................................................................................................................. 17.7
WS-960P Recorder Unit........................................................................................................................... 17.7
Panel.............................................................................................................................................. 17.7
Thermal Head................................................................................................................................ 17.7
Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 17.8
Network Printer........................................................................................................................................ 17.8
Disposal.............................................................................................................................................................. 17.9
Regular Inspection............................................................................................................................................ 17.10
Periodical Replacement Schedule.................................................................................................................... 17.12
Repair Parts Availability Policy......................................................................................................................... 17.12
17

17. MAINTENANCE
Daily Check
Checking Sound Generation from the Speaker

To check that there is a sound from the speaker, change the alarm volume or sync
sound and listen to the test sound of the selected step level.
Calibrating the Touchkeys

Calibrate the touch screen when the touched position and activated position do
not match.
2. Touch “Touchkeys Setting” to display the Touchkeys Setting window.
3. Touch “Calibrate Touchkeys” to display the setting window.

17. MAINTENANCE
4. Touch the exact center of the mark. Touch before the bar on the screen is
finished. When the mark is correctly touched, the mark appears in another
place. The mark appears in three places.
When all three places are touched correctly, the screen changes.
17

17. MAINTENANCE
5. Touch the button. The calibration finishes and the screen returns to the
Touchkeys window.
To calibrate the touchkeys again, touch the button.
When the calibration screen opens at a display that does not have a Touchkeys
function and you want to exit the calibration screen, press the Esc key on the
keyboard.
Adjusting the LCD Display

Refer to the LCD display manual.

17. MAINTENANCE
Printing a Screen Hard Copy
You can print a screen hard copy with the laser printer. Press the Print Screen
key on the keyboard. You can select “Enable” or “Disable” printing a screen hard
copy on the System Setup screen. The factory default setting is “Disable”. Refer
to Section 7-2 of Administrator’s Guide for enabling and disabling the screen
hard copy printing. The waveforms are not printed.
Inspection After Use
Do the following inspection after every use.
• Previous patient data is deleted.

• Temporarily changed settings are changed back to the previous settings.
• There was no abnormal performance during use.
• There is no dirt, damage or scratches on the monitor.
• Accessories are cleaned and stored properly.
• There are enough consumables, such as recording paper, and disposable
electrodes for the next use.
• The power switch on the monitor and transmitter are turned off.
• Dead batteries of the transmitter are disposed of properly.
• The batteries are removed from the transmitter when you are not going to use
it for a while.
• The monitor is not in a wet place and there are no chemicals around the
monitor.
• The transmitter is completely dry in case the transmitter is wet.
• The monitor and transmitter are stored properly.
17

17. MAINTENANCE
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilization
CAUTION
Before maintenance, cleaning or disinfection, turn the central monitor
power off and disconnect the power cord from the AC socket. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in electrical shock and central
monitor malfunction.
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit and RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver
Cleaning
CAUTION CAUTION
This instrument is not waterproof. Be careful not If the instrument accidentally gets wet,
to let any liquid get inside the instrument. immediately stop using it and disconnect the
power cord from the AC outlet. Contact your
Nihon Kohden representative for inspection.
CAUTION
Do not use volatile liquid such as thinner or
benzine as these agents will melt or crack the
materials.
Wipe the panel with a soft cloth moistened with water, neutral soap or alcohol
(76.9 to 81.4 vol%) and wrung out. Wipe off moisture with a dry cloth or gauze
and thoroughly dry before use.
Check if the vent hole is dusty. Wipe the dust off with a cotton swab or vacuum it
with a cleaner.
Disinfecting
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not use volatile liquids such as thinner or This instrument is not waterproof. Be careful not
benzine as these agents will melt or crack the to let any liquid get inside the instrument.
materials.
CAUTION CAUTION
If you put spray on the instrument, wipe off the Do not sterilize. It deteriorates and damages the
instrument with a dry cloth after spraying. instrument surface and causes malfunction.

17. MAINTENANCE
To disinfect, wipe the panel with a soft cloth moistened with any of the
disinfectants listed below. Use the recommended concentration. Wipe off
moisture with a dry cloth or gauze and thoroughly dry before use.
Disinfectant Concentration (%)

Glutaraldehyde solution 2.0
Alkyldiaminoethylglycine hydrochloride 0.5
Benzalkonium chloride 0.2
Benzethonium chloride solution 0.2
Chlorhexidine gluconate solution 0.5
LCD Display
Disable the touchkeys function before cleaning.
2. Touch “Touchkeys Off” to disable the touch key function.
3. Clean the LCD display. Refer to the LCD display manual.
4. Click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard to restore the touchkeys
function. Or, wait for 120 seconds to restore the touchkeys function.

Panel
Clean the panel of the recorder unit in the same way as cleaning the MU-960R
Central Monitor Main Unit. Refer to the “MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit
and RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver” section.
Thermal Head
To protect the thermal head from abrasion or damage and assure optimum
performance for a long time, clean the head surface of the recorder with the
thermal head cleaning pen (recorder unit accessory) after every 10 to 15 sets of
recording paper.
CAUTION
Be careful not to cut yourself with the paper cutter on the recorder.
1. Turn off the recorder power before cleaning.
17

17. MAINTENANCE
2. Push down the magazine release lever and open the magazine.
3. Clean the black part of the thermal head with the thermal head cleaning pen.
Sensor
The paper sensor is located by the thermal head. Clean the sensor surface with a
dry cotton swab.
Network Printer
Refer to the network printer manual.

17. MAINTENANCE
Disposal
CAUTION
Dispose of Nihon Kohden products according to your local laws and
your facility’s guidelines for waste disposal. Otherwise, it may affect
the environment. If there is a possibility that the product may have
been contaminated with infection, dispose of it as medical waste
according to your local laws and your facility’s guidelines for medical
waste. Otherwise, it may cause infection.
Follow your local laws for disposing of the main unit, LCD display, Recorder
unit, multiple patient receiver and battery.
17

17. MAINTENANCE
Regular Inspection
CAUTION CAUTION
Software upgrade must only be done by qualified Do the regular inspection twice a year. Otherwise,
service personnel or a person with technical a decrease and loss in function will not be
knowledge. If upgrade is not done correctly, the noticed and this results in incorrect monitoring.
central monitor may freeze.
CAUTION CAUTION
During maintenance and servicing, patients Restart the central monitor once every three
monitored by the central monitor must be months. Otherwise operation becomes unstable
monitored by alternate instruments such as and monitoring may stop. While restarting,
bedside monitors. patients monitored by the central monitor must be
monitored by alternate instruments such as
bedside monitors.
CAUTION
Never disassemble or repair the central monitor.
If there is any problem with the central monitor,
contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
Deterioration and loss of function causes misdiagnosis. Check the following

items to keep your monitor in optimal condition.
• Monitor is not dirty, damaged or rusty.

• No key or switch is broken.
• No damage to the sockets on the monitor.
• The battery cover is attached to the transmitter.
• Receiving antenna position is correct.
• Channel settings are correct.
• Screen is clean and not damaged.
• Screen brightness can be adjusted.
• Screen display is correct.
• The touchkeys is properly calibrated.
• The specified recording paper is used.
• Recorder unit operates properly.
• The laser printer operates properly.
• There are sufficient consumables for the recorder/printer.
• The paper sensor works correctly.
• Enough toner in the laser printer.
• No missing dots on the recorded data.
• The date and time on the paper is correct.
• The fan operates properly.
• System Setup settings are correct.
• Alarm setting is correct and functions properly.

17. MAINTENANCE
• Date and time is correct.

• Alarm and sync sound can be heard clearly.
• Sound volume can be adjusted.
• Waveform display is correct. (All waveforms are properly displayed on the All
Beds screen and Individual Bed window.)
• All monitored beds are correctly recognized at the central monitor and
communication in the network is in good condition.
• Review data for each bed are properly displayed on the screen.
• The touchkeys operate correctly.
• The central monitor is properly connected to external instruments.
• Only the specified parts are used.
• The specified electrodes, sensors, transducers and probes are used.
• Alarm indicator lamps light.
• The central monitor is restarted once every three months.
The following items must be checked regularly by qualified service personnel.

• Receiving condition in the required range.
• Power cord is not damaged.
• Grounding lead is properly connected.
• Supplied voltage is correct.
• No current leakage.
• Grounding lead for UPS is properly connected.
• UPS operation is correct.
17

17. MAINTENANCE
Periodical Replacement Schedule
To maintain the performance of the instrument, the following parts must be

periodically replaced.
CAUTION
Replace the backup battery once a year with a new one. Otherwise
the backup battery may deteriorate so that if there is a sudden power
failure, all data saved in the central monitor may be lost.
Description Expected Life Span

Lithium battery for clock operation backup (CR2032) Approx. five years of continuous operation
When the battery is discharged, the time on the screen is not
correct when the main unit power is turned on.
Fan (QA0612S4041) Approx. 50,000 hours
When the fan is deteriorated the “Unit Fan Error” or “Abnormal
Temperature” message appears during operation and cooling
function of the main unit is deteriorated and causes malfunction.
Battery (908252) Approx. one year of continuous operation (when used in the
specified operating temperature and conditions)
Replace the battery in the following situations:

• “Battery Error” message appears during operation.
• “Battery Power Charging” message appears for more than 24
hours during operation.
When the battery is discharged, the main unit cannot shut down
correctly and patient data may be initialized.
Thermal array head (AJ048-8E802) Approx. 370 stacks of recording paper
After 370 stacks of recording paper, the recording becomes thin.
Paper drive motor (CD-0004 Motor Assy) Approx. 9,000 stacks of recording paper
After 9,000 stacks of recording paper, the paper drive motor is
deteriorated and cannot feed the recording paper.
Platen roller (Platen roller Ø 8) Approx. six years
When the platen roller is deteriorated, the paper cannot be fed.
Repair Parts Availability Policy
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall stock repair parts (parts necessary to
maintain the performance of the instrument) for a period of 8 years from the
date of delivery. In that period NKC or its authorized agents will repair the
instrument.
This period may be shorter than 8 years if the board or part necessary for the
faulty section is not available.

Section 18 Reference
Factory Default Settings..................................................................................................................................... 18.3

All Beds Screen........................................................................................................................................ 18.3
Multi Patient Alarms Windows.................................................................................................................. 18.4
Individual Bed Window............................................................................................................................. 18.5
Review Window........................................................................................................................................ 18.5
Parameter Setup...................................................................................................................................... 18.8
Personal Setup....................................................................................................................................... 18.10
Setup...................................................................................................................................................... 18.10
System Setup......................................................................................................................................... 18.11
Parameter Priority............................................................................................................................................. 18.12
Specifications................................................................................................................................................... 18.13
Display......................................................................................................................................... 18.13
Waveform Display Items............................................................................................................... 18.13
Alphanumeric Display Items......................................................................................................... 18.13
Sound........................................................................................................................................... 18.13
Alarm Function............................................................................................................................. 18.13
Trend............................................................................................................................................ 18.14
Waveform Sensitivity.................................................................................................................... 18.14
Overview...................................................................................................................................... 18.14
Remote Setting............................................................................................................................ 18.14
Hemodynamics List...................................................................................................................... 18.14
Arrhythmia Recall......................................................................................................................... 18.14
ST Recall...................................................................................................................................... 18.14
Full Disclosure.............................................................................................................................. 18.14
ECG 12 Lead Analysis................................................................................................................. 18.14
Alarm History............................................................................................................................... 18.15
Alarm Events................................................................................................................................ 18.15
Report.......................................................................................................................................... 18.15
File Saving................................................................................................................................... 18.15
2-ch Recorder, WS-960P (option)................................................................................................ 18.15
Laser Printer (local purchase)...................................................................................................... 18.15
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver.............................................................................................. 18.15
Power Requirements.................................................................................................................... 18.17
Environment................................................................................................................................. 18.17
Dimensions and Weight............................................................................................................... 18.17
Safety Standard........................................................................................................................... 18.17
Electromagnetic Compatibility...................................................................................................... 18.18
Electromagnetic Emissions.......................................................................................................... 18.19
Electromagnetic Immunity............................................................................................................ 18.19
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communications
Equipment.................................................................................................................................... 18.21
System Composition for EMC Test............................................................................................... 18.21
Restriction of Radio Equipment (European Union countries only)............................................... 18.22
18
European Community CE Notice................................................................................................. 18.22
Arrhythmia Specifications on RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver............................. 18.22
Standard Accessories...................................................................................................................................... 18.24
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit...................................................................................................... 18.24
Options and Consumables............................................................................................................................... 18.24
MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit...................................................................................................... 18.24
LCD Display........................................................................................................................................... 18.25
WS-960P Recorder Unit......................................................................................................................... 18.25
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver........................................................................................................ 18.25
DM-960P J Frame.................................................................................................................................. 18.25
YS-093P0 J Frame Cable Set................................................................................................................ 18.26
YS-093P1 J Frame Cable Set 2............................................................................................................. 18.26
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems................................................................. 18.27

18. REFERENCE
Factory Default Settings
All Beds Screen

The factory default settings of System Setup screen for administrator and
maintenance are listed in the “Factory Default Settings” in Section 8,
OK: The copy settings and backup settings are available. When changing the
monitor for a bed whose data is saved on another central monitor, the setting
is maintained.
NO: The copy settings and backup settings are not available. When changing the
monitor for a bed whose data is saved on another central monitor, the setting
returns to default setting.
–: The displayed setting is the setting maintained on the bed. When changing
the monitor for a bed whose data is saved on another central monitor, the
settings are changed to new bed settings
Change
Factory
Copy Backup Remote
Items Setting Values Default
Settings Settings Filing
Setting
Bed
×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×3/2,
ECG ×1
×2, ×4
×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×3/2,
RESP ×3/4
×2, ×4
×1/8, ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4,
SpO2 ×2
×8
0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160,
0-200
0-200, 0-300, 50-200 (mmHg)
PRESS 0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0,
0.0-14.0, 0.0-22.0, 0.0-28.0, 0.0-28.0
All Beds Screen Setup
0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0 (kPa)

0-20, 0-40, 0-80 (mmHg) 0-40
CO2
0-3, 0-6, 0-12 (kPa) 0-6
Sensitivity OK OK OK
O2 0-40, 0-100 (%) 0-40
0-10, 0-20, 0-50, 0-100, 0-150
Paw 0-50
(cmH2O/hPa)
FLOW −1-+1, −2-+2, −3-+3, (L/s) −1-+1
0-50, 0-100, 0-500, 0-1000,
VOL 0-1000
0-2000, 0-3000
N2O 0-80, 0-100, 50-100 (%) 0-100
GAS 0-4, 0-8, 0-20 0-4
EXT ×1/8, ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4,
×1
BIS-EEG ×8
10, 20, 30, 50, 70, 100, 150,
EEG 200, 300, 500, 750, 1000, 100
1500, 2000 (μV/cm)
18
18. REFERENCE
Change
Factory
Copy Backup Remote
Setting
Bed
Auto
Manual (ECG II)*1
(maximum
Auto (1 wave), Auto (2 waves)*2, Auto (3
number of
waves)*2
Wave Selection waveforms)
1, 2 (When the Wave Selection
Number of OK
is set to “Auto (2 waves)” or 1
ECG Waves
“Auto (3 waves)”)
All Beds Screen Setup
Manual (HR, P1, P2, ART)*1,

Numerical
Auto (Max 3), Auto (Max 6), Auto (MAX 8)
Selection
Auto (Max 8)
8 colors
(Changing Bed Color Also Changes Bed OK OK
Groups is OFF)
Bed Color White NO
5 colors
(Changing Bed Color Also Changes Bed
Groups is ON)
HR Display HR Only, HR+VPC+ST HR+VPC+ST
Display Setting PR Display ON, OFF ON
PR Source*3 PRESS, SpO2 PRESS
Refer to OK
Select from all the parameters which can be “Parameter
Parameter Priority
displayed on this central monitor. Priority” in
this section.
*1 The parameters in parentheses is a default setting in manual setting.

*2 Depending on the number of patients on the All Beds screen, the alternative is different in auto setting.
*3 The PR Source is displayed when “ON” is selected for the PR Display or “Manual” is selected for the Numerical
Selection.
Multi Patient Alarms Windows
Change
Factory
Copy Backup Remote
Setting
Bed
Group No
Select from group registered at “Group Name”.
Assignment registration
Factory Default Setting: OK OK OK
Group Name
Group A, Group B, Group C, Group D, Group E
Parameters Refer to Section 13.

18. REFERENCE
Individual Bed Window
Change
Factory
Copy Backup Remote
Setting
Bed
Sensitivity
Same as the All Beds screen
Manual (ECG (II), RESP (IMP), SpO2, P1, P2,
Wave Selection Auto
ART, CVP)*1, Auto
Numerical Manual (HR, P1, P2, ART, CVP, IMP(RR),
Indiv. Bed Screen Setup
Auto
Selection SpO2, NIBP)*1, Auto
Sweep Speed mm/s 25, 50 25
Same as the sweep
Respiration Wave Sweep speed selected for OK OK OK
25
Speed mm/s “Sweep speed mm/
Display Setting s” above, 6.25
Separate or
BP Scale Separate
Common
PR Display ON, OFF ON
PR Source*2 PRESS, SpO2 PRESS
Parameter Priority Same as the All Beds screen
*1 The parameters in parentheses is a default setting in manual setting.

*2 The PR Source is displayed when “ON” is selected for the PR Display or “Manual” is selected for the Numerical
Selection.
Review Window
Change
Factory Default Copy Backup Remote
Items Setting Values
Setting Settings Settings Filing
Bed
Measured parameters
(except for parameters that Parameters that were
cannot be displayed on measured when the
Trend Parameter Setting the central monitor) and Trend window is
registered parameters at the opened the first time
Parameters window of the after power on.
Trend
OK OK OK
ASYSTOLE, V FIB,
V TACHY, VPC RUN, First: ALL
Trend Event Setting
COUPLET, Off/Noise, Other: NONE
ALL, NONE
Refer to “Parameters and Display” in Section 10-1
Trend Scale Setting
“Trend Window”.
Full Scale 72, 24, 8 hours, 1 hour 8 hours
18
18. REFERENCE
Change
Bed
Interval 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes 5 minutes
Measured parameters
Parameters that were
(except for parameters that
Tabular measured when
cannot be displayed on
Tabular Trend
Trend the Tabular Trend

the central monitor) and
Tabular Parameter window is opened
registered parameters at the
Trend Setting the first time after the
Parameters window of the
Setting power on.
Vital Sign 1, Vital
Free Name
–– Sign 2, Vital Sign 3,
Registration
Vital Sign 4
Multi-Wave Displayed Same as those selected for the full disclosure
Waveform window
Zoom ×1, ×2, ×4 ×1
Caliper
Sweep
Measurement 25, 50 mm/s 25
Speed
ASYSTOLE, V-FIB,
V.TACHY, EXT TACHY,
Arrhythmia Recall
OK
EXT BRADY, VPC RUN,
V BRADY, SV TACHY,
TACHYCARDIA,
BRADYCARDIA, PAUSE,
COUPLET, EARLY
Displayed Arrhythmia ALL
VPC, MULTIFORM, V
RHYTHM, BIGEMINY,
TRIGEMINY, VPC, OK OK
IRREGULAR RR,
PROLONGED RR, NO
PACER PULSE, PACER
NON-CAPTURE, OFF
×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×3/2,
ST Sens ×1
×2, ×4
ST Recall
I, II, III, aVR, aVL,

aVF, V1, V2, V3,
Lead Display Position Select from all leads
V4, V5, V6, V,
MCL, ECG1, ECG2
Measured parameters
(except for parameters that ECG (Trace1), ECG
Stored Waves
cannot be displayed on the (Trace2), PRESS,
NO
central monitor) SpO2, Resp (IMP),
Full Disclosure
Select from waveforms ART

Displayed Waves
selected at “Stored Waves”
Same as those at All Beds screen and Individual
Sensitivity/Scale
Bed window
Zoom ×1, ×2, ×4 ×1
Caliper
Sweep
Measurement 25, 50 mm/s 25
Speed OK
CRISIS, WARNING,
Alarm Level All
History
ADVISORY, All
Alarm
Arrhythmia, Limit,
Alarm Type All
Technical, All

18. REFERENCE
Change
Bed
HR, PR, ST, RR, APNEA,
NIBP, SpO2, ART (ART2, HR, PR, NIBP, ART,
RAD, DORS, AO, FEM), SpO2, CO2, RR,
CVP, PAP, ICP ALL, TEMP APNEA,
ALL, O2, CO2, GAS ALL, ECG (Technical),
Limit BIS, EEG, LEAD OFF + ART + NIBP,
Technical NOISE, SpO2 (Technical), SpO2 (Technical),
ART + NIBP, TEMP SIGNAL LOSS
(Technical), CO2 (Technical), (wireless)
SIGNAL LOSS (wireless) (COMMUNICATION
(COMMUNICATION LOSS LOSS (wired))
(wired))
ASYSTOLE, V. FIB, V.
TACHY, EXT TACHY,
EXT BRADY, VPC RUN,
Alarm Events
V BRADY, SV TACHY, ASYSTOLE,

Change
TACHYCARDIA, V-FIB, OK
Events
BRADYCARDIA, PAUSE, V.TACHY,
COUPLET, EARLY EXT TACHY,
VPC, MULTIFORM, V EXT BRADY,
RHYTHM, BIGEMINY, TACHYCARDIA,
TRIGEMINY, FREQ BRADYCARDIA,
Arrhy
VPC, VPC, IRREGULAR VPC RUN,
Technical
RR, PROLONGED RR, FREQ VPC,
NO PACER PULSE, ECG (Technical), OK
PACER NON-CAPTURE, SpO2 (Technical), OK
ECG (Technical), SpO2 SIGNAL LOSS
(Technical), ART + NIBP, (wireless)
TEMP (Technical), CO2 (COMMUNICATION
(Technical), SIGNAL LOSS (wired))
LOSS (wireless)
(COMMUNICATION LOSS
(wired))
Report Mode Manual/Auto Manual NO
Tabular
Yes
Trend
Report
Trendgraph Yes, No No OK
Items
Full
No
Disclosure
Print Time Free setting 16:00 NO
Report
Manual 5 minutes to 24 hours

Duration 8 hours
Auto 1 to 24 hours
Trend 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes,
5 minutes OK
Interval NIBP
Trend All parameters that can be
Parameter
displayed on the central NONE
List
monitor.
Up to 500 alphanumeric
Nurse Notes –– NO NO
characters
18
18. REFERENCE
Parameter Setup
Change
Setting Item Setting Range
Bed
Alarm Limits Refer to Section 6. *1
Arrhythmia Alarm Refer to Section 6. *1
ECG Measurement ON, OFF ON* 2
Depends on the lead that is currently

Analysis Lead
Analysis Leads measured.
Analysis Mode Single/Multi Multi*2
×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4,
QRS Detection Sensitivity*3 ×1*2
×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4
I, II, III, aVR,
Lead that
aVL, aVF, V1 –– –– ––
ECG Leads is currently
ECG to V6, V, MCL,
measured.*2
ECG1, ECG2
ISO Point 0 to 248 80
ST Analysis Point
ST Point 0 to 340 108
30 sec, 1, 2, 5, 10,
ST Interval 30 sec*2
30, 60 min
Arrhythmia Analysis ON, OFF ON*2
Pacing Detection ON, OFF ON*2
Hum Filter ON, OFF ON*2
Pacing Marker ON, OFF OFF OK OK OK
Auto Lead Change ON, OFF OFF*2
Impedance Respiration
ON, OFF ON*2
RESP Measurement
×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4,
Sensitivity ×1*2
×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4
SpO2 Alarm Limits Refer to Section 6. *1
Alarm Limits Refer to Section 6. *1 –– –– ––
Manual, Stat, 1,
NIBP 2 , 2.5, 5, 10, 15,
Measurement Interval Manual*2
30, 60 min, 2, 4, 8
hours
Refer to “PRESS Label that
Label/Disp. Settings” in is currently
Section 13. measured.*2
PRESS CVP, ICP,
Display Pattern S/D/M, MEAN ICP2-4: MEAN OK OK OK
Others: S/D/M
Arterial Pressure Detection Adult/Child,
Adult/Child
Sensitivity Neonate
Refer to “TEMP Temperature
TEMP Label Settings” in that is currently –– –– ––
Section 13. measured.*2
dT –– T1 − T2*2
CO2 Alarm Limits Refer to Section 6. *1
O2 Alarm Limits Refer to Section 6. *1

18. REFERENCE
Change
Bed
Wave All the parameters
Anesthesia
Display related to anesthesia All parameters
Gas Display
Numerical gas which can be selected
Display displayed.
OK OK OK
Wave All the parameters
Display related to ventilator All parameters
Ventilator Display
Numerical which can be selected
Display displayed.
All the parameters
CCO Numerical All parameters
Display related to CCO which OK OK OK
Display selected
can be displayed.
All the parameters
Numerical related to PiCCO
PiCCO Display PCCO, PCCI OK OK OK
Display which can be
displayed.
*1 • For a bed being monitored through the RU-960P/ORG-9100, “Alarm Master 1” is set as the default. Any other
bedside monitor depends on the setup value on the bed side.
• For a bed being monitored through the RU-960P/ORG-9100 “Alarm Master 1” is set as the default when the
following operation is performed: Discharge, Delete data, or Delete data upon transmitter channel change. Any other
bedside monitor depends on the setup value on the bed side.
* Depends on the settings at the bedside monitor.
2
*3 QRS Detection Sensitivity can be set only when the QRS Detection Type is set to “Child”.
18
18. REFERENCE
Personal Setup
Refer to Section 6 for the following settings.
• Alarm Limits
• Arrhythmia Alarm
• ST Alarm
• Alarm Master Display
Change
Copy Backup Remote
Bed
Name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Patient ID Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Blood Type A−, A+, B−, B+, AB−, AB+, O−, O+, unknown
Gender Male, Female, unknown
Date of
YYYY-MM-DD
Birth
0 year 0 month to 127 years 11 months
Age Automatically calculated when the date of birth
–– –– ––
Admit/Discharge is entered.
Height 0.1 to 299.9 cm/0 to 9 ft, 0.0 to 11.9 inch
Weight 0.1 to 449.9 kg/0.1 to 654.9 lb
Automatically calculated when the height and
BSA
weight are entered.
Physician Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters, maximum 5
Diagnosis
lines
Note Up to 40 alphanumeric characters NO OK NO
Alarm Limits
Arrhythmia Alarm Refer to Section 6. –– –– ––
ST Alarm
Setup
Change
Factory
Copy Backup Remote
Setting Item Setting Range Default
Setting
Bed
Alarm Limits
ON, OFF OFF
Recording
Alarm
ST Alarm
Recording ON, OFF OFF
Recording
Recording Call Recording ON, OFF OFF OK OK OK
Dual Waveform Recording Differs from bed to bed.
OFF, 30 min, 60 min,
Periodic Record Interval OFF
120 min, FREE
Recording Sweep Speed 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s 25 mm/s

18. REFERENCE
System Setup
Factory Default Copy Backup

Setting Settings Settings
Alarm Volume 7 steps 3
Volume 7 steps 3
OK OK
Sync Sound ON, OFF OFF
Sound Control
Sync Sound Sync Sound Pitch High, Low High
Specific bed (Bed name),
Sync Sound Bed Current Bed NO NO
Current Bed
Recording Mode Real Time, Delay Delay
Manual
Recording Time 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 s,
Recording 20 s
Length 2 min
Recording OK OK
Periodic Recording 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 s 20 s
Alarm/Call Recording 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 s 20 s
Recording Start Position Immediate, After Mark Immediate
18
18. REFERENCE
Parameter Priority
The central monitor follows the priority in automatic selection function and
numeric data sorting. Followings are the priority of factory default settings.
Priority Parameter Priority Parameter

1 HR 40 Tskin
2 VPC 41 Tskin2
3 ST 42 Tskin3
4 ART 43 Trect
5 ART2 44 Tcore
6 RAD 45 Tnaso
7 DORS 46 Teso
8 AO 47 Ttymp
9 FEM 48 Tblad
10 UA 49 Taxil
11 UV 50 T1
12 PAP 51 T2
13 CVP 52 T3
14 RAP 53 T4
15 RVP 54 T5
16 LAP 55 T6
17 LVP 56 T7
18 ICP 57 T8
19 ICP2 58 delta-T
20 ICP3 59 delta-T2
21 ICP4 60 delta-T3
22 P1 61 delta-T4
23 P2 62 Tb
24 P3 63 CCO
25 P4 64 Tb (CCO)
26 P5 65 SvO2 (CCO)
27 P6 66 PiCCO
28 P7 67 CO2
29 P8 68 O2
30 NIBP 69 tcPO2/tcPCO2
31 CNIBP 70 FLOW
32 RESP 71 Paw
33 RESP (IMP) 72 VENT
34 RESP (THM) 73 GAS
35 SpO2 74 BIS
36 SpO2-2 75 EXT (9000)
37 Delta SpO2 76 EEG1
38 PR 77 EEG2
39 SvO2

18. REFERENCE
Specifications
Display
Number of patients on the display: 8 (16 when 16 Patient Expansion Program Kit is installed)
With overview bed function, 16 patients plus one other patient.
Number of transmitters: 16
Display type: 19 inch color TFT
Waveform display method: Non-fade, fixed method
Number of waveform traces: 24 (On the All Beds screen, displaying 12 patients)
Sweep speed: 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s, 6.25 mm/s (respiration measurement)
Waveform Display Items

ECG1 to 12, IBP (1 to 8), respiration wave, EEG, CO2, external input, pulse (SpO2), FLOW/Paw, others depending on the
connected bedside monitor or transmitter
Alphanumeric Display Items

Heart rate, VPC rate, respiration rate, pulse rate, IBP (systolic, diastolic, mean), NIBP (systolic, diastolic, MAP),
temperature or ΔT or blood temperature, ETCO2, tcPO2, tcPCO2, SpO2, ST level, FiO2, CO, CCO, PiCCO, respirator,
anesthetic gas, BIS, others depending on the connected bedside monitor or transmitter
Sound
Synchronization source: ECG
Alarm sound: Crisis, Warning, Advisory
Sound volume: changeable for Heart rate sync mark and sound
Alarm Function
Alarm decision is done at each bedside monitor and multiple patient receiver. The central monitor only displays the alarm
and generates sound by receiving the alarm information from bedside monitors and multiple patient receivers.
Alarm type: Crisis, Warning, Advisory

Alarm items
Vital Sign: Heart rate, VPC rate, Respiration rate, Pulse rate, IBP (systolic, diastolic, mean),
NIBP (systolic, diastolic, MAP), temperature or ΔT or blood temperature,
ETCO2, tcPO2, tcPCO2, SpO2, FiO2, CO, CCO, others depending on the
connected bedside monitor or transmitter
Apnea
Arrhythmia: ASYSTOLE, V. FIB, V. TACHY, EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY,
VPC RUN, V BRADY, SV TACHY, TACHYCARDIA,
BRADYCARDIA, PAUSE, COUPLET, EARLY VPC,
MULTIFORM, V RHYTHM, BIGEMINY, TRIGEMINY, FREQ
VPC, VPC, IRREGULAR RR, PROLONGED RR, NO PACER
PULSE, PACER NON-CAPTURE
Alarm indication*: Highlighted numeric display, highlighted message for arrhythmia, frame of
alarmed bed lits or blinks, alarm indicator
Alarm occurrence*: Alarm occurs when any one of the bedside monitors that the central monitor are
monitoring generates alarm.
Alarm suspend: Available (for beds connected through the QI-910R interface)
18
18. REFERENCE
Alarm silence: Available (except for beds connected via the QI-910R interface)
Alarm recording: Available
Alarm volume: 45 to 85 dB (A) (Requirement of IEC 60601-2-49: 2001) (at 1 m in front of
central monitor) Crisis ≥ Warning ≥ Advisory
* Essential performance in EMC standard
Alarm Delay Time

Delay between alarm occurrence on the central monitor and output of the alarm signal from a equipment that generates
alarm: ≤4s
Trend
Trend parameters: Depends on the connected bedside monitor or transmitter
Trend display times: 1, 8, 24, 72 h
Trend display formats: Trendgraph and tabular trend
Events related to trendgraph: ASYSTOLE, V. FIB, V TACHY, VPC RUN, COUPLET, Off/Noise
Waveform Sensitivity
ECG display sensitivity: ×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×1.5, ×2, ×4
Respiration curve sensitivity: ×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×1.5, ×2, ×4
IBP display scale (mmHg): 0-20, 0-50, 0-100, 0-200, 50-200, 50-250, 0-300 mmHg
Overview
Displays user-selectable vital signs, up to 12 ECG waveforms, trend data, alarm events, and status messages associated
with the selected overview bed. The overview bed can be any bed in the network that the central monitor is not
continuously monitoring.
Remote Setting
Alarm setting of bedside monitors and multiple patient receivers, Individual setting of bedside monitors and multiple
patient receivers, Channel setting of multiple patient receivers
Hemodynamics List
Saves up to 256 files of hemodynamics list created for each bed on the CO measurement window or IBP value input
window of the bedside monitor.
Arrhythmia Recall
Saves up to 768 files of arrhythmia recall files created for each bed.
ST Recall
Saves up to 4,320 files of ST recall files created for each bed.
Full Disclosure
Saves 72 hours of full disclosure waveform data for up to six waveforms and displays them on the Full Disclosure window
(when the QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing Program Kit is installed).
ECG 12 Lead Analysis

Saves up to 64 files of ECG analysis results files for each bed (when the QP-964P 12 Lead ECG Interpretation Filing
Program Kit is installed).

18. REFERENCE
Alarm History
Saves up to 5,000 alarms history for each bed.
Alarm Events
Saves 72 hours of alarm events data for each bed.
Report
A report is created and printed.
File Saving
Trend
Arrythmia recall file
Hemodynamic data list
ST recall
Full disclosure data (when the QP-963P Full Disclosure Filing Program Kit is installed.)
ECG 12 Lead analysis result filing (only when the QP-964P 12 Lead ECG Interpretation Filing Program Kit is installed.)
Caliper data
Alarm history
2-ch Recorder, WS-960P (option)

Recording method: Thermal array recording
Number of channels: 2
Recording paper: 50 mm width (FQW50-2-100)
Paper speed: 25 mm/s
Printed items: Patient information, date and time, waveform and measurement data, record　
�� type, paper speed
Record type
Manual recording: Single bed recording, Freeze recording, Dual waveform recording, Dual
waveform freeze recording, Arrhythmia recall recording, ST recall recording,
Expanded full disclosure waveform recording
Remote recording: Call recording, Remote delayed waveform recording
Laser Printer (local purchase)

Paper size: A4/Letter
Record type
Manual recording: Multi-Wave printing, Multi-Wave Freeze printing, ECG 12 Lead printing,
Trendgraph printing, Tabular Trend printing, Arrhythmia Recall recording,
Hemodynamics List printing, ST Recall recording (ST recall files with
printing mark), Full Disclosure Waveform printing, Expanded Full Disclosure
Waveform printing, ECG 12 Lead Analysis Result printing, Report printing

CE mark is not applied to RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver. If necessary, use the ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver
which has the CE mark.
Number of patients (receivers): 8
Receiver
Receiving method: Double super heterodyne
18
18. REFERENCE
Reception frequency: Synthesizer method

Type-A
420.0500 MHz (ch1001) to 449.6625 MHz (ch6080)
420.0000 MHz (chA000) to 472.7875 MHz (chC0FE)
Type-C
420.0750 MHz (ch1003) to 449.6000 MHz (ch6075)
420.0250 MHz (chA004) to 472.7750 MHz (chC0FC)
Antenna: Space diversity (dual antenna system)
Receiver type: A for ZB and ZS series transmitters
C for ZM series transmitters (set by DIP switches inside the multiple patient
receiver)
Channel spacing: A: 12.5 kHz steps
C: 50 kHz steps (25 kHz when interleaved)
25 kHz steps in Norway
Parameters
ECG
Lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1 to V6, MCL, ECG1 and ECG2
Number of leads: 8 maximum (using 4 leads)
Filter: Hum filter
Alarm item: Upper limit range: 20 to 300 beats/min in 5 beats/min step, OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 15 to 295 beats/min in 5 beats/min steps
Heart rate counting range: 0, 10 to 300 beats/min
Arrhythmia
Detection method: Multi-template matching
VPC counting range: 0 to 99 VPCs/min
Number of analyzing channels: Up to 2
Arrhythmia message: ASYSTOLE, V. FIB, V. TACHY, EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY, VPC RUN,
V BRADY, SV TACHY, TACHYCARDIA, BRADYCARDIA, PAUSE,
COUPLET, EARLY VPC, MULTIFORM, V RHYTHM, BIGEMINY,
TRIGEMINY, FREQ VPC, VPC, IRREGULAR RR, PROLONGED RR, NO
PACER PULSE, PACER NON-CAPTURE
ASYSTOLE detection time: more than 3 to 10 seconds of QRS loss
ST level
Counting range: ±2.5 mV (±25.0 mm)
Number of channels: All measuring channels
ST level alarm: –2.0 to +2.0 mV (–20.0 to +20.0 mm), OFF in 0.01 mV (0.1 mm) steps
Respiration counting range: 0 to 150 counts/min
Alarm item: Upper limit range: 2 to 150 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps, OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 0 to 148 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps
Apnea time: 5 to 40 s in 5 s steps, OFF
Invasive blood pressure measuring range: –50 to +300 mmHg (–6.7 to +40.0 kPa)
Alarm item: Upper limit range: 2 to 300 mmHg (0.5 to 40.0 kPa) in 2 mmHg (0.5 kPa)　
�� steps, OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 0 to 298 mmHg (0.0 to 39.5 kPa) in 2 mmHg (0.5
kPa) steps
Labels: ART, ART2, RAD, FEM, DORS, AO, UA, PAP, CVP, UV, PAP, CVP, RAP, RVP,
LAP, LVP, ICP, ICP2, ICP3, ICP4, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8
SpO2 measuring range: 0 to 100%
Alarm item: Upper limit range: 51 to 100% in 1% step, OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 50 to 99% in 1% step
18. REFERENCE
Pulse rate counting range: 0, 30 to 300 beats/min

Alarm item: Upper limit range: 35 to 250 beats/min in 5 beats/min steps, OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 30 to 245 beats/min in 5 beats/min steps
Temperature measuring range: 5 to 45°C (41 to 113°F)
Alarm item: Upper limit range: 5.1 to 45°C (41.0 to 113.0°F) in 0.1°C (0.2°F) step, OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 5 to 44.9°C (41.2 to 112.8°F) in 0.1°C (0.2°F) step
Labels: Tskin, Tskin2, Tskin3, Trect, Tcore, Tnaso, Teso, Ttymp, Tart, Tren, Tblad, Taxil,
Tbrain, Tbrain2, Tbrain3, Tjug, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8
CO2 measuring range: 0 to 99 mmHg (0 to 13.2 kPa)
Alarm item: Upper limit range: 2 to 99 mmHg (1.5 to 13.0 kPa) in 5 mmHg (0.5 kPa) steps,
OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 1 to 98 mmHg (1.0 to 12.5 kPa) in 5 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
steps
Non-invasive blood pressure measuring range: 0 to 300 mmHg (0 to 40.0 kPa)
Alarm item: Upper limit range: 15 to 260 mmHg (1.5 to 35.0 kPa) in 5 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
steps, OFF
Lower Limit range: OFF, 10 to 255 mmHg (1.0 to 34.5 kPa) in 5 mmHg (0.5
kPa) steps
Power Requirements
Line voltage: AC 100 to 240 V
DC 24 V (RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver)
Line frequency: 50 or 60 Hz
Power consumption: AC 180 VA or less
Environment
Operating temperature: 10 to 40°C (50 to 104°F)
10 to 35°C (When two RU-960P are used) (50 to 95°F)
Operating humidity: 30 to 90%
30 to 85% (RU-960P)
(10 to 40°C noncondensing)
Operating atmospheric pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa
Storage temperature: –20 to +65°C (–4 to +149°F)
–15 to +55°C (recording paper) (5 to 131°F)
Storage humidity: 10 to 95%
Storage atmospheric pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa
Dimensions and Weight

MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit: 85 (W) × 270 (H) × 340 (D) mm, approx. 7 kg
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver: 250 (W) × 73.5 (H) × 170 (D) mm, approx. 2.8 kg
Safety Standard
Safety standard: IEC 60601-1: 1988
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 1: 1991
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 2: 1995
IEC 60601-1-2: 2001
IEC 60601-1-2 Amendment 1: 2004
IEC 60601-1-6: 2006
IEC 60601-1-8: 2006
18
18. REFERENCE
Type of protection against electrical shock:

CLASS I EQUIPMENT
Degree of protection against electrical shock:
No APPLIED PART
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:
IPX0 (non-protected)
Degree of safety of application in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH
OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE:
Equipment NOT suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE
ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS
OXIDE
Mode of operation: CONTINUOUS OPERATION
Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEC 60601-1-2: 2001
IEC 60601-1-2 Amendment 1: 2004

18. REFERENCE
Electromagnetic Emissions
This Model CNS-9601 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CNS-9601 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment guidance

RF emissions Group 1 The CNS-9601 uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore,
CISPR 11 its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The CNS-9601 is suitable for use in all establishments, excluding
CISPR 11 domestic establishments and those directly connected to the public low-
Harmonic emissions Class A voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
IEC 61000-3-2 purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/ Not applicable
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
Electromagnetic Immunity
This Model CNS-9601 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CNS-9601 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Electrostatic discharge ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic
(ESD) ±8 kV air ±8 kV air tiles. If floors are covered with synthetic
IEC 61000-4-2 material, the relative humidity should be at least
30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/ burst supply lines supply lines commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output
lines lines
Surge ±1 kV differential ±1 kV differential Mains power quality should be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 mode mode commercial or hospital environment.
±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode
Voltage dips, short <5% UT (>95% dip in <5% UT (>95% dip in Mains power quality should be that of a typical
interruptions and UT) for 0.5 cycle UT) for 0.5 cycle commercial or hospital environment.
voltage variations on If the user of the CNS-9601 requires continued
power supply input 40% UT (60% dip in 40% UT (60% dip in operation during power mains interruptions, it
lines UT) for 5 cycles UT) for 5 cycles is recommended that the CNS-9601 be powered
IEC 61000-4-11 from an uninterruptible power supply or a
70% UT (30% dip in 70% UT (30% dip in battery.
UT) for 25 cycles UT) for 25 cycles
<5% UT (>95% dip in <5% UT (>95% dip in

UT) for 5 s UT) for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz) levels characteristic of a typical location in a
magnetic field typical commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level
18
18. REFERENCE
IEC 60601 test

Immunity test Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the CNS-9601,
including cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation applicable to the
frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms d = 1.2 P

IEC 61000-4-6
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the

transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined

by an electromagnetic site survey*1, should be less than
the compliance level in each frequency range*2.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
*1 Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the CNS-9601 is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, the CNS-9601 should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the CNS-9601.
*2 Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

18. REFERENCE
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communications Equipment

The CNS-9601 is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the CNS-9601 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the CNS-9601 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)

power of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
(W) d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m)
can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
System Composition for EMC Test

The CNS-9601 Central Monitor is tested to comply with IEC 60601-1-2: 2001, Amendment 1: 2004 with the following
composition. If any part which is not specified by Nihon Kohden is used, the EMC specifications might not comply.
Units Cable length

MU-960R Central Monitor Main Unit —
VL-974P LCD Unit —
RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver* —
ZR-920P Receiver —
YL-960P Alarm Indicator —
WS-960P Recorder Unit —
DM-960P J Frame —
YS-093P0 J Frame Cable Set —
YS-093P1 J Frame Cable Set 2 —
Basic optical mouse 1.9 m
ML01N0 Keyboard 2.0 m
LS2208 Bar Code Reader 2.0 m
* CE mark is not applied to RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver. If necessary, use the ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver
which has the CE mark.
18
18. REFERENCE
Restriction of Radio Equipment (European Union countries only)

By ERC Recommendation 70-03E (2007-02) Annex 1 Band F1
Standard/test suites applied: EN 300 220-3 V1.1.1: 2000-09
EN 300 220-1 V1.3.1: 2000
• Receiver class: Class 1
Frequency band(s): 433.050 MHz to 434.790 MHz (adapted country)
Norway: 441.750, 441.775, 441.800, 441.825, 441.850, 441.875, 441.900,
441.925, 441.950, 441.975 MHz (by Norwegian regulations No. 1399
of 20 December 2000)
Channel step: Receiver type A: 25 kHz
Receiver type C: 50 kHz
25 kHz in Norway
Received type of modulation: FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)
Antenna connector: External BNC antenna connector
European Community CE Notice

Marking by the symbol indicates compliance of this equipment with the Medical Device Directive (MDD) 93/42/EEC.
Such marking indicates that this equipment meets the following technical standards:
MDD Essential requirement
Safety: IEC 60601-1: 1988
Amendment 1: 1991
Amendment 2: 1995
Electromagnetic Compatibility: IEC 60601-1-2: 2001
Arrhythmia Specifications on RU-960P/ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver

Following are the arrhythmia specifications of the RU-960P/ORG-9100 multiple patient receiver. (required by ANSI/AAMI
EC13:2002) CE mark is not applied to RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver. If necessary, use the ORG-9100 Multiple
Patient Receiver which has the CE mark.
Tall T-wave rejection capability: Complies with the heights of T-waves from 0 mV to 1.2 mV specified in ANSI/
AAMI EC13 Sect. 5.1.2.1(c)
Heart rate averaging: Calculated by averaging the effective RR intervals in the most recent 16 seconds.
Minimum 4, Maximum 12
Heart rate meter accuracy and response to irregular rhythm:
Ventricular bigeminy: 80 bpm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy:
60 bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy:
120 bpm
Bidirectional systoles: 90 bpm
Response time of heart rate meter to change in heart rate:
HR change from 80 to 120 bpm: 9 to 12 seconds
HR change from 80 to 40 bpm: 9 to 13 seconds
Time to alarm for tachycardia:
Ventricular tachycardia (amplitude 1 mV p-v, heart rate 206 bpm):
at ×1 gain: 4 to 10 seconds
at ×0.5 gain: 4 to 7 seconds
Ventricular tachycardia (amplitude 2 mV p-v, heart rate 195 bpm):

18. REFERENCE
at ×0.5 gain: 5 to 8 seconds

Pacemaker pulse rejection capability, without overshoot:
Complies with the amplitudes of pacemaker pulses ±2 to ±700 mV and widths
0.1 to 2 ms specified in ANSI/AAMI EC13 Sect. 4.1.4.1
Pacemaker pulse rejection capability, with overshoot:
Overshoot amplitudes and time constants of ±0.12 mV/100 ms to ±2 mV/4 ms
(As defined by method B of ANSI/AAMI EC13 Sect. 4.1.4.2, this corresponds to
the pacemaker pulses amplitudes and widths of ±4 mV/2 ms to amplitudes ±80
mV/0.1 ms.)
18
18. REFERENCE
Standard Accessories
NOTE
• Use only Nihon Kohden specified parts and accessories to assure
maximum performance from your instrument.
• When ordering the following accessories, specify the supply code no.
When the supply code no. is not provided with the accessory, specify
the code no.
Name Qty Code no. Supply code no.

Power cord 1 –– ––
Options and Consumables

Alarm indicator 1 YL-960P ––
Recorder unit 1 WS-960P ––
Multiple patient receiver 1 RU-960P* ––
Receiver 1 ZR-920P ––
J Frame 1 DM-960P ––
J Frame cable set 1 YS-093P0 ––
J Frame cable set 2 1 YS-093P1 ––
16 patient expansion program kit 1 QP-962P ––
Full disclosure filing program kit 1 QP-963P ––
12 lead ECG interpretation filing
1 QP-964P ––
program kit
Keyboard (ML01N0) 1 –– ––
Mouse (Basic optical mouse) 1 908109 ––
Network printer 1 –– ––
Blank module 1 EK-960P ––
RU-960P maintenance cable 1 YS-094P3 ––
CNS-9601 serial cable 1 YS-094P2 ––
* CE mark is not applied to RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver. If necessary,

use the ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver which has the CE mark.

18. REFERENCE
LCD Display

Cable binder 1 –– ––
Cable cover 1 –– ––
Name plate 1 DP-960P ––

Recording paper 1 FQW50-2-100 A226
Thermal head cleaner pen 1 40461 ––

CE mark is not applied to RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver. If necessary, use
the ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver which has the CE mark.

Antenna 1 ZA-002P ––
Antenna base 1 ZA-004P ––
Band pass filter for channels: 1001 to
1 ZA-006P ––
3040, A000 to A620
Band pass filter for channels: A2F0 to
1 ZA-007P ––
A910
1 ZA-008P ––
AC10
1 ZA-009P ––
AF10
Band pass filter for channels: 4001 to
1 ZA-010P ––
6080, AC80 to B2A0
Band pass filter for channels: AEF0 to
1 ZA-011P ––
B510
Band pass filter for channels: B1F0 to
1 ZA-012P ––
B810
Band pass filter for channels: B4F0 to
1 ZA-013P ––
BB10
Band pass filter for channels: B740 to
1 ZA-014P ––
BD60
Band pass filter for channels: BA60 to
1 ZA-015P ––
C0FE
DM-960P J Frame

J frame 1 DM-960P ––
Display fixing plate 1 set –– ––
Display spacer 1 –– ––
J frame slider 1 –– ––
18
18. REFERENCE

Hexagon socket head bolt (M4 × 10)
12 –– ––
(including two spare bolts)
Pan head screw with spring washer
4 –– ––
PS4 × 16
Hexagon wrench for M4 bolts 1 –– ––
YS-093P0 J Frame Cable Set

VL-974P touch panel cable, 0.36 m 1 718323 ––
RGB cable (DSUB-DSUB), 0.35 m 1 915467 ––
VL-974P power cord, 0.47 m 1 718332 ––
WS-960P cable, 0.35 m 1 718359 ––
RU-960P single cable 1 718341 ––
Insulation lock (T30MR) 1 132001 ––
Screw BH3 × 8 1 123279 ––
YS-093P1 J Frame Cable Set 2

VL-974P touch panel cable, 0.36 m 1 718323 ––
RGB cable (DSUB-DSUB), 0.35 m 1 915467 ––
VL-974P power cord, 0.47 m 1 718332 ––
WS-960P cable, 0.35 m 1 718359 ––
RU-960P dual cable 1 918268 ––
Insulation lock (T30MR) 1 132001 ––
Screw BH3 × 8 1 123279 ––

18. REFERENCE
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems
When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical
potential difference between the instruments. Potential difference between
instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the
instruments, resulting in electrical shock (micro shock). Therefore, electrical
instruments must be appropriately installed as specified in IEC 60601-1-1.
The following is an extract from IEC 60601-1-1 “Medical electrical equipment

Part 1: General requirements for safety”. For details, refer to IEC 60601-1-1 and
consult with a biomedical engineer.
Examples of combinations of MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT and

non-medical electrical equipment
Situation No. Equipment A Equipment B Solution

1 IEC 60601/X OK
OK, if ENCLOSURE
LEAKAGE CURRENT
is less than 0.5 mA. If the
1a IEC XXXXX ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE
CURRENT is more than
0.5 mA: Solution Q
(separating transformers).
2a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/B OK
2b IEC 60601/F IEC XXXXX for B any one of P, Q, R
for A solution P
2c IEC 60601/B IEC XXXXX
for B any one of P, Q, R
3a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/B OK
3b IEC 60601/F IEC XXXXX OK
3c IEC 60601/B IEC XXXXX for A solution P
4 See 3a, 3b, 3c
for A solution P or S
5a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/B
(groundloop possible)
for A solution P or S
5b IEC 60601/X IEC XXXXX
(groundloop possible)
6a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/X OK (with S)
6b IEC 60601/X IEC XXXXX OK (with S)
IEC 60601/B = IEC 60601-1 EQUIPMENT of TYPE B with PATIENT

connection
IEC 60601/F = IEC 60601-1 EQUIPMENT of TYPE BF or TYPE CF (or TYPE
B without PATIENT connection)
IEC 60601/X = IEC 60601-1 EQUIPMENT of TYPE B or TYPE BF or TYPE
CF
IEC XXXXX = Equipment complying with e.g. IEC 348, IEC 950 etc.
P: additional protective earth

Q: additional separating transformer
R: floating power supply
S: separation 18
18. REFERENCE
PATIENT Medically-used Non-medically used

Situation No.
ENVIRONMENT room room
1 A
PE
2 A B
PE PE
3 A B
PE PE
4 A B
PE
PE
5 A B
PE
(V)
PE
6 A B
PE
(V)
PE
Legend:
(V) = Potential difference between different localities.
> < = SEPARATION DEVICE.
PE = Protective earth.

cns9601 Om-C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

cns9601 Om-C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

If you have any comments or suggestions

Review Windows................................................................................................... 1.11

Opening Other Windows with Function Keys............................................. 1.17

Section 2 Panel Description................................................................... 2.1

Section 3 Preparation............................................................................. 3.1

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Setting Sync Sound................................................................................................ 4.5

Section 5 Admitting/Discharging Patients............................................ 5.1 12

Resume Monitoring.............................................................................................. 5.13

Section 6 Alarm Function....................................................................... 6.1

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Alarm Limits Recording.............................................................................. 6.15 1

Section 7 All Beds Screen...................................................................... 7.1 10-5

Screen Description................................................................................................. 7.3

Selecting the Source Pulse Rate................................................................ 7.15

Section 8 Multi Patient Alarms Windows........................................... 8.0.1

Section 8-1 Multi Patient Alarm Events Window................................................... 8.1.1

Section 8-2 Multi Patient Limits Window............................................................... 8.2.1

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Editing Group Names.......................................................................................... 8.2.5 1

Selecting the Measurement Data Displayed on the Wave Display

ECG 12 Lead Printing........................................................................................... 9.17

Section 10 Review Windows............................................................... 10.0.1

Section 10-1 Trend Window..................................................................................... 10.1.1

Section 10-2 Tabular Trend Window....................................................................... 10.2.1

Section 10-3 Hemodynamics Window.................................................................... 10.3.1

Section 10-4 Arrhythmia Recall Window................................................................ 10.4.1

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Displaying the Arrhythmia Recall Window......................................................... 10.4.2 1

Section 10-5 ST Recall Window.............................................................................. 10.5.1 10-9

Printing Files............................................................................................ 10.5.7

Section 10-6 Full Disclosure Window..................................................................... 10.6.1

Section 10-7 ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window........................................................ 10.7.1

C.10 Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Scrolling the Files in the Measurement Value Table.......................................... 10.7.7 1

Section 10-9 Alarm Events Window....................................................................... 10.9.1 10-3

Overview...................................................................................................................... 10.9.2 10-4

Scrolling the Alarm Events................................................................................ 10.9.5

Section 10-10 Report Window................................................................................. 10.10.1

Section 11 Recording............................................................................. 11.1

C.12 Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Remote Delayed Waveform Recording.................................................... 11.10 1

Section 12 Overview Bed Window......................................................... 12.1 8-2

Section 13 Parameter Setup................................................................... 13.1 10-4

Turning the Impedance Respiration Measurement ON/OFF.............................. 13.16

Section 14 Personal Setup and Setup................................................... 14.1

Section 15 RU-960P Multiple Patient Receiver..................................... 15.1

C.14 Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

SpO2 Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 15.8 1

Respiration Monitoring............................................................................. 16.12

Section 17 Maintenance......................................................................... 17.1

Section 18 Reference.............................................................................. 18.1

C.16 Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Alarm History............................................................................................ 18.15 1

Previous Models Remarks when Using

*1 Vital sign alarm recording, ST alarm recording, arrhythmia recording

This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.

2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

5. To Shutdown After Use

7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.

8. Maintenance and Inspection

Operator’s Manual CNS-9601 

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

C. Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Operator’s Manual CNS-9601

Operator’s Manual CNS-9601